C(4e (!)C)-S Hr
File: 180
Further disseimination only as directed by Manager, Environmental Restoration Program D.B Directorate, Ejelson Air Force Base, February 19,93, or higher DoD authority
United States Air Force
Environmental Restoration Program Elelson Air Force Base, Alaska
Site Management Plan Elelson Air Force Base, Alaska
April 1993 Site Management Plan Eielson Air Force Base, Alaska
April 1993
Prepared for U.S. Air Force Eielson Air Force Base * ~~~~~~~Environmental Restoration Program Fairbanks Alaska under Contract DE-ACO6-76RL0 1830
Prepared by Pacific Northwest Laboratory
for Environmental Management Operations under a Related Services Agreement with the U.S. Department of Energy Environmental Management Operations Richland, Washington 99352 TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0 INTRODUCTION ...... 1
2.0 OPERABLE UNIT INVESTIGATIONS...... 17
3.0 SOURCE EVALUATION REPORTS...... 30
4.0 TECHNOLOGY DEMONSTRATIONS...... 34
5.0 SITE-WIDE INVESTIGATION...... 35
6.0 REFERENCES ...... 40 APPENDIX A: FIELD SAMPLING PLAN ...... A.1
APPENDIX B: QUALITY ASSURANCE PROJECT PLAN...... B.1
APPENDIX C: HEALTH AND SAFETY PLAN ...... C.1 LIST OF TABLES
1.1 Summary of IRP Investigations and Reports ...... 5 1.2 Source Area Descriptions...... 7 1.3 List of Potential ARARs...... 13 2.1 Schedule for Operable-Unit Investigations...... 20 2.2 Operable Unit Source Areas...... 21 3.1 Summary of Source Evaluation Report Recommendations for Eiel son AFB ...... 31 5.1 Schedule for Site-Wide Investigation...... 39
LIST OF FIGURES
1.1 Site Location Map ...... 16 2.1 Operable Unit 1 Source Areas...... 23 . ~2.2 Blair Lakes Source Areas...... 24 2.3 Operable Unit 2 Source Areas...... 25 2.4 Operable Unit 3 Source Areas...... 26 2.5 Operable Unit 4 Source Areas...... 27 2.6 Operable Unit 5 Source Areas...... 28 2.7 Operable Unit 6 Source Areas...... 29 3.1 Source Evaluation Report Source Areas ...... 33 * ~~~~~~~~~1.0INTRODUCTION
Elelson Air Force Base (AFB) is located in central Alaska approximately 25 miles southeast of Fairbanks (Figure 1.1). During the 1980s, soil and ground-water contamination at the base were identified and evaluated through the Department of Defense's Installation Restoration Program (IRP). In November 1989, Elelson AFB was listed by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (USEPA) on the National Priorities List of Federal Superfund sites. In May 1991, the United States Air Force (USAF), USEPA, and the Alaska Department of Environmental Conservation (ADEC) signed a Federal Facilities Agreement (FFA) for Eielson AFB that established the framework and schedule for environmental clean-up efforts under the Comprehensive Environmental Response and Compensation Liability Act (CERCLA), the Resource Conservation and Recovery Act, and applicable state law. Remedial investigation and feasibility study (RI/FS) activities were initiated to satisfy the requirements of these regulations. This Site Management Plan (SMP) is the planning document for implementing * ~~RI/FS activities at Eielson AFB. Purposes of the SMP are as follows: *to describe the approach for confirming the nature and extent of contamination at the base and selecting appropriate remedial actions *to coordinate investigations, to maximize the effective use of data and resources, and to expedite remediation *to provide generic methods for conducting field investigations to ensure comparability of data. This SMP does not provide a review or interpretation of past studies at Eielson, and does not include planning for remedial design or remedial action. The SMP is a primary document required by the FFA for Eielson AFB. The FFA is the overall controlling document for all activities identified in this SMP.
1.1 SITE DESCRIPTION Discussions of Site background, physical setting, and past waste management practices can be found in the IRP reports for Eielson AFB (Table 1.1). The primary contaminants of concern are petroleum, oil, and * ~~lubricant (POL) products and chlorinated solvents. The FFA identifies 60 1 known or potential source areas of contamination at the Site. In the FFA, 26 source areas were grouped into six Operable Units (OUs) based on the type of release that occurred at each area. Three additional source areas were assigned to OUs after the FFA was signed. Each CU will be characterized through an RI/FS to confirm the nature and extent of contamination at each source area and to develop and evaluate remedial alternatives. Thirty-four potential source areas were not initially included in the RI/FS process because they did not appear to present a significant risk to human health or the environment. These areas are collectively referred to as Source Evaluation Report (SER) sources. Four additional potential source areas were designated as SER sites after the FFA was signed. Each SER site will be evaluated to determine if no further action (NFA), assignment to an CU for complete RI/FS characterization, or interim remedial action is required. Table 1.2 identifies each source area at Eielson AFE and identifies the OU or SER to which it belongs.
1.2 GOALS OF REMEDIATION The goal of site remediation under CERCLA is to reduce contamination to levels that protect human health and the environment. During the RI/FS process, remediation goals are established in part through the consideration of applicable or relevant and appropriate requirements that specify acceptable exposure levels for various constituents. After remediation is complete, concentrations of contaminants must not exceed federal and state environmental regulations, criteria, and standards that are determined legally applicable or relevant and appropriate to the site. Relevant and appropriate requirements are those that are not legally applicable, but address circumstances that are sufficiently similar to conditions at the site. Other nonpromulgated criteria, advisories, and guidance may also be considered in the development of remediation goals. A preliminary list of potential laws and regulations that may be applicable or relevant and appropriate to Eielson AFB is provided in Table 1.3.
2 . ~1.3 APPROACH TO CERCLA INVESTIGATIONS Four types of CERCLA investigations will be coordinated to accomplish the objectives of environmental cleanup at Eielson AFB:
OU RI/FS - The RI/FS evaluates the nature and extent of contamination at each source area within an OU and identifies and evaluates remedial alternatives. The RI/FS includes a baseline risk assessment, which evaluates the potential threat to human health and the environment in the absence of any remedial action.
*Source evaluation reports - Potential source areas will be evaluated based on existing data, and an appropriate course of action for each will be recommended.
*Site-wide investigation - Information needed to support other investigations and to complete the characterization of the site will be collected and analyzed.
Technology demonstrations - These investigations will assess the field performance and feasibility of potential remedial alternatives. These investigations are closely related, and data generated by one type of study will be used to support others.
1.4 ORGANIZATION OF SMP Sections 2 through 5 of this SMP describe the objectives and approach to each type of CERCLA investigation at the Site. The appendices contain the Field Sampling Plan, Quality Assurance Project Plan, and Health and Safety Plan that apply to all Site activities. The purpose and contents of each appendix are briefly described below. *Appendix A, Field Sampling Plan, presents the procedures to be used for field investigation tasks identified in the work plans. Procedures used by subcontractors CH2M Hill and Pacific Northwest Laboratory are included in this appendix. Appendix B, Quality Assurance Project Plan, defines procedures to ensure that data quality objectives identified in the work plans are met. Quality assurance procedures used by CH2M Hill and Pacific Northwest Laboratory are included in this appendix. *Appendix C, Health and Safety Plan, provides procedures and information needed to safely perform field work at Eielson AFB.
3 These generic plans are intended to provide consistency among the different investigations and ensure comparability of data. Variations from or additions to these generic plans will be documented in OU Management Plans or event- specific sampling and analysis plans (SAPs).
4 TABLE 1.1. Summary of the IRP Investigations and Reports for Elelson Air Force Base
IMP Author Report and Information Obtained Date Status
PHASE)I CH2M HILL IRP Records Search: Detailed review of pertinent installation 11-82 complete records, contacts with 15 gov't organizations, she reconnaissance, calculated Hazardous Assessment Rating Methodology on 43 source areas. Recommended 17 source areas for further investigation.
PHASE 11 Dames and IRP Phase 11Confirmation/Ouantification Stage 1. First Draft 2-85 complete Moore Report: Sampled 17 recommended source areas. Recommended further action at the source areas to determine the extent of contamination.
Dames and lAP Phase 11Confirmation/Quantification Stage 2. Final Report: 443-88 complete Moore Sampled 3 source areas. Reported analytical results, significance of findings. Recommended further action at the source areas to determine the extent of contamination. PHASE Ill None None.
PHASE IV Hazardous Statement of Work Phase NV-A Remedial Action Plan lRP: For 6-86 oplt Material IS source areas in the fuel saturated area (FSA). Technical Center
SAIC lRP Phase rV-A Remedial Action Plan. Draft Work Plan For 7-10-87 complete Additional Data Collection: 12 source areas.
SAIC IRP Phase NV-A Remedial Action Plan. Preliminary Evaluation 7-10-87 complete of Site Characterization Data: Site characterization and data ______gaps.
SAIC Identification and Labeling of Drummed Waste at Elelson AFB. 7-10D-87 complete
SAIC lAP Phase IV-A Remedial Action Plan. Work Plan For 8-18-87 complete Completing RVFS Activities: Field investigation, sampling, and remedial action alternatives.
HLA IRP Stage 3 Work Plan and RI: 24 source area results and 1-88 complete significance of findings, risk assessment, and recommendations.
SAIC lRP RIIFS of the Fuel Saturated Area (FSA). Draft Interim 47-788 complete Report of RI: 12 source areas.
SAIC lRP RIVFS at Site 25, The Weathered Tank Sludge Burial Site: 2-15-88 complete Results, nature and extent of contamination, baseline risk 11-16-88 assessment, and remedial action recommendations.
RI/FS SAIC IRP RI/FS of the FSA. Draft RI Report: RI at I11source areas. 2-8-9 complete Presented results, nature and extent of contamination, baseline risk assessment, and recommendations,
SAIC lRP RI/FS of the FMA. Decision Document For Selected Sites: 2-27-89 complete 4 source areas.
SAIC lRP Draft FS of the FSA. Initial Screening of Remedial 3-89 complete Technologies and Process Options.
5 TABLE 1.1. Summary of the IRP Investigations and Reports for Elelson Alr Force Base
IRP Author Report and Information Obtained Dale Status
RI/FS SAIC IRP Draft FS of FSA. Development and Evaluation of 4-89 complete (cont'd) Alternatives ______
SAIC IRP Draft FS of FSA. Detailed Analysis of Alternatives. 5-89 complete
HIA IRP Stage 4 Work Plan and RI: Samples 24 source areas and 5-90 complete presented findings, risk assessment, and recommendations.
Jacobs IRP Draft Stage 4 Sampling Analysis Plan: Developed 3-91 incomplete Engineering sampling plan and methodology for SERs. ______
CH2M HILL lAP Vehicle Maintenance Shop and Fuel Pipeline Report: 7-91 complete Sampling and study. _____ tE 3t et 3 3 j wC -,w ww Lii Ci) C) CD C/) ~ ~~~~~~C/D CD ~~0 ~~0 ~~~~~~~0
C~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~E
2 (9 0~~~~~~~~~~
00 0 le
C
2 .0 *-o:C oE.2E -2 '0,
* ~~~~~~~~~eI~~0c 0 0*0 0 0 55~~~~~~00 ,1 *. e0 se 10
-
ol '2 O 0O O"O 0I). ~ .. I t
uj 0 0 00Ž 6 0 00 0
I~~~~~~e.C CC~ .* .
QE v -~~~0 *2o'a 00~~~~~~
0~~~~~~~~~~~~
a~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~I S~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
0)~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
0 0~~~~~~~~~~~~0 zi
0'O0. . 0< N N 0 0~~~~~~~~< N 9 *W co W~ a 0 0 cc
VNj2 0 If (0 ') (0 0 (0 (0 (0 In C
E CO cc~ ~ ~ ~ ~ C ow
0 5 0 C ~ ~~~~~~~~~N 0 -6a -R o , , C - 'b 0 00- .o2 0 f 2
* 0 S n .2 o Em C 00~~~1V06 o
0.5 p' ~~~~~0, a- 0 2 =0C§M 0 *v CVV 7
0 L 2 o0 - (L 0a IL
II~~~~0 ~~~~~~j ~~~~ 0 -Ž ~~~~~~~0
-. 2~~t. 0 = c I..E. ao600 O . a. ~ a ,-~ . S 1~ S1
~~~ *C~~v
A~~~~~~~~6a a F
0 ~~ ~~~~~~~~~~~~~000 -I -.- ~~ ŽIŽ ŽI0 -r -
0czto
0 C -8 (C
A A~ 0 UN M ) 0 0 Q W) w
& E
0 -a 14 S .0' = S 3 t.V. 0Vli 0 C- 0 00 v~ ~~2.E 1 -0 Q.=E 60.~~~~~~~2-60, 0 .6 0 0 go- 1 0 I~~~~~~~ - CC.S *e
-V 'a 'a v 0 00 E' Ea'
* -~~~~~~0 I. Is~~~~~~tjSŽ .r'C- ii ~~~~~~~~~~~~gz #: T -E k~'
-~EE~2-~E- ~EI*i - 'S E'La o E9~ oE9 2si.~~~~~~~81a -~ i -6 o
1.p~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ .'
C C~~~09 0 0 0 C 0~~~Z' a 4 t ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~000
C~~o O 0 . C 0 t
- C ~Oa-COC
* ~~~~~~00
0 CD~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
0' *- ~~ E C3 CO
0 c c cc 9 CLCO Cc
*n 0v -M M
- C V ~~~~~~~~~ o - ,------0
0 * 0 0CciŽ3~~0 0. 0
T E cc~ aEE~
oAS ~16 g~- ~-16
Om ~~0a0 .EC0...e * , .2 0E ~~~~ro01E
C 00 , fl2c.0t vo 5 aro 0 0 One E 0 20> &c -Q *1 E 0 jC ~~ I~.jE 00 -E 0 C S 0 . MO *.0 1 * .~~~... o~~~~ B5E1 A~~~~Es 0 E ~~ :~~ E E fg 000 E 0 0 0 2~l0 o 0 0 E~~~~- 0 E cSo~ *-j E ; z 1! i
-0.a~m A21 OI o>iS1e~.6cE
0iz ~00
CO 1 0 0 0 6
-0 - 2 -t 11 ~~~E 0S~~~~ ~ ~~~~~~~~~~, 0~~~~~~~ JAVI6 ~
C 6O
2 10, 1 0.~~~~1 0 L _~~~~~~w _ _ _ _
I: cc Er cc a: a: a: a: a: a:
* 0 00
Ca. 0 C~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ 0i o 0 0 a 0 SE- - E o ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ 2:Ei 0 0 . 2s iZ En- * 0 Cc j m j0 -o a0 *C ~ E .0 *. a* 0 aaS 2o * oE V ~ ~ 0 0 -7~ 0 Q0
* ~~~0E.0 0 0 a 0
~~.2EI ~~~ ~ ~~ w"- c 00 reO0~ S -~~~~0 0 .2 0D2 *ŽV*~~~~~ ~~ O 00h 0 ~~~~0 ~~S 0~~a> .j~~~c a1r~~~c s
0 3~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- r 0 0 0 .
0~~~~~ 0 0100 0
gf a 20m ' 4 o~~~~~Co C E -6 c (L 'D C c C 0t.
0 0~~~~~
C N~~~~~~ x a. a.c a )
A' S 0.~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~0
0 cox .r . =:-a .- 0
N O E 0 0 E~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~i 0~~~~~~~~~~~( 'M is C 4 (L(0C (0 ED FD Fn
* AR ______0~~~~~~~~~~1 CC tn L E & D to- 0 0 w W 0 W ui'L W Lii - h U)0 CO CO CO a:
* z z z 2 z z z z z z z 2 .0
0 3~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
0 it~~~~~~~~ .0 v CŽ . j ..~~ .c C) 0. - U 0 0 .a -0 0 M-E E E~ '4 - 1 1 5~~ 2 i 2 S E 0 0 E
V 0 E o2 , 7F 0 *z
* 0 o~~~~~~~0 -aEE I.E~~~~~~: E
- .2a. E. 0 0 0 L U0 Z0
K ~~~~10 - 00
0 Io,0 C S is 00 I. ~ ~&U ~ c 2 a o 0
A~~~~~~At
-~ 0 0 -
I . _~~~~~~0 0 w~~~20D0 u C C C OC C 0 C C fi n nn fi fi~ ~~z ~~~~n fi a'
0 ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~0
0
2*~~~~~~~~1 TABLE 1.3. Ust of Potential ARARs
Law Regulation Requirement FEDERAL REQUIREMENTS
Resource Conservation Groundwater Protection Standards Maximum Concentration of Constituents for and Recovery Acl (RCRA) (40 CFR 264.92 thru 264.95) Groundwater Protection at the point of compliance (limits established for arsenic, barium, cadmium, chromium, lead, mercury, selenium, silver, endrin, findlane, methoxychlor, toxaphene, 2,4-D, and
______2,4,5-TP Silvex)
Technical Standards and Corrective Establishes the requirements for underground Action Requirements for Owners and storage tanks (USTs). Owners and operators must Operators of Underground Storage contain and immediately clean up a spil or Tanks (40 CFR 280) overfill. Cleanup must remove free product to the maximum extent practicable as determined by the implementing agency. Contaminated soil and groundwater must be investigated, and if the investigation so indicates, a corrective action plan for the soil and groundwater must be developed and implemented. Criteria for Classification of Solid Waste Facilities shall not cause discharge of Disposal Facilities and Practices contaminants to surface water, contaminate an (40 CFR 257) underground drinking water source or result in flood washout of solid waste. Criteria are not ______~~~~~applicable to hazardous waste.
Safe Drinking Water Act National Primary Drinking Water Enforceable Maximum Contaminant Levels (MCLs) 0 ~ ~~~(SDWA) Regulations for 11 inorganic and 38 organic componsi (40 CFR 141) public drinking water systems. Nonenocae Maximum Contaminant Level Goals (MCLGs) have been set for both organic and inorganic compounds. National Secondary Drinking Water Nonenforceable Secondary Maximum Regulations Contaminant Levels have been set for aluminum, (40 CFR 143) chloride, color, copper, corrosivity, fluoride, foaming agents, iron, manganese, odor, pH, silver, sulfate, total dissolved solids, and zinc. Sole Source Aquifers Establishes criteria for identifying critical aquifer ______(40 CFR 149) protection areas.
Clean Water Act (OWA) Nonenforceable federal ambient water quality criteria have been established for protection of human health and protection of aquatic life.
Prohibits discharge of contaminants Into or fl material to be placed in wetlands without a Permit. Requires actions to avoid adverse effects, minimize potential harm, and preserve and enhance wetlands to the extent possible.
13 TABLE 1.3. Ust of Potential ARARs
Law Regulation Requirement
Clean Water Act (CWA) Numerous requirements have been established (continued) including effluent limitations, water quality standards, national performance standards, standards for taxies, pretreatment standards, NPDES requirements, ocean discharge criteria, and dredge of fill material requirements.
Toxic Substances Control PC~s (40 CFR 761) Establishes requirements for the storage and
Act (TSCA) ______disposal of PCBs.
Clean Air Act (CAA) National Ambient Air Quality Standards Establishes maximum allowable concentrations in (40 CFR 50) ambient air.
National Emission Standards for Establishes requirements for disposal of asbestos
Hazardous Air Pollutants (40 CFR 61) ______
Occupational Safety and (29 CFR 1910.120) OSHA requirements for workers engaged in Health Act hazardous materials response or hazardous waste operations.
National Historic (36 CFR 800) Action to preserve historic properties and minimize Preservation Act harm to National Historic Landmarks.
Endangered Species Act (50 CFR 200 and 402) Establishes requirements for the protection of endangered species and for preservation of the critical habitat of endangered species.
Migratory Bird Treaty Act (50 CFR 10, 20, and 21) Protects native birds from unregulated take including exposure to hazardous materials that could cause poisoning or impaired reproduction. Fish and Wildlife Requires consultation with the Fish and Wildlife Coordination Act Service.
ALASKA REQUIREMENTS
Alaska Solid Waste Management Sets requirements for the management of solid Regulations (18 AAC 60) waste. Wastes must be managed to prevent violation of the state water quality criteria and drinking water standards,
Alaska Hazardous Waste Management Sets requirements for the management of Regulations hazardous waste. RCRA groundwater protection (18 AAC 62) standards are incorporated by reference.
Alaska Underground Storage Tank Sets requirements for USTs. Suspected releases Regulations (18 MAC 78) from USTs or underground piping must be investigated and reported. Corrective action required for confirmed releases includes free product removal and development of a plan to clean up contaminated soils and groundwater if there is a significant risk. Specifies cleanup standards for soil. Groundwater and surface water must achieve the applicable water quality criteria, use best demonstrated treatment technology, or demonstrate no significant threat.
14 TABLE 1.3 Ust of Potential ARAR9
Law Regulation Requirement Alaska Oil Pollution Regulations (18 Sets requirements and time frames for release AAC 75) reporting, cleanup, arnd disposal of hazardous substances, oil, and other petroleum products that are released to lands or waters of the State of Alaska. Provides Interim guidance for non-UST contaminated soil cleanup to satisfy the Regional Supervisor. Alaska Drinking Water Regulations (18 Establishes maximum contaminant concentrations AAC 80) (MCCa) for organic and inorganic contaminants in public water systems. The Alaska MCCs are ______equivalent to the SD WA MCLs. Alaska Water Quality Standards (18 Establishes water quality criteria for protected MAC 70) water use classes in both groundwater and surface water. Chemical specific criteria are equivalent to the federal ambient water quality criteria. Includes a nondegradation policy for waters of higher quality than the crileria.
Alaska Air Quality Control Regulations Adopts ambient air quality standards equivalent to (18MGA 50) the national standards. Set more stringent standards for particulates and sulfur dioxide in Class I and Class 11areas
15 * ~~~~FACILITY ro K~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ILO~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ 1CNM -. 1~~~~F
Q [19\K \ ~~~~~~~II -- 4>~~EEL
0 8~7 R O NDR
1 Th~RE1Regionc[ Locaticr MACQ Stie monogement Pion, --eisor Air Force s
16 2.0 OPERABLE UNIT INVESTIGATIONS
Each of the six OUs will complete the RI/FS process under CERCLA. The RI/FS investigations will be performed in accordance with the Guidance for Conducting Remedial Investigations and Feasibility Studies Under CERCLA (USEPA 1988), the National Contingency Plan, and other applicable guidance. Existing data from IRP investigations will be used to the greatest extent possible. An OU RI/FS Management Plan will be prepared and will include the following information: *source area description *summary of existing data *source area conceptual model *results of a screening risk assessment *identification of data needed to complete the characterization of the source areas in the OU. After additional data are collected and analyzed, an RI report and * ~baseline risk assessment will be completed for each OU. The baseline risk assessment provides the basis for determining whether or not remedial action is necessary, and the justification for performing remedial actions. An FS report that evaluates and selects remedial alternatives for each source area will be prepared concurrently with the RI. Data collected in the Site-wide investigation and technology demonstrations will be used to support the RI/FS characterization. The information in the final RI/FS reports will be used to prepare a Proposed Plan for site remediation. After public and regulatory comments on the Proposed Plan have been received, a Record of Decision (ROD) will be prepared. The ROD is a binding agreement signed by the USAF, USEPA, and ADEC, which specifies the remedial action plan for the OU. The schedule for completing OU RI/FS investigations is specified in the FFA and summarized in Table 2.1. Each OU Management Plan includes a working schedule for specific RI/FS activities.
17 The nature of contamination at each of the six OUs is summarized in the following sections. Table 2.2 identifies the source areas in each OU. Conceptual models and details about each CU investigation can be found in the individual CU Management Plans.
2.1 OPERABLE UNIT 1 Eight source areas are included in OU-1. Three of these areas are shown in Figure 2.1. The others are located at Blair Lakes Target Range Facility, which is approximately 30 miles southeast of the main part of the base (Figure 2.2). OU-i source areas are characterized by POL contamination of soil and ground water and the presence of nonaqueous-phase (free) petroleum product on the ground-water table. An interim remedial action (IRA) at OU-1 was required to reduce the volume of free product on the water table. The IRA ROD was signed in October 1992 (USEPA 1992). The selected remedial actions include bioventing, vacuum extraction, and passive free-product extraction (trenching). The full RI/FS characterization of CU-i will be conducted in 1993 and in accordance with the OU-1 Management Plan (USAF 1993f).
2.2 OPERABLE UNIT 2 Seven source areas are included in OU-2. Source area locations are shown in Figure 2.3. These areas are also characterized by POL contamination of soil and ground water and the presence of free product on the water table; however, interim remedial actions were not performed because the nature and extent of contamination were not adequately defined. The RI/FS for OU-2 was conducted in 1991 in accordance with the OU-2 Management Plan (PNL 1991) and reported in the draft RI and FS reports and Baseline Risk Assessment (USAF 1993a, 1993b; PNL 1992). The final reports will be completed in 1993.
2.3 OPERABLE UNIT 3 Three source areas are included in OU-3. Source area locations are shown in Figure 2.4. The primary concern at two of these source areas (DP44 and WP45) is contamination of ground water by solvents, particularly trichloroethene (TCE). The third source area (ST57) appears to be the source of benzene contamination identified in ground water at DP44. The RI/FS for
18 * ~OU-3 was conducted in 1992 in accordance with the Management Plan for Operable Units 3, 4, and 5 (USAF 1992). The RI/FS reports will be completed in 1993.
2.4 OPERABLE UNIT 4 Seven source areas are included in OU-4. Source area locations are shown in Figure 2.5. These areas were used for disposal of sludge from fuel tank cleaning, drum storage, or disposal of asphalt emulsion and drums. The RI/FS for OU-4 was conducted in 1992 in accordance with the Operable Units 3, 4, and 5 Management Plan. The RI/FS report will be completed in 1993.
2.5 OPERABLE UNIT 5 Three source areas are included in OU-5. Source area locations are shown in Figure 2.6. Two are former landfills, and one is a former fire training area located within the boundaries of former landfill LFO3. Landfill LFO4 was also used as an explosives ordnance disposal (EOD) area. The RI/FS for OU-5 was conducted in 1992 in accordance with the Management Plan for Operable * ~Units 3, 4, and 5. The RI/FS report will be completed in 1993.
2.6 OPERABLE UNIT 6 Operable Unit 6 contains a single source area, the ski lodge well contamination (WP38). The location of this source area is shown in Figure 2.7. The contaminated ground water in this area occurs in the fractured bedrock of the upland area of the base rather than in the floodplain sediments in the main area of the base. The FFA required an IRA for OU-6; however, no free petroleum product was detected on the water table in 1992, and no IRA was necessary. The RI/FS for OU-6 will be conducted for 1993 in accordance with the OU-6 Management Plan (USAF 1993g).
19 TABLE 2.1. Schedule for Operable Unit Invesligations
Operable Unit Management Plan RI/FS Record of Decision 1 ~~~~~~15-Jan-93t0 20-Nov-93 29-Apr-94
interim Action I B NAlb NA I15-Jun-92
2 17-Jun-91 21-Jul-93 21-Dec-93
3 13-Nov-92 19-Oct-94 19-Mar-95 4 13-Nov-92 19-Oct-94 19-Mar-95
5 13-Nov-92 19-Oct-94 19-Mar-95
B 15-Jan-93 20-Nov-93 29-Apr-94
Interim Action 6B NA NA 15-Jun.93(c) (a) Dates from Federal Facilities Agreement Attachment A (Revised), 9-Jun-92 (b NA Not applicable ( Not applicable because Interim action was not needed at OU-6.
20 TABLE 2.2. Operable Unit Source Areas
Operable Unit 1
5T20 Refueling Loop Fuel-Saturated Area
ST48 Power Plant Fuel Spill
ST49 Building 1300 LUST Spill Site
SS50 Blair Lake Vehicle Maintenance
5651 Blair Lakes Ditch
SS52 Blair Lakes Diesel Spill
SS53 Blair Lakes Fuel Spill DP54 Blair Lakes Drum Disposal Site Operable Unit 2
STIO E-2 POL Storage Area STI 1 Fuel Saturated Area
STI13 E-4 Diesel Fuel Spill
SS14 E-2 JP-4 Spill Area ST1 8 Oil Boiler Fuel-Saturated Area
STiS9 JP-4 Fuel Line Spill
Operable Unit 3
DP44 Battery Shop WP45 Photo Lab 5T57 Fire Station Fire Parking Lot Spill
Operable Unit 4
DP25 E-6 Fuel Tank Sludge Burial Site
0P26 E-10 Fuel Tank Sludge Burial Site
S727 E-11I Fuel Storage Tank Area
SS35 Asphalt Mixing Area and Drum Storage Site
SS36 Drum Storage Site
8537 Asphalt Mixing Area and Drum Storage Site
SS39 Asphalt Lake
S653 Asphalt Lake Spill Site
21 TABLE 2.2. Operable Unit Source Areas
Operable Unit S
Operable Unit 6
WP38 Ski Lodge Well Contamination
22 0K) 4~~~~~~' C ~~~~~~~~~~t x~~~
/ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~~ \~~~~~~~~it; 7~~~~~~~~~~~~~ morn;
K~~~~U
5, C
ID
U-
9 LL~~~~~~
;t - p I ~ 100DP2 I
23~~~~~~~~~~~~~ HELICOPTER RUE- TO PASSENGER BLADDER AREA 1-CLIPAD \t ~~~~SS53 TANK FARI,)
DITCH LINE
GE-NE RATRCR51
50L4to
NE~~~~~~~~~~4 NWDIKN
SEWAGEPOND~~~~~~~~~~5 SLN
TOWER~~~~~~~~~~~O AG
VEHICLEV B75 SC APROXMAT 501009 RF LOCACALEIIN ApproxNEWoteJexten DP54 oW08Q WAurcR WEeL
SEWAGEPONBaiDLke ouceAra
SitePlan, Monooerre-t Eie~sn A"- TomCABos
24~~~~~~~~~~~~E A L-
25~~~~~~~~~~~)L LA I~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~I
'C~~~~C
CLi 0)
C~~~~C V
Li~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~)
26~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~-( U)0
0)
nq -
LOI
27 LF03 0
0 753 ,l50 22&3 SCALE FIGURE 2.6 Operable Unit 5 Source Areas Site Manaoement Plan, Eielsor Air Force Base
NAkAE:UN]T5SA.DGN
28 FIGURE 2.7 Operable Unit 6 Source Area
Site manaaemen, Plan., Eielso Ai' rDrCe B~all
NAME:UN!TSSA.DGN 2 3.0 SOURCE EVALUATION REPORTS
Thirty-four SER sites were identified in the FFA, and four other potential source areas were subsequently designated as SERS. Existing data will be used to perform a pathway and risk assessment to determine a course of action for each site. The outcome of the initial evaluation may be a recommendation for no further action (NFA), interim remedial action, assignment to an OU for complete RI/FS consideration, or further sampling to collect key data needed to perform a more complete risk assessment. Table 3.1 identifies the SER sites and the status of each following the initial evaluation. SER locations are shown in Figure 3.1. Twenty-six sites were recommended for NFA. Documentation to support the NFA recommendations is provided in the draft SER Phase I Report (USAF 1993h). Three sites were assigned to OUs for RI/FS characterization. Removal actions were recommended for four sites, and limited sampling was recommended for the remaining five sites. After this additional work is completed, risk assessments will be performed to determine the disposition of these sites.
30 TABLE 3.1. Summary of Source Evaluation Report Recommendations for Elelson AFB
SOURCE AREA NUMBER SOURCE AREA NAME RECOMMENDATION
LF01 Original Base Landfill SEP Uimlted Sampling
LF02 Old Base Landfill SEP Limited Sampling
LF05 Old Army Landfill No Further Action
LF0B Old Landfill No Further Action
L307 Test Landfill No Further Action
FrOB Fire Training Area (Past) No Further Action
SS12 JP-4 Spill, Building 2351 No Further Action ST15 Multiproduct Fuel Line Spill No Further Action
ST16 MOGAS Fuel Line Spill No Further Action
871 7 Canol Pipeline Spill No Further Action SD21 Road Oiling at Quarry Road No Further Action
S022 Road Oiling at Industrial Drive No Further Action
S023 Road Oiling at Manchu Road No Further Action
SD24 Road Oiling at Gravel Haul Road No Further Action
DP28 Fly Ash Disposal Site No Further Action
DP2S Drum Burial Site No Further Action
SS30 PCB Storage Facility Building 2339 No Further Action
SS31 P08 Storage Facility Building 3424 No Further Action
WP32 Sewage Treatment Plant Spill Removal Action
WP33 Sewage Treatment Plant Effluent Filtration Ponds SER Limited Sampling
SS35 Asphalt Mixing Area Move to OU-4
DP40 Power Plant Sludge Pit No Further Action
S541 Past Auto Hobby Shop No Further Action
S642 Miscellaneous Storage and Disposal Area No Further Action
5S47 Commissary Parking Lot Fuel Spill No Further Action
DP55 Birch Lakes Burial Site SEP Limited Sampling
6756 Engineer Hill Spill Site Removal Action
ST57 Fire Station Parking Lot Spill Move to OU-3
STS8 Old OM Service Station SEP Limited Sampling
WPSC New Auto Hobby Shop No Further Action
SS61 Vehicle Maintenance Building Dry Wall Removal Action
31 TABLE 3.1. Summary of Source Evaluation Report Recommendations for Elelsori AFB
8862 Garrison Slough No Further Action
SS63 Asphalt Lake Spill Site Combine with SS39 in 0U4
SS64 Transportation Maintenance Drum Storage Silo No Further Action
SOURCE AREA NUMBER SOURCE AREA NAME RECOMMENDATION
Additional Source Areas Considered
WP34 Sewage Sludge Drying Beds Removal Action
LF43 Asbestos Landfill No Further Action
SS46 KC-135 Crash Site No Further Action
~ ~~ST559 Dining Mall Diesel Spill No Further Action
32 aL > I-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~U ~
I~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~I'7-. a L
On 0
W-
'o
Cm
0
LU
a.
CO
Do LL~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~t
z 4.0 TECHNOLOGY DEMONSTRATIONS
Technology demonstrations will be conducted at Elelson AFB to assess the suitability of selected remedial technologies for site conditions and problems. Results of technology demonstrations will be used in the RI/FS process to select the best remediation program for each source area. Technology demonstrations may be conducted concurrently with interim remedial actions, resulting in cleanup of sites while evaluating the effectiveness of a specific technology. Technology demonstrations include, but are not limited to, treatability studies of methods to enhance the biodegradation of POL products in soil (i.e., composting and soil heating) and to remove free petroleum product from the surface of the ground-water table (i.e., vacuum extraction and trenching). A testing plan will be prepared for each technology demonstration. The testing plan will identify the goals for the study, level of effort needed, schedule, and data management guidelines. Upon completion of testing, results will be evaluated to assess the technology with respect to the goals * ~identified in the test plan. Results will be published in a report. An additional technology demonstration is the development of a database system that includes all environmental data far Eielson AFB. Information from U.S. Department of Defense IRP reports, CERCLA investigations, and other sources will be loaded into the database system and used to support base activities.
34 5.0 SITE-WIDE INVESTIGATION
Information about base-wide characteristics needed to support OU RI/FS efforts and other investigations will be collected as part of the Site-wide investigation. The Site-wide investigation will include the following components: *site hydrology *background soil and ground-water quality *surface-water and sediment quality
-site-wide ground-water monitoring *ecological assessment *fate and transport studies. Tasks to be performed during the Site-wide investigation are described in the following sections. Data collected will be evaluated and summarized in a technical report as each task is completed. The schedule for Site-wide activities is provided in Table 5.1.
5.1 HYDROLOGY Information about ground-water flow on a Site-wide basis is necessary to model the fate and transport of contaminants in ground water. Water levels in monitoring well and surface-water locations across the Site have been and continue to be measured on a monthly basis in 1992 and 1993 to provide information about horizontal flow directions and gradients, recharge/discharge relationships, and seasonal variations in ground-water flow. Water-level data will be presented in maps and summarized in a technical report. Continuous water-level data will be collected to provide information about water-level fluctuations and vertical flow directions and gradients at various locations across the Site. Transducers were installed in 23 monitoring wells, including nested wells at four sites (ST10, ST18, DP26, and LF03). Additional transducers were placed in nested wells at DP44 in August 1992 and at Blair Lakes in February 1993. Continuous water-level data
35 * ~representing a one-year period (September 1991 to September 1992) are presented and evaluated in a technical report (USAF 1993c). Hydraulic parameters of the aquifer materials at Elelson AFB will beA estimated by the re-evaluation of pump test data reported by Harding Lawson Associates (HLA 1989). Although estimates of hydraulic conductivity were provided by HLA, review of the pump test data is warranted because documentation of the analytical methods used is sparse, and results will be used to make critical decisions about the Site. Results of this analysis will be summarized in a technical report.
5.2 BACKGROUND SOIL AND GROUND-WATER QUALITY Data on ambient concentrations of constituents in soil, ground water, surface water, and sediment are necessary to compare with data collected in areas of potential contamination across the Site. Background samples will be collected in locations away from areas of known contamination. An event- specific Sampling and Analysis Plan will be prepared for each background sampling event. Background soil sampling was conducted in September 1991. Major soil types found at Elelson AFB and ambient concentrations of organic and inorganic constituents in each type of soil are reported in a technical report (USAF 1993e). Background ground-water sampling was conducted in June 1992. Ambient concentrations of each constituent in ground water and major ground-water chemistry are summarized and graphically presented in a technical report (USAF 1993d). Additional background sampling will be conducted to establish seasonal variations in ground-water quality. Background sampling for surface water and sediment will be conducted in 1993 in conjunction with the surface-water and sediment investigation (Section 5.3).
36 5.3 SURFACE-WATER AND SEDIMENT OUALITY Surface-water and sediment quality will be evaluated on a Site-wide basis because surface water flows across OU boundaries and contributions of individual source areas to surface-water contamination are difficult to assess. Data on surface-water and sediment quality from past investigations were compiled and reviewed in 1992. Additional sampling to assess the nature and extent of surface-water and sediment contamination will be conducted in 1993 after the results of OU investigations are available.
5.4 GROUND-WATER MONITORING Annual ground-water sampling at Eielson AFB will be required to monitor ground-water quality during and after RI/FS activities. The primary objectives of annual ground-water monitoring are as follows: * Monitor the quality of ground water at the northern boundary of the base to ensure that contamination does not migrate offsite. * Monitor the quality of ground water hydraulically down-gradient of potential source areas that have been left in place (i.e., former landfills). * Monitor the migration of identified plumes of contaminated ground water and concentrations of contaminants in the plumes. *Monitor background wells to characterize seasonal or annual variations in constituent concentrations. Wells for short- and/or long-term ground-water monitoring will be selected based on the location of identified plumes and results of OU investigations. The North Boundary Wells are sampled on an annual basis (beginning in 1992) to monitor the quality of ground water leaving the Site. A work plan for ground-water monitoring will be prepared each year as requirements may change. Monitoring results will be presented in technical reports. The long-term scope and duration of the Site-wide ground-water monitoring will be specified in the Site-wide ROD, which is scheduled for June 1995.
37 * ~5.5 ECOLOGICAL ASSESSMENT An ecological assessment (EA) of the Site will be conducted to appraise the actual or potential impacts of hazardous releases on plants and animals other than humans and domesticated species. The first stage of the EA will include a compilation and review of existing data to develop a preliminary conceptual model of the Site and to identify gaps in data. Additional sampling, if required, will be conducted in 1993. Results of the EA will be presented in a technical report. In addition, results of the EA will be used to conduct a natural resource damage assessment (NRDA) screening evaluation to assess the likelihood that exposure to contamination did or will result in permanent and/or significant resource injury, and to determine whether a full NRDA evaluation is warranted.
5.6 FATE AND TRANSPORT STUDIES Fate and transport studies will be conducted to characterize the ability of natural ecosystems in the soils and ground water at Elelson AFB to degrade * ~or retard the movement of organic contaminants. Laboratory microcosm studies will be used to evaluate the roles of microbial degradation and abiotic geochemical reactions in the fate and transport of petroleum hydrocarbons and chlorinated solvents. Conceptual models of the fate of POL contaminants and TCE in the arctic environment at Eielson AFB will be used to select remediation technologies and will be presented in technical reports.
38 TABLE 5.1. Schedule for Silo-Wide InvestigatIon0
Task Technical Reoga
HYDROLOGY ______
Monthly Water-Level Measurements August 1993
Automatic Water-Level Measurements April 1993
Hydraulic Properties of Aquifer Materials April 1993
BACKGROUND SOIL AND WATER OUIAUTY
Background Soil quality August 1992
Background Ground-Water Quality December 1992 SURFACE-WATER AND SEDIMENT QUALITY Surface Water and Sediment Quality 1December 1993
SITE-WIDE GROUND-WATER MONITORING ______
Sampling and Analysis Results for North Boundary Wells December 1992
Results of 1993 Site-Wide Ground-Water Monitoring Program December 1993
Annual Ground-Water Monitoring Reports December
ECOLOGICAL ASSESSMENT
Ecological Assessment December 1993
39 6.0 REFERENCES
Harding Lawson Associates (HLA). 1989. Installation Restoration Program Remedial Investigation/Feasibility Study, Stage 3, Elelson Air Force Base, Fairbanks, Alaska, Volume II,Draft Remedial Investigation/Feasibility Study (July 1988 to April 1989), Chapter IV,April 1989. (Doc. No. 1360) Administrative Record, Elelson Air Force Base, Fairbanks, Alaska. Pacific Northeast Laboratory (PNL). 1991. Remedial Investigation/Feasibility Study -- Operable Unit 2 Management Plan, Elelson Air Force Base, Alaska. Prepared by Pacific Northwest Laboratory for the U.S. Air Force, Eielson Air Force Base, Alaska. Pacific Northwest Laboratory (PNL). 1992. Remedial.Investigation/Feasibility Study -- Operable Unit 2 Baseline Risk Assessment Report, Eielson Air Force Base, Alaska. Prepared by Pacific Northeast Laboratory, Environmental Management Operations, Richland, Washington (Draft). U.S. Air Force. 1992. Operable Units 3, 4 and 5 Management Plan for Eielson Air Force Base, Alaska. Prepared by Pacific Northeast Laboratory, Environmental Management Operations, Richland, Washington (Draft). U.S. Air Force (USAF). 1993a. Eielson Air Force Base Operable Unit 2 Remedial Investigation/Feasibility Study: Feasibility Study Report. Prepared * ~by Pacific Northeast Laboratory for the U.S. Air Force, Eielson Air Force Base, Alaska. U.S. Air Force (USAF). 1993b. Eielson Air Force Base Operable Unit 2 Remedial Investigation/Feasibility Study: Remedial Investigation Report. Prepared by Pacific Northeast Laboratory for the U.S. Air Force, Eielson Air Force Base, Alaska. U.S. Air Force (USAF). 1993c. Automatic Water-Level Measurements, Eielson Air Force Base, Alaska. Prepared by Pacific Northeast Laboratory, Environmental Management Operations, Richland, Washington. U.S. Air Force (USAF). 1993d. Background Ground-Water Quality, Eielson Air Force Base, Alaska. Prepared by Pacific Northeast Laboratory, Environmental Management Operations, Richland, Washington. U.S. Air Force (USAF). 1993e. Background Soil Quality, Eielson Air Force Base, Alaska. Prepared by Pacific Northeast Laboratory, Environmental Management Operations, Richiand, Washington. U.S. Air Force (USAF). 1993f. Operable Unit 1 Management Plan, Eielson Air Force Base, Alaska. Prepared by Pacific Northeast Laboratory, Environmental Management Operations, Richland, Washington. U.S. Air Force (USAF). 1993g. Operable Unit 6 Management Plan, Eielson Air Force Base, Alaska. Prepared by Engineering Science, Air Force Center for * ~Environmental Excellence, Richland, Washington. 40 U.S. Air Force (USAF). 1993h. Source Evaluation Report, Phase 1, Elelson Air Force Base, Alaska. Prepared by Pacific Northeast Laboratory for the U.S. Air Farce, Eielson Air Force Base, Environmental Restoration Program, Fairbanks, Alaska. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (USEPA). 1988. Guidance for Conducting Remedial Investigations and Feasibility Studies Under CERCLA, EPA/540/G-89/004; October 1988. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (USEPA). 1992. Record of Decision for the United States Air Force Eielson Air Force Base, Alaska; September 1992.
41 she Mamwnagnat Man-lISP Eduson Air Force Basei
Appendix A
SITE MANAGEMENT PLAN (SMP)I FIELD SAMPLING PLAN (FSP) FOREILSONFORCE AIR BASE~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
I t. Managemenst Pfan-FSP Belson Ak Aope BA.s
. ~CONTENTS--FSP
Pa go
1.0 Introduction...... A.1.1 1.1 Background...... A.1.1 1.2 Purpose and Objective...... A.1.2 1.3 Contents...... A.1.2
2.0 Field Investigation...... A.2.1 2.1 Data Compilation and Review...... A.2.1 2.2 Field Area Walkover Survey...... A.2.1 2.3 Geodetic/Topographic Survey and Base Map...... A.2.2 2.3.1 Objectives...... A.2.2 2.3.2 Survey Locations...... A.2.2 2.3.3 Survey Equipment and Procedures...... A.2.3 2.3.4 Data Collection, Interpretation and Reduction ...... A.2.3 2.4 Geophysical Methods...... A.2.4 2.4.1 Electromagnetic Induction/Magnetometer (EMI/MAG) Survey A.2. 5 2.4.1.1 EMI/MAG Survey Objectives...... A.2.5 2.4.1.2 EMI/MAG Procedures...... A.2.5 2.4.2 Ground Penetrating Radar (GPR) Survey ...... A.2.8 2.4.2.1 GPR Survey Objectives...... A.2.8 2.4.2.2 GPR Survey Locations...... A.2.8 2.4.2.3 GPR Data Collection, Reduction, and InterpretationA.2.1O 2.4.3 Seismic Refraction and Reflection Techniques ...... A.2.1O 2.4.3.1 Objectives...... A.2.1O 2.4.3.2 Techniques...... A.2.1O 2.4.3.3 Preliminary Considerations...... A.2.1 1 2.4.3.4 Survey Design...... A.2.1 1 2.4.3.5 Equipment...... A. 2.1 2 2.4.4 Electrical Resistivity...... A.2.13 2.4.4.1 Objectives...... A.2.13 2.4.4.2 Procedures ...... A.2.14 2.4.4.3 Survey Design...... A. 2.1 5 2.4.4.4 Instrumentation...... A. 2. 15 2.4.4.5 Data Reduction ...... A.2.16 2.4.5 Borehole Geophysics...... A. 2.1 6 2.4.5.1 Objectives...... A. 2.1 6 2.4.5.2 Electrical...... A.2.18 2.4.5.3 Nuclear...... A.2.22 2.4.5.4 Mechanical...... A.2.24
0 ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~iii Site Magem enwt P~N&FSP Se/son Air Forc Ba.s
CONTENTS (Continued)
Page
2.5 Biota Investigations...... A.2.25 2.5.1 Objectives...... A.2.25 2.5.2 Surface Water, Sediment, and Aquatic Organisms ...... A.2.26 2.5.2.1 Surface Water...... A.2.26 2.5.2.2 Sediment...... A.2.27 2.5.2.3 Aquatic Organisms...... A.2.27 2.5.2.4 Toxicity Tests...... A.2.28 2.5.2.5 Tissue Analysis...... A.2.30 2.5.2.6 Terrestrial Vegetation, Nesting Waterfowl, Nonmigratory Terrestrial Animals...... A.2.30 2.6 Soil Vapor Survey for Volatile Compounds...... A.2.31 2.6.1 Soil Vapor Survey Objectives...... A.2.31 2.6.2 Soil Vapor Survey Locations and Frequencies...... A.2.31 2.6.3 Sample Designation...... A.2.31 2.6.4 Sampling Equipment and Procedures...... A.2.32 2.6.5 Sample Handling and Analysis...... A.2.32 2.7 Drilling...... A.2.32 2.7.1 Initial Well Siting...... A. 2.3 2 2.7.2 Drilling Methods...... A.2.33 2.7.2.1 Monitoring Wells...... A.2.33 2.7.2.2 Soil Boring...... A.2.36 2.7.3 Drilling Procedures...... A.2.36 2.7.3.1 Handling of Drilling Residuals...... A.2.36 2.7.3.2 Decontamination of Equipment...... A.2.36 2.7.3.3 Geologic Logging...... A. 2.3 6 2.7.3.4 Geophysical Logging...... A.2.39 2.7.4 Soil Sampling...... A.2.39 2.7.4.1 Geological Characterization...... A.2.39 2.7.4.2 Physical Characteristic Samples...... A.2.40 2.8 Well Construction Procedures...... A. 2.41 2.8.1 Well Component Decontamination...... A. 2.41 2.8.2 Well Construction...... A.2.42 2.8.3 Well Development...... A.2.46 2.8.4 Well Surveying...... A.2.47 2.9 Groundwater Probes...... A.2.47 2.10 Product Probes...... A.2.48
iv WM UManagment PfanFSP Edge, Al, Pw. Bsme
. ~CONTENTS (Continued) Page 3.0 Environmental Sampling...... A.3.1 3.1 Sampling Equipment Collection Procedures...... A.3.1 3.1.1 Surface Soil Samples (0- to 5-foot depth)...... A.3.1 3.1.1.1 Hand Implements...... A.3.2 3.1.1.2 Thin-walled Tube Samplers...... A.3.3 3.1.2 Sludge and Sediment Samples ...... A.3.4 3.1.2.1 Scoops or Trowels...... A.3.5 3.1.2.2 Hand Corer...... A.3.5 3.1.2.3 Ponar Grab/Ekman Dredge...... A.3.6 3.1.3 Borehole Sampling...... A.3.7 3.1.4 Test Pit and Trench Sampling...... A.3.8 3.1.5 Surface Water Samples...... A.3.9 3.1.5.1 Pond Samplers and Transfer Devices...... A.3.10 3.1.5.2 Peristaltic Pump...... A. 3.1 5 3.1.5.3 Kemmerer Battle...... A. 3.1 6 3.1.6 Groundwater Samples...... A.3.17I 3.1.6.1 Documentation...... A.3.18 3.1.6.2 Head Space Screening ...... A.3.18 3.1.6.3 Groundwater Elevation Measurements ...... A.3.18 3.1.6.4 Well Purging ...... A.3.22 3.1.6.5 Field Parameters...... A.3.23 3.1.6.6 Sample Collection...... A.3.23 3.1.7 Drum Sampling...... A.3.25 3.2 Sample Containers, Preservation, and Holding Times...... A.3.27 3.3 Sample Labels...... A.3.28I 3.4 Sample Documentation...... A.3.29 3.4.1 Sampling Location...... A.3.29 3.4.2 Field Notebooks...... A.3.29 3.4.3 Photographs...... A.3.32 3.5 Sample Custody...... A.3.33 3.5.1 Directions for Completing Chain-of-Custody Form ...... A.3.34 3.6 Sample Handling, Packing, and Shipping...... A.3.35 3.6.1 Packing Environmental Samples...... A.3.36 3.6.2 Packing Hazardous Samples...... A.3.37 3.6.3 Sample Shipping...... A.3.38 3.7 Field Quality Control Samples...... A.3.39
v Met Managrmta Ptan-FSP Edlson Air Foe Base
CONTENTS (Continued)
Pa go
3.8 Laboratory Analyses...... A.3.40 3.9 Sample Analyses Summary...... A.3.40
4.0 Field Measurements...... A.4.1 4.1 Parameters...... A.4.1 4.2 Equipment Calibration...... A.4.1 4.2.1 HNu Meter...... A.4.2 4.2.2 pH Meter...... A.4.2 4.2.3 Specific Conductance Meter...... A.4.3 4.2.4 Thermometer or Temperature Probe...... A.4.3 4.3 Equipment Maintenance...... I...... A.4.3 4.4 Decontamination...... A.4.4
5.0 Field QA/Q.C Program...... A.5.1 5.1 Control Parameters...... A.5.1 5.1.1 Duplicate Samples...... A.5.1 5.1.2 Container Blanks...... A.5.1 5.1.3 Equipment Blanks...... A. 5.2 5.1.4 Travel Blanks...... A. 5.2 5.2 Control Limits...... A. 5.2
6.0 Site Management...... A.6.1 6.1 Field Program Logistics...... A.6.1 6.2 Site Access...... A.6.1 6.3 Site and Equipment Security...... A.6.1 6.4 Base Support...... A.6.1
7.0 Management of Investigation-Derived Wastes...... A.7.1 7.1 Introduction...... A.7.1 7.2 IDW Management Requirements...... A.7.1 7.3 General Policies For IDW Management...... A. 7.3 7.3.1 IDW Minimization...... A. 7.3 7.3.2 Consistency In Management...... A.7.3 7.3.3 Community Concerns...... A.7.4 7.4 Selection Of IDW Disposal Options...... A.7.4
vi Shte Manageent PtanFSP 5*/son Air Forc Bse
* ~CONTENTS (Continued)
Pa go 8.0 Decontamination Procedures...... A.8.1 8.1 Soaps and Detergents...... A.8.1 8.2 Personnel...... A.8.1 8.3 Sampling Equipment...... A.8.2 8.4 Drilling Equipment and Well Construction Materials...... A.8.4 8.4.1 Drilling Equipment...... A.8.4 8.4.2 Cleaning Monitoring Well Construction Materials, Development Equipment, and Dedicated Sampling Equipment...... A.8.4 8.5 Water Level Indicator...... A.8.5 8.6 Submersible Pumps...... A.8.5
TABLES
A.2.1 General Guide to Data Collection Objectives for Borehole Geophysics...... A. 2.1 9 A.2.2 Logging Functions Borehole Limitations...... A.2.20 A.2.3 Types of Logs, Descriptions, and Uses...... A.2.21 * ~~A.2.4 Soil Physical Parameters for the Site RI/FS...... A.2.41 A.7.1 IDW Disposal Options...... A.7.2 A. 7.2 Guidelines for IDW Management...... A.7.6
FIGURES
A.2.1 Typical Telescoped-Casing Drilling Method...... A.2.35 A.2.2 Monitoring Well Drilling and Geologic Log...... A.2.37 A.2.3 Soil Boring Log...... A.2.38 A.2.4 Typical Monitoring Well Construction...... A.2.43 A.2.5 Monitoring Well Record Drawing and Construction Log . . . A. 2.44 A.3.1 Surface Water Sampling Field Data Sheet...... A.3.1 1 A.3.2 Surface Water Level Field Data Sheet...... A. 3.1 3 A.3.3 Surface Water Quality Sampling Summary...... A.3.14 A.3.4 Groundwater Quality Sampling Summary...... A.3.19 A.3.5 Groundwater Field Data Sheet...... A.3.20 A.3.6 Typical Sample Identification Label...... A.3.30 A.3.7 Chain-of-Custody Record Form...... A.3.30
vii Me. MwAvnega flan-FBP BEens Air For" Be.
1.0 INTRODUCTION
This Field Sampling Plan (FSP) is Appendix A of the Site Manage- ment Plan for Eielson Air Force Base. This plan provides direction for obtaining field samples for implementation of the RI/FS and is designed to be used as a reference in developing the FSPs for the OL~s at Eielson AFB. Numerous methodologies are presented for collecting various types of environmental samples. Other methods may be introduced as the OU FSPs are developed based on Site conditions, changing technologies, or changing regulations. This FSP will then be modified to include the additional sampling methods. It is by no means intended that all of the surveys and sampling procedures described in this FSP manual will be used in the RI/FS for Eielson AFB. Field personnel should be familiar with this manual and maintain a field copy for guidance during work activities.t The Site Management Plan contains important summaries on the background and setting of the Eielson AFB3, and a description of the objectives and approach to the overall RI/FS.
The Quality Assurance Project Plan (QAPP, Appendix B) must beI used jointly with this FSP. The QAPP references analytical procedures and quality assurance objectives that must be used to obtain good representative samples and data of knownf quality. Knowledge of the Health and Safety Plan (HSP, Appendix C) is critical during field sampling, because it specifies procedures for the occupational health and safety protection of project field personnel.
1.1 BACKGROUND
Previous investigations of potential areas of environmental contamination at Eielson Air Force Base (AFB3), located near Fairbanks, Alaska, identified numerous sites where contamination by releases of petroleum, oil, and lubricant (POL) products, including JP-4, motor gasoline, and diesel fuel, may have occurred. These sites were identified and initially described under an IRP Phase I records search investigation conducted in 1982 and were the subject of a limited Phase 1I field investigation in 1984. Eielson AFB has been divided into six operable units (OUs) each consisting of numerous source areas. Groundwater, surface water and sediment, soils, and biota are
A.11.1 Site Manegernet Plan-FSP Eiednn Air Fen Base
being addressed for each OU. Details on the Elelson AFB OUs are presented in the text of the Site Management Plan.
1.2 PURPOSE AND OBJECTIVE
The purpose of this Field Sampling Plan (FSP) is to present a description of field activities, sampling equipment, procedures, and chemical and physical analyses for the RI/FS to be conducted at Elelson AFB. This document shall be used to guide Eielson AFB in all environmental investigation activities conducted at the operable units. All procedures described in this document may not be employed at each operable unit. Individual FSPs will be written for each operable unit. This FSP was developed in accordance with the requirements of CERCLA.
1.3 CONTENTS
The FSP contains descriptions of investigation activities including sampling designations, sampling equipment and procedures. The FSP for each individual operable unit will define the sampling locations and frequencies for that specific operable unit. Other sampling techniques may need to be developed.
This FSP is only meant as a reference guide of available methodology that may be used in the Eielson AFB RI/FS.
A.1.2 Site Mamgsfas PVSSFSP Hegon Ai F Ame&a.
. ~2.0 FIELD INVESTIGATION Field investigation is designed to provide necessary information regarding the location, function, types of hazardous substances used or disposed of, and the structure and integrity of certain facilities within the operable units. 2.1 DATA COMPILATION AND REVIEW
Source compilation and review does not involve field sampling. Specific htems of concern may be the locations of buried fuel tanks, routing of underground pipelines, locations of spills. The results of data compilation and review for each operable unit will be used to direct subsequent field tasks. 2.2 FIELD AREA WALKOVER SURVEY
The field areas should be walked by trained environmental assessment personnel, including a geologist. The survey team shall be equipped with field volatile organic monitoring instruments and other necessary equipment for health and safety monitoring. The objective of a walkover survey is to identify subsurface and surface features of concern to the RI/FS that are not properly located on available records or that have not been identified in the records search.
Special attention should be given to areas where there is evidence of past disturbance, mounded or subsidence areas that may indicate buried facilities, old foundations, monuments indicating the location of items, and indications of former seepage pits or drains, etc. Areas of potential concern will be staked and the locations may be surveyed as described in Section 2.3, Geodetic/Topographic Survey and Base Map. The focus will be on visual observation, but verification measure- ments of soil vapor concentrations of volatile organics should also be made and recorded. Soil vapor measurements for volatile organics can be made by opening a small hole with a shovel and taking a brief measurement with the field instrument.
The information from walking surveys will be used to modify subsequent tasks to account for information that was not available from the historic files.
A.2.1 Sit. Msnmgenwd Pln-FSP Eleson Air Fr~m Bass
Surface geologic mapping may be performed as part of the source area walkover.
2.3 GEODETIC/TOPOGRAPHIC SURVEY AND BASE MAP 2.3.1 Objectives
Maps of the operable units will be established for use during source area characterization, evaluation of corrective measure alternatives, and engineering design. Geodetic surveys for elevation and north-south and east-west coordinates will be performed to develop vertical and horizontal controls for RI activities and data. If necessary, survey monuments will be established.
2.3.2 Survey Locations
Source area or operable unit topographic maps will be at a scale that will allow the precision needed to show elevation contours at 2-foot (0.6-in) intervals. Source area features such as the operable unit boundary, rivers, fence lines, gates, buildings, disposal facilities, pipelines, and roads will be included. The National Geodetic Survey vertical datum coordinate system will be used for vertical control. Horizontal locations will be tied to the Alaska state plane coordinates and/or Eielson AFB coordinate system. Third-order precision and accuracy will be used to develop the source area or operable unit maps.
Horizontal control should also be provided for sampling points and grids established for the following types of tasks:
* installing groundwater monitoring wells * area walkover survey (survey marked items) * electromagnetic induction/magnetometer (EMI/MAG) survey * ground penetrating radar (GPR) survey * soil vapor survey for volatile compounds * source sampling and analysis * test pit soil sampling and analysis * borehole soil sampling and analysis. Horizontal control will be established on two points at each grid location required for the surveys. The horizontal plane survey
A. 2.2 Site Mangmen~t PMenFSP Eden~Air Force Bae
accuracy will be ±0.3 meter (1 foot). Relative coordinates for the remainder of the grids will be obtained by using a tape and compass traverse or by Global Positioning Satellite instruments and electronic distance measuring instruments tied to these reference points. Grid point locations will be staked with coordinates marked on the stakes. Adequate vertical control will be provided by the topographic base map. The vertical control for the monitor wells and monitoring well locations will be to a relative accuracy of 0.01 ft (0.003 m) to provide accurate indications of the groundwater gradient. Due to frost heaving conditions causing changes in vertical elevations, monitoring wells should be resurveyed each time before measuring water levels. 2.3.3 Survey Equipment and Procedures
Surveys are to be completed by a surveyor who is licensed and registered in the State of Alaska. Vertical control will be referenced to a United States Geological Survey (USGS) datum obtained from a permanent benchmark. Third-order plane surveys and horizontal angular measurements will be made with a 20-second or better transit. Angles will be doubled, with the mean of the doubled angle within 10 seconds at the first angle. Distance measurements will be made with a calibrated tape corrected for temperature and tension or with a calibrated electronic distance measuring instrument (EDMI). When using an EDMI, the manufacturer's parts per million (ppm) error will be applied as well as corrections for curvature and refraction. Global Positioning Satellite surveying techniques may also be used.
Additional details on the surveying equipment and procedures shall be specified in approved participant contractor procedures.
2.3.4 Data Collection, Interpretation, and Reduction
All measurements will be recorded in a field notebook in accord- ance with the procedures specified in Section 3.4.2, Field Notebooks.
The locations of all surveyed facilities and anomalies will be plotted on topographic base map(s). The base map(s) will
A. 2.3 Sit. Mamgngerns PfanFSP E&wsn Air Forc Bn*
include site features; elevation contours at 2-ft (0.6-rn) intervals; locations of EMIIUMAG, GPR, and soil vapor survey grids and anomalies; and the locations and elevations af soil borings, surface soil samples, and test pits, as appropriate. Data and maps will be prepared to be compatible for input into the developing computerized data base for Elelson AFB.
2.4 GEOPHYSICAL METHODS
This FSP provides general guidance for the planning, selection, and implementation of geophysical surveys that may be conducted during RI investigations at EBelson AFB. Several commonly used methods are discussed for the standpoint of applicability to source area investigations, procedures for implementation, survey design, and miscellaneous method- specific considerations.
Geophysical methods should be used as a tool to guide investiga- tions of the OUs. Geophysics is a proven indirect investigation technique that should not be viewed as an absolute answer. The results are interpretive and need to be confirmed by direct physical confirmation methods such as test pits and drilling.
Geophysics can be a cost-effective tool in providing extensive low-cost information and project guidance about successive, more costly phases.
The project manager should confer with a geophysicist to deter- mine the applicability of the method to source area specific conditions and objectives. A Site reconnaissance should be conducted to identify any problems that may inhibit the study. Cultural features such as powerlines, surface metal, and radio transmitters may have a detrimental effect on the data acquisition or interpretation. Any geophysical surveys should be completed in a timely manner so that the information can be used to provide guidance for subsequent tasks. Most geophysical surveys are carried out over a grid or a series of lines within the study area. Stations at which measurements are taken or energy put into the ground are usually spaced at regular intervals designed to produce the optimum results for the study objectives. Although initial line placement may be done in
A.2.4 Met Managment Plan-PSP Na4eon Air Pse Base
the office, final line placement will be determined in the field by a qualified geophysicist.
All field work should be done under the supervision of a qualified geophysicist with daily reduction and review being mandatory. The geophysicist should supervise the daily reporting of all field data including all field notes, maps, work sheets, and raw data tabulation. For more detailed theoretical considerations of the geophysical techniques, the reader is referred to A Compendium of Superfund Field Operations Methods, EPA, 1987. Specific geophysical methods are discussed below. 2.4.1 Electromagnetic Induction/Magnetometer (EMI/MAG) Survey 2.4.1.1 Electromagnetic Induction/Magnetomneter Survey Objectives The objective of the EMI/MAG survey is twofold:
* to screen large areas for subsurface items that may relate to potential contamination for subsequent sampling
* to precisely locate buried facilities.
Areas identified as having potential for being contaminated should be investigated further in the soil investigation. 2.4.1.2 EMI/MAG Procedures
Electromagnetic induction (EMI) equipment measures the electrical conductivity of subsurface materials. Variations in conductivity may be caused by changes in soil moisture content, porosity and permeability, the presence of ionic species, or the presence of metallic objects. Magnetometer (MAG) equipment detects ferro-nickel metallic objects, such as pipelines, buried beneath the surface. EMI method also applies both to assessment of natural geohydrologic conditions and to mapping of many types of contaminant
A.2.5 Sit. Manmg~met Pfan-FSP SEafon Air Fowe Anse
plumes. The areas surveyed should be selected based on the operating history, capabilities of the equipment, and the investigation needs of each operable unit.
Electromagnetic methods may be used in many situations for a variety of purposes. The following list includes possible uses related to investigations of Eielson AFB:
*defining the location of a contaminant plume (this could lead to the identification of downgradient receptors, source areas, and flow directions if the conductivity of the plume [target] is distinct in comparison to the host [background] hydrogeologic setting) *locating buried metal objects (e.g., drums, tanks, pipe- lines, cables, monitoring wells)
*addressing the presence or location of bedrock fault! fracture systems (this is important for identification of preferential pathways of water flow in bedrock) *mapping grain size distributions in unconsolidated sediments *mapping buried trenches
* defining lithological (unit) boundaries
* determining the rate of plume movement by conducting multiple surveys over time. The above list is only partial; in fact, EM methods may be used wherever a significant change in conductance can be measured. In general, EM should be considered for use when any suspected target is anticipated to have a conductivity significantly different from background values. Factors such as cost, site-specific conditions, and equipment availability should also be evaluated before deciding to proceed with an EM survey.
The detail required of an EMI survey is a primary factor in designing and planning field work. If the purpose of A. 2.60 Site Managment PIanFSP M~son Air Foc B"ae
performing EM work is to define a large geologic feature, then a grid using a wide (100- to 1,000-foot) line spacing may be needed. the importance of designing and implementing a grid system tied to existing permanent features such as roads and buildings cannot be overstated. This permanent feature will allow the grid system to be reoccupied in the field to place drill holes and monitoring wells.
The MAG should be primarily used to look for unknown subsurface pipelines and to better define the location of the known pipelines (concrete pipelines will not be identified by this technique). General traverses of suspected areas will be made to identify subsurface pipelines. A listing of known and suspected locations of pipelines may be identified for each operable unit as appropriate. The locations of pipelines should be defined and staked. The EMI survey should be conducted over burial trenches, septic tank absorption fields, and suspected concrete pipelines for facilities where there is uncertainty in the location. Prior to performing the survey for unknown locations, several well defined systems should be surveyed to "ground truth" the EMI system for this application. Also, a general source area reconnaissance should be conducted prior to field survey work to identify the background noise level at each facility.
Background noise can be a significant factor in the success of an EMI survey. A high noise level can make interpretation difficult and may actually cause an anomaly to be overlooked. Noise sources can be divided into two groups: 1) natural, such as changing grain size distributions, steeply dipping strata, drastic topography, and unexpected fault zones; 2) cultural, such as powerlines, houses, railroads, surface metal debris, cars, and radio transmission towers. All EMI instruments have varying limitations with regard to sensitivity and penetration. Published references, operator's manuals, and field experience should be used to evaluate instrumentation versus capability.
A.2.7 Sit. Managemen Pran-FSP Ejeson Air Farc B&&
Electromagnetic techniques have also been adapted for downhale applications. These techniques can be useful in 0 defining the vertical extent of a contamination zone.
Magnetic measurements are usually taken either at equally spaced stations located across a rectangular grid or at equal intervals along several profile lines. The spacing of the stations depends on the target size. In general, the spacing between stations should be approximately one-fourth of the lateral extent of the target. For a single 55-gallon drum, the maximum distance at which the station can be detected is typically 10 to 15 feet, and the grid spacing can be designed accordingly. The closer the stations are spaced, the better the resolution becomes and the better the probability of detecting anomalies. An accuracy of 5 percent is generally adequate for station locations for a MAG survey, thus, a hand transit and tape measure are sufficient to survey the station locations. Wooden stakes or other nonmetallic station marker should be used.
2.4.2 Ground Penetrating Radar (GPR) Survey
2.4.2.1 Ground Penetrating Radar Survey Objectives
The GPR survey may be used to determine the locations and boundaries of the other buried features that are not adequately defined by historic records, visual identification, and other geophysical surveys. The GPR survey focuses on locations where no metallic objects have been disposed of and where the GPR results may be superior to those from an EMI/MAG survey, or other geophysical survey.
2.4.2.2 GPR Survey Locations
The following is a partial list of major uses of GPR:
* locate or define buried drums, tanks, cables, and pipelines * define boundary of disturbed versus original ground, such as landfill or trench * map water table (limited reliability) A.2.8~ She Managemet PtanFSP Bokon Air Forc Bee
* delineate stratigraphic layers, such as clay, till, or sands
* define natural subsurface features, such as buried stream channels, lenses, and voids.
The actual selection of locations will depend on the results of the EMI/MAG survey and the additional information provided by the GPR as appropriate for each OU.
Although GPR cannot provide definitive information on subsurface conditions, the data are desirable for several reasons. GPR can quickly provide subsurface information about the Site. Typical productivity with conventional graphic recording GPR equipment on low relief terrain is several line miles per day. This productivity rate makes GPR a very cost-effective reconnaissance method. For example, if the objective of the survey is to define suspected locations of buried drums, then GPR can be used to define suspected areas and test pits (or other direct methods) can be used to further explore the suspected areas and provide control for the GPR data.
The detail (coverage, resolution) required of a radar survey is a primary factor in designing and planning field work. If the survey is to provide reconnaissance information on the possibility of buried drums onsite, then a grid using a wide (50- to 200-foot) line spacing may be appropriate. If the purpose is to define as many drum locations as possible, then a detailed survey is probably required (10- 20-foot line spacing). The anticipated size of the target compared with the proposed survey area should have an impact on the detail of the GPR survey grid.
Background noise can be a significant factor in the success of a GPIR survey. Evaluation of existing data and a site reconnaissance will help to determine the background noise level. If the natural soils have a wide variation in electrical properties, it would be difficult to pick out subsurface boundary between natural and backfill materials.
GPR instruments are limited with regard to sensitivity, resolution, and penetration. Field experience, published
A.2.9 Sit* Mnamgean Ptan-FSP Baleen Air Forc Base
references, and operator's manuals should be used when an evaluation of instrumentation versus capability is desired.
2.4.2.3 GPR Data Collection, Reduction, and Interpretation
Continuous strip chart recording equipment will be used to generate profiles of the survey. Digital signal processing equipment may also be used to enhance data interpretation. Records of all calibrations and procedures will be maintained in the field logbook. A geophysicist experienced in the interpretation of GPR data will analyze the profiles to determine locations and depths of anomalies and facility boundaries. This information will be incorporated into a location map and will be related to the other facility information.
2.4.3 Seismic Refraction and Reflection Techniques
2.4.3.1 Objectives
Seismic techniques are useful in assessing the following subsurface geohydrologic conditions:
* depth to bedrock * depth, thickness, dip, and density of lithologic units
* horizontal and vertical extent of anomalous geologic features (folds, faults, fractures)
* approximate depth to the water table
* delineate subsurface bulk waste trenches as landfill depths.
2.4.3.2 Techniques
The method of seismic refraction consists of measuring the travel times of compressional waves that are generated by a surface source and that are critically refracted from subsurface refraction interfaces and received by surface geophones. First-arrival travel times of seismic energy plotted against source to receiver distance on a time-distance
A.2.1O She Management Plan-FSP Esoan Al, Fac Base
curve are characteristic of the material through which they travel. The number of line segments on the time-distance plot are characteristic of the number of layers. The inverse slope of the line-segments indicates the velocities of the layers.
The method of seismic reflection consists of measuring the two-way travel times of compressional waves that are generated by a surface source and that are reflected from subsurface reflecting interfaces. Depths to each reflecting interface can be deduced from reflection two-way travel times integrated with layered velocity information. 2.4.3.3 Preliminary Considerations
The following steps should be considered before planning, selecting, and implementing a shallow seismic survey: *review existing subsurface geologic and hydrogeologic information including physical and chemical soil characteristics *define known hazards posing a threat to the safety of personnel who are conducting the survey
*define the purpose of the subsurface investigation
*add survey coordinates and elevations of all shot and geophone locations to be used before the actual survey.
2.4.3.4 Survey Design
The length of a seismic refraction line must be at least four times the maximum penetration depth desired. This length will ensure that head-wave energy will be received from refractors down to the maximum penetration depth. The spacing between individual geophones controls the degree of resolution available. A spacing of 3 to 15 meters is commonly used. Closer spacings may be used for very shallow, high-resolution profiles.
A.2.1 'I Sit. ae ement~ PIen-FSP EWfscn Air Forc Bwee
The major application of seismic reflection is in mapping of the overburden bedrock interface where the burden thickness exceeds 30 meters. Reflections from the overburden bedrock interface show up prominently on seismographs where large contrasts between acoustic layer velocities exist.
2.4.3.5 Equipment
Shallow seismic surveys at Eielson AFB would not require large energy sources and could be either mechanical or explosive in nature. Mechanical or contained sources should be used in populated areas or when desired penetration depths are less than 100 to 300 feet. Hammer surveys are conducted by striking a steel plate coupled to the ground with a sledge hammer. An inertial switch on the hammer is connected to the seismic data acquisition system with a cable, enabling the movement of hammer impact to be accurately recorded. Another technique commonly used is the weight drop or 'thumper' technique. Typically, a truck-mounted 3-ton weight is dropped from a height of 10 feet. The instant of group impact is determined by a sensor on the weight. A seismic energy source developed by EG&G Geometrics involves an air-powered piston striking a steel plate coupled to the ground. This method has the trade name Dynasource. The Betsy seisgun is a weak mechanical energy source in which a shotgun shell is detonated inside a chamber that is coupled to the ground surface. Explosive sources are used in sparsely populated areas or when penetration depths are greater than 100 to 300 feet. Two types of explosives are commonly used, gelatin dynamite and ammonium nitrate. These are detonated in seated boreholes. A charge of about 1 pound of explosives is usually sufficient to obtain penetration depths ranging from approximately 100 to 300 feet. Explosive sources generate wave fronts that are very steep and show up as distinct arrivals on seismograms. These sharp pulses are more likely to cause damage to nearby structures. It is not advisable to use explosives sources near buried containers or where unknown gases may be present.
A. 2.1 2 She* ManagewNn Pfan-FSP Edesn Air Forc Base
A complete seismic recording system or seismograph detects, records, and displays ground motion caused by the passage of a seismic wave. A geophone is commonly a moving-coil electro-mechanical transducer that detects ground motion. The selected resonance frequency or natural frequency of the geophone must be below that of the lowermost frequency anticipated. 2.4.4 Electrical Resistivity
2.4.4.1 Objectives
Electrical resistivity surveys provide information about the subsurface distribution of ground resistivity. The information can be used to infer groundwater quality and lithologic and geologic information. Both horizontal and vertical changes in ground resistivity can be mapped by resistivity surveys. Although ER is not a definitive technique, the data are useful for several reasons. Typical productivity with conventional resistivity equipment is several thousand line feet per day. This high productivity rate allows a large amount of data to be collected in a relatively short period of time. For example, rather than drilling several dozen monitoring wells or test borings to develop a complete picture of Site stratigraphy and structure, a few wells can be drilled for control and information about the rest of the Site can be obtained by using resistivity methods. If the investigation objective is to define a groundwater plume, resistivity techniques could be used to define the plume, its probable receptors, and its source area. The following is a partial list of what resistivity methods can be used for:
* definition of a contaminant plume * waste pit delineation *definition of bedrock fault/fracture system *water table mapping * stratigraphic mapping of soil layers • defining bedrock topography.
A.2.13 Sit. Marwgwnt PlanFSP Eidson Air Forc Base
Electrical resistivity surveys involve the use of metal electrodes that are driven into the ground and long cables that drag along the ground. Setup time can be long if the electrode spacing is large. Electrode arrays are typically set up in one of several patterns depending on the desired information.
2.4.4.2 Procedures
Electrodes are typically arranged in one of several patterns, called electrode arrays, depending on the desired information. Electrical resistivity techniques can determine the vertical subsurface resistivity distribution beneath a point. In this type of survey, called vertical electrical soundings, the electrode array is expanded systematically and symmetrically about a point. For each set of electrode spacings, apparent resistivity is determined from measurements of potential and input current. The resultant plot of apparent resistivity versus electrode spacing is interpreted to provide the subsurface resistivity with depth distribution at that one particular point. The Wenner and Schlumberger arrays are somewhat more common than the Dipole-Dipole and other arrays. These arrays (Wenner, Schlumberger) start with a small electrode spacing that is increased to permit deeper penetration for sounding. The manner in which the apparent resistivity changes with the electrode separation can be used to determine formation conductivity and layer thickness. To increase accuracy, the user should evaluate the interpretation of resistivity data against the existing subsurface information. With any set of apparent resistivity reading, a number of solutions are possible, so existing data must be used to select the one that fits best. A formation resistivity may be assigned, but without geological control the materials is not known. Resistivity electrode arrays can also be used with constant inner-electrode spacing and to develop a lateral picture of the site through profiles. Stratigraphic control is even more important when mapping lateral changes with constant electrode spacings, because layer thickness changes alone can cause changes in apparent resistivity. The desired resolution is a major factor in deciding how closely to space measurements for a given survey.
A.2.14 She Manageent Ptan-FSP Eileen Air Forc Bee
In practical application, a resistivity survey target (such as a * ~~~~~~~~plume or clay lens) should have a resistivity contrast (positive or negative) over 20 percent from background. This change in resistivity should be 50 percent or more to provide proper detection and delineation. For example, if a resistivity survey were being conducted to delineate a groundwater contaminant plume (in overburden) with a resistivity of 200 ohm meters, a background-saturated overburden resistivity of over 400 ohm meters (for a conductive plume) or under 100 ohm meters (for a resistive plume) would probably be detected, providing other factors (such as depth) are not detrimental.
2.4.4.3 Survey Design
Data can be collected at randomly located stations or along survey lines. If vertical electrical soundings are performed to obtain resistivity changes with depth, then the soundings are positioned where the information is most useful. If measure- ments are made to map lateral resistivity changes, then the survey is best performed on a grid or on survey lines. The station spacing will be determined from the target size.
2.4.4.4 Instrumentation For most shallow work, practically any resistivity system will suffice. Generally, equipment capability becomes important only when the desired investigative depth exceeds 70 to 100 feet. Larger power sources are needed to provide a measurable electrical potential with a wider electrode spacing. Some newer resistivity units are capable of electronic data storage, and other features. Often, the peripheral capabilities of an ER system may be the deciding factor when purchases are considered. Borehole resistivity equipment has been used (in uncased boreholes) to determine relative formation porosity and other factors. For more information an this equipment, the reader should refer to the borehole geophysics subsection of this manual.
A. 2.1 5 Site Maneganer Pfan-FSP Edeon Air Fam Base
2.4.4.5 Data Reduction
The raw data are the measured potential produced by a known current. To calculate the rhoapp (apparent resistivity), these above-known quantities are used. The electrode configuration is also used in the determination of apparent resistivity, which is defined by:
rhoapp (2 x ivx V/I) / (11r1 - 1 r2 - 1 R1 + 11IR 2 )
where:
V = The circuit potential (voltage) I ~= Applied current (amperage) r1 = Distance between electrode No. 1 and No. 2 (meters) r2 ~ = Distance between electrode No. 3 and No. 4 (meters)
Distance between electrode No. 1 and No. 3 (meters) Distance between electrode No. 3 and No. 4 (meters)
rhoapp -Apparent resistivity Apparent resistivity is the resistivity measured at the ground surface and usually has units of ohmmeters or ohmfeet. The apparent resistivity is a function of the distribution of actual ground resistivities and the electrode geometry.
2.4.5 Borehole Geophysics
2.4.5.1 Objectives
Borehole geophysical techniques provide subsurface informa- tion on rock and unconsolidated sediment properties and fluid movement. This subsection provides an introduction to the basic borehole geophysical techniques as they might be applied to Eielson AFB remedial investigation. Discussion in this subsection will introduce a variety of borehole geophysical methods. The general logging A. 2.1 0 Sit. ManagaMnn Pfan-FSP Waean Air Forc A".
categories discussed are electrical, nuclear, sonic, and mechanical. Although other borehole techniques are available, such as three-dimensional vertical seismic profiling, borehole televiewing, and a variety of crossbore techniques, these are not discussed in detail in this FSP.
The following general types of information could be expected from borehole measurements:
* vertical changes in porosity
* relative vertical changes in permeability and transmissivity * lithology and structure * lithologic conditions
* vertical distribution of leachate plumes
* groundwater gradients, flow direction, and rate
* *~~~~~~~~water quality parameters.
To determine a logging program that will enhance evaluation of the source area, the manager must thoroughly evaluate two key items. First, the manager must identify the regional bedrock geology (i.e., igneous, sedimentary, metamorphic) and typical surficial units. Then the manager must gather as much local information as possible regarding geologic units (i.e., boring logs of monitoring wells, domestic water supply depths, and well yields) and any hydrogeologic reports or information.
Second the manager must identify which logs are applicable in the source area's geologic setting and which logs will provide the required information for meeting program objectives. Table A.2.1 is a general guide to data collection objectives that will aid in the selection process. Table A.2.2 identifies some limiting factors for the logs. Table A.2.3 presents the types of logs, descriptions, and uses.
A.2.17 Site Mwwg~eme PManFSP Edeon Air Forc Ben
2.4.5.2 Electrical
Electrical logging includes spontaneous potential and single point resistance.
Spontaneous Potential (SF): The response is the result of small differences in voltage caused by chemical and physical contacts between the borehole fluid and the surrounding formation. These voltage differences appear at lithology changes or bed boundaries, and their response is used quantitatively to determine bed thickness or formation water resistivity. Qualitative interpretation of the data can help identify permeable beds.
The SP log is a graphic plot of potentials between the downhole sonde and a surface electrode. The system consists of a moveable lead electrode (located in the sonde) that traverses the borehole and a surface electrode (mud plug) that measures potentials in millivolts. Noise and anomalous potentials are relatively common in SP logs and are discussed in electric log anomalies later in this compendium. Single-Point Resistance: This technique is based on the prin- cipal of Ohm's Law (E = Ir) where E is voltage measured in volts, I is current measured in amperes, and r is resistance measured in ohms. Single-point resistance measures the
A.2.18 Sit. Managamot PV-FSP Zsimo Ak FormeBa
TABLE A.2l. General Guide to Data Collection Objectives for Borehole Geophysics Data Collection Objectives Available Techniques Lithology and stratigraphic correlation Electric, caliper, nuclear, and sonic Total porosity or bulk density Gamma-gamma neutron, and sonic Effective porosity or true resistivity Long-normal resistivity (records the ______resistivity beyond the invaded zone) Clay or shale content Natural gamma Secondary permeability (fractures, Caliper, electric, sonic, and borehole solution openings) televiewer Specific yields of unconfined aquifer Neutron Water level and saturated zones Electric, neutron, gamma-gamma ______temperature, and fluid conductivity Moisture content Neutron Dispersion, dilution, and movement of Fluid conductivity and temperature
waste______Groundwater movement through a Flowmeter (vertical) and chemical borehole tracers (horizontal) Cementing Caliper, temperature, gamma-gamma, and sonic Casig coroson Caliper
A. 2.1 9 Site Magementm Ptan-PSP Edeon Air eAceRs
TABLE A.2.2. Logging Functions Borehole Uimitations Limiting Factors Uncased Open Minimum Diameter Logging Function Boreholes (inches) Fluid Filled Spontaneous potential X 2.5 X Single-point resistance X 2.5 X
Natural gamma ______2.5 ______Gamma-gamma 2.5
Neutron ______2.5
Caliper ______2.0 Temperature X 2.0 X Fluid conductivity X 2.5 X Fluid movement X 2.5 X Sonic X 2.5 x ~X= required condition.
A.2.20 Site Managrowit Plan-FSP Batson Air For. Ba.s
. 1 ~~~~~~~~~~TABLEA.2S. Types of Logs, Descriptions, and Uses Type Of Log Description Primary Utilization
Caliper A caliper produces a record of the average Used for correction of other logs, diameter of drill hole identification of lithology changes, and locations of fractures and other openings In bedrock
Single-Point Resistivity This log measures the resistance of the earth Used to determine stratfigraphic boundaries, material lying between an in-hole electrode changes In fithology, and the Identification and a surface electrode of fractures In resistive rock
Spontaneous Potential SP Is a graphic plot of the small differences Used for geologic correlation, determination (SP) In voltage that develop between the borehole of bed thickness, and separation of fluid and the surrounding formation nonporous from porous rocks in shale- sandstone and shale-carbonate sequences INatural Gamma This log measures natural gamma radiation Used for lIthology identification and emitted from potassium 40, uranium, and stratigraphy correlation; most advantageous thorium decay series elements in detrital sediment environments where the fine-grained units have the highest gamma
______Intensity
Gamma-Gamma Gamma photons awe induced in the borehole Used for identification of lithology, environments, and the absorption and measurements of bulk density, and porosity scattering are measured to evaluate the of rocks medium through which they travel
Neutron Neutrons are Introduced into the borehole, Used to measure the moisture content and the loss of energy Is measured from above the water table and the total porosity elastic collision with hydrogen atoms below the waler table
Temperature A temperature log is the continuous record of Used to determine seasonal recharge to a the thermal gradient of the borehole fluid groundwater system
Fluid Conductivity This log provides a measurement of the Used primarily in conjunction with electric conductivity of the in-hole fluid between the logs to aid In their interpretation; useful for electrodes identifying saltwater intrusion into freshwater systems: can be useful in evaluating water ______quality
Acoustic (sonic) A transmitter and a receiver or series of Used to measure porosity and identify receivers that use various acoustic fractures In igneous and metamorphic rock frequencies; these signals are introduced into the borehole, and the elastic waves are H ~~~~~~measured
A.2.21 Shte ManagemntW PfanFSP BEson Air Fan. hae
resistance of in situ materials (of the rock and the fluid) between an in-hole electrode and a surface electrode. Resistance logging has a small radius of investigation and is very sensitive to the conductivity of the borehole fluid and changes in hole diameters (caving, washouts, and fractures). This condition is advantageous for the operator in that any change in the formation (resistance or fractures) will produce a corresponding change in resistance on the log. These changes in resistance are interpreted to be a result of lithology changes. The single-paint log is very desirable for geologic correlation because of its special response to lithology changes.
Hole enlargement, caving, washouts, and fractures appear as excursions to the left (indicating less resistance in normal operation) of the more typical response observed in this log.
The principle of the function is quite simple. The current (I) remains constant while the voltage (E) is measured between the moveable lead electrode and the surface electrode. Voltage is then converted internally to resistance using Ohm's Law. SP and single-paint resistance logs are designed to be run simultaneous since single-point resistance operates in alternating current (ac) (110-volt) while the SP operates in direct current (dc). 2.4.5.3 Nuclear
Nuclear logging includes natural gamma, gamma-gamma, and neutron. Natural Gamma: This log measures the total of naturally occurring gamma radiation that is emitted from the decay of radioisotopes normally found in rocks. Typical elements that emit natural gamma radiation and cause an increase on the log are potassium 40 and daughter products of the uranium and thorium decay series. The primary use of natural gamma logging is lithology identification in detrital sediments where the fine-grained (most often clay) units have the highest gamma intensity. A natural gamma log can be quite useful to the hydrologist, hydrogeologist, or geohydrologist, because clay tends to reduce permeability and effective porosity within a sedimentary unit. This log can also be used to
A.2.22 Sfte Mangmsent Plan-FSP Edeon Air Forc Bee.
estimate (within one geohydrologic system) which zones are likely to yield the most water.
The sensing device is a scintillation-type receiver that converts the radioactive energy into electrical current, which is transmitted to the instrument and generates the natural gamma log.
Natural gamma logs can be run in open or cased boreholes filled with water or air. The sensing device is often built into the same sonde that conducts SP and single-point resistance logs. In essence, three functions are available from the use of one sonde.
Gamma-Gamma: This nuclear log uses an activated source and measures the effect of the induced radiation and its degradation. Gamma-gamma logs are widely used to determine bulk density from which lithologic identification is based. They may also be used to calculate porosity when the fluid and grain density are known. The radius of investigation is dependent on two factors: source strength and source- detector spacing. Typically, 90 percent of the response is from within 6 to 10 inches of the borehole. Neutron: The neutron log response is primarily a function of the hydrogen content in the borehole environment and sur- rounding formation. This content is measured by introducing neutrons into the borehole and surrounding environment and by measuring the loss of energy caused by elastic collision. Because neutrons have no electrical charge and have approxi- mately the same mass as hydrogen, hydrogen atoms are, therefore, responsible for the majority of energy loss. Neutron logging is typically used to determine moisture content above the water table and total porosity below the water table. Information derived from this log is used to determine lithology and stratigraphic correlation of aquifers and associated rocks. Inferred data can be used to determine effective porosity and specific yield of unconfined aquifers. Neutron logging is also very effective for locating perched water tables.
0 ~~~~~~~~~~A.2.23 Shte NMaagMent PIAn-FSP SEu/sn Air Forc Base
The equipment is identical to that described for the gamma- gamma log except for use of a different source and the fact that the equipment must be able to handle higher count rates.
2.4.5.4 Mechanical
Mechanical logging includes caliper, temperature, fluid conductivity, and fluid movement. Caliper: This log is defined as a continuous record of the average diameter of a drill hole. Caliper sandes can have from one to four arms. The two basis types are bowstring units, which are connected at two hinges, and finger devices, which have single hinges. Temperature: The temperature log provides continuous records of the borehole fluid environment. Response is caused by temperature change of the fluid surrounding the sonde, which generally relates to the formation water temperature. The borehole fluid temperature gradient is highly influenced by fluid movement in the borehole and adjacent rocks. In general, the temperature gradient is greater in low-permeability rocks than high-permeability rocks, which is probably the result of groundwater flow. Therefore, temperature logs can provide the hydrologist with valuable information regarding groundwater movement.
Logging speed should be slow enough to allow adequate sonde response with depth, because there is a certain amount of lag time. The probe is designed to be run from top to bottom (downward) in the borehole to channel water past the sensor. Because some disturbance is inevitable when the sonde moves through the water column, repeat temperature logs should be avoided until the borehole fluid has had time to reach thermal equilibrium.
Fluid Conductivity: These logs provide a continuous measurement of the conductivity of the borehole fluid between two electrodes. The contrast is conductivity can be associated with water quality and possibly with recharge zones. Conductivity logs are helpful when interpreting electric logs, because both are affected by fluid conductivity. A.2.24~ She Mnagemen PfAnFSP Batson Air Forc B...
The most common sonde measures the ac voltage drop across closely spaced electrodes. These electrodes actually measure the fluid resistivity (which is the reciprocal of conductivity), but they are called fluid conductivity logs to avoid confusion with resistivity logs. Simply, conductivity logs actually measure the resistance of the borehole fluid; resistance logs measure the resistance of the rocks and the fluid they contain.
Fluid Movement: Fluid movement lagging can be broken into components: horizontal and vertical. Horizontal logging uses either chemical or radioactive tracers, is most often unaccept- able for hazardous waste investigations, and will not be discussed.
Vertical movement of fluid in the borehole is measured by either an impeller flowmeter or chemical tracers. Tracers will not be discussed in this subsection for the reason mentioned above. The impeller flowmeter response is affected by the change in vertical velocity within the borehole. The best application of this log is defining fluid movement in a multiaquifer artesian system.
Sonic: This logging (also called acoustic logging) uses sound waves to measure porosity and to identify fractures in consolidated rock. Two general types of measurements are internal transit time, which is the reciprocal of velocity, and amplitude, which is the reciprocal of attenuation. The amplitudes of the P- and S-waves are directly related to the degree of consolidation and porosity and to the extent and orientation of fractures.
The instrumentation of acoustic logging is very complex; it includes a downhole sonde with a transmitter and two to four receivers. Sound waves are emitted from the transmitter and their propagation is measured by the receivers. 2.5 BIOTA INVESTIGATIONS
2.5.1 Objectives
The objectives of the biota investigations are to 1) provide data on the presence and extent of contamination in the environment 0~~~~~~~~~~A22 Site Menegsswi PVenFSP Edeon Air Fop. Base
from the source areas on the Site, 2) determine what, if any, adverse environmental effects can be attributed to contaminants 40 from the source areas, 3) provide data necessary for an ecological risk assessment of the Site, and 4) provide data necessary for environmental assessment of proposed remedial actions.
2.5.2 Surface Water, Sediment, and Aquatic Organisms
2.5.2.1 Surface Water
Samples will be collected from selected stations in Garrison Slough, French Creek, Piledriver Slough, and selected lakes on the site. All field measurements and sample collection will follow procedures described by standard operating procedure manuals issued by EPA and cited in other sections of this plan. Stream water samples will be collected as near-surface grabs using appropriate bottles. Sample collectors will stand on the stream bank or facing upstream to minimize the potential for disturbance and collection of bottom materials. Samples from the lakes will be collected as grabs using a Kemmerer sampling bottle or its equivalent (Section 3.1.5.3). These samples will be collected near-surface where the depth is less than 1 meter, or mid-depth in deeper water. Samples will be preserved as necessary and stored on ice until they can be transported to the laboratory. Comparable sampling methods will be applied in the reference study areas. In situ water quality parameters (temperature, dissolved oxygen, pH, and conductivity) will be measured near the water surface where the depth is less than 0.5 meter and near both the surface and the bottom in deeper water. Dissolved oxygen, pH, temperature, and conductivity will be measured with appropriate electronic instruments calibrated and operated according to procedures described in Section 4.0. Stream stations will be accessed on foot when possible. Deeper stations in the creeks and lakes will be sampled from a canoe or other small boat.
A.2.26~ Sit. Menwgwnnt PlarFSP Me~son Air PAwn 5'.
2.5.2.2 Sediment
Surface sediment samples for chemical and physical analysis will be collected at each surface-water station using a coring device or dredge. The surface sediments will be placed in separate containers, iced, and shipped to the laboratory using procedures described in Section 5.0 of the QAPP. Chemical and physical analyses will be performed on whole sediments for contaminants of concern. The analytical methods and procedures to be used for collect- ing samples in this investigation will follow EPA Contract Laboratory Program (CLP) protocols (EPA, SOW No. 787) or EPA methodology for the analysis of water and waste (EPA, 1983) as appropriate.
2.5.2.3 Aquatic Organisms Invertebrates. Aquatic biology sampling stations will cor- respond to the surface-water and sediment quality sampling locations, but the exact number of stations at each location may differ because of sampling methodologies and objectives. Each stream station will be sampled for macrobenthos. Habitat type (e.g.. riffle/run, submerged logs) will dictate the sampling method used.
If available, riffle/run will be sampled for macroinvertebrates using a kick net type sampler to collect from approximately 1-meter-square areas. Two such samples will be collected, one from an area of fast current and one from an area of slower current. Both samples will be composited for processing. If riffle/run habitat is not available, submerged logs, woody debris, and larger rocks will be sampled by hand collection and/or D-framne insect dip net. A coarse particulate organic matter (CPOM) sample will also be taken at each site and processed in the field. This sample will consist of leaf packs, twigs, and bark.
Each sample unit will be washed in the field through a U.S. Standard No. 30 sieve (approximately 595 pum mesh; Weber, 1973). Each field-processed sample will be placed in a wide- mouthed polyethylene container and preserved with an appro- priate amount of 70 percent ethanol or formalin (Slack St al.,
A.2.27 Site ManV&eemi PlanFSP Ecison Air Forc Owee
1973). Each sample will be labeled with the following information: location, sublhabitat type, date, time of collection, name of collector, and sample preservative.
All samples will be placed in shipping containers for transport to the laboratory facility for processing. Samples will be subsampled if needed. Subsample factors will be held constant for all stations within each habitat type (a minimum of 100 organisms will be picked per sample). Benthic organisms will be identified to the lowest practical taxonomic level. A reference collection will be developed as a means of verifying the benthic community structure.
Fish. Fish may be collected at the same sites as sediment and surface water. All microhabitats (pools, riffles, submerged vegetation, etc.) present at each site will be sampled. Fish samples will be collected using electroshock, gillnets, seines, or traps as appropriate. Samples will be collected by wading where possible or by canoe or other small boat. Individual fish will be identified, weighed, and measured in the field. Scale samples will be collected from selected individuals. Fish will be returned to the water where they 4 were caught. Community structure will be evaluated using metrics such as species richness, community diversity, and community similarity to determine possible ecological effects from contaminants. 2.5.2.4 Toxicity Tests
Water and sediment samples will be collected for toxicity testing at selected surface-water and sediment quality stations in all study areas. Water samples will be collected as near-surface grabs or with a closing sampler in water more than 1 meter deep. Sediments will be collected at these stations with an Ekman or petite Ponar dredge or with a coring device. The top 6 cm of undisturbed sediment will be used for testing. Water and sediment samples will be iced and shipped to the lab within 24 hours of collection. To measure the acute and chronic toxicity of surface waters and sediment, the following protocols will be used as appropriate.
A.2.28 SMe ManaigemntS PtarFSP Udeon Air Fore .
*Acute Tests. For surface water, the tests and protocols wilt be:
- 96-Hour Fathead Minnow (Pimaphales promelas) Toxicity Test, in Methods for Measuring the Acute Toxicity of Effluents to Freshwater and Marine Organisms, Peltier, W. and C. Weber (1985), EPA/600/4-85/O1 3.
- 48-Hour Daphnia magna Toxicity Test, in Methods for Measuring the Acute Toxicity of Effluents to Freshwater and Marine Organisms, Peltier, W. and C. Weber (1985); EPA/600/4-85/013.
- Microtox Test, in Micro tox System Instruction Manual, Microbics Corporation, and other guidance from the manufacturer.
*Chronic Tests. The tests and protocol will be the 7-Day Fathead Minnow Growth and Survival Test, in Short-Term Methods for Estimating the Chronic Toxicity of Effluents and Receiving Waters to Freshwater Organisms, Weber, C. et al. (1989), EPA/600/4-89/OO1. Toxicity testing on Site sediment samples will be more extensive than on surface water because sediments are less mobile and pose the potential for contaminant releases over a longer period of time. In addition, more contaminants were detected in sediments than surface waters, including some which could be ecologically important.
The tests and protocols for sediment will be:
* 96-Hour Fathead Minnow (Pimephales promelas) Toxicity Test, in Protocols for Short-Term Screening of Hazardous Waste Sites, February 1989, EPA/600/3-88/029.
* 48-Hour Daphnia magna Toxicity Test, in Protocols for Short- Term Screening of Hazardous Waste Sites, February 1989, EPA/600/3-88/029.
A .2.29 Shte Managament FHanFSP Batson Air Force Base
*Microtox Test, in Microtox System Instruction Manual, Microbics Corporation, and other guidance from the manufacturer.
The solid-phase sediment tests and protocol will be 10-Day Amphipod (H-fyalella azteca) Toxicity Test, in Biological Methods for Determining Toxicity of Contaminated Freshwater Sediments to Invertebrates, A.V. Nebeker et al., Environmental Toxicology and Chemistry, 3, 617-630, (1984).
Quality assurance criteria will be maintained throughout the course of the toxicity testing as prescribed by EPA guidelines in Quality Assurance Guidelines for Biological Testing, EPA/ 600/4-78-043. To verify that the sensitivity of the test organisms is within normal limits, reference toxicant tests will be conducted, where possible. Reference toxicants will include sodium chloride for the fathead minnow and Daphnia magna tests, and cadmium or copper for the Microtox and amphipod tests.
2.5.2.5 Tissue Analysis
Selection of stations for tissue sampling and analysis will be made on the basis of surface water, sediment, and toxicity testing results. Test organisms from several trophic levels will be selected if possible. Fish species will be selected that are either significant species or considered good indicators of contamination. As appropriate, samples for each test species will be composited from several individuals at each sample site. Whole body samples will be analyzed for invertebrates and nongame fish. To assess possible human health effects, edible tissue samples (fillets) will be analyzed if game fish are included as test species. Procedures for sampling, storage, and analysis will follow standard EPA protocol (EPA, 1982).
2.5.2.6 Terrestrial Vegetation, Nesting Waterfowl, Nonmigratory Terrestrial Animals
Detailed sampling and analysis protocols have not yet been established for these potentially affected components of the Eielson AFB ecological community.
A.2.300 Sit Manauwnwnt Pln-FSP Evuon Air Force A.*
Existing data and historical aerial photography will be reviewed to develop a survey plan for initial reconnaissance. Detailed work plans for terrestrial biological investigations will be developed following a Site visit by qualified wildlife and plant ecologists to document and verify onsite biological conditions, vegetation, and wildlife habitats in relation to identified source areas and operable units.
The detailed work plans for terrestrial biological investigations will be supplied as an addendum.
2.6 SOIL VAPOR SURVEY FOR VOLATILE COMPOUNDS 2.6.1 Soil Vapor Survey Objectives
The objective of a vapor survey is to identify areas where petro- leum products or organic solvents may have been released. 2.6.2 Soil Vapor Survey Locations and Frequencies
Locations of these surveys will be based on the initial data review and the walkover for the area to be investigated. Exact locations will be determined in the field by an engineer or hydrogeologist. Probes will be installed to about 4-ft (1.3-in) depth at all locations. Installation of additional deep probes to about 30 to 40 ft (10 to 13 m) using vibratory techniques will be evaluated prior to initiating the survey. Final depth at any individual location will depend on subsurface obstructions, such as permafrost. 2.6.3 Sample Designation
Stakes will be used to mark the locations of the soil vapor probes. Each probe location will be designated with a unique number associated with the facility being covered by the survey. This number will be followed by the letters "SV" to denote soil vapor, and a number indicating the sequence. The sample number will be marked with indelible ink on each stake for the probe locations. The sample number will also be used to indicate vapor samples obtained for analysis.
A.2.31 Shte Managementr Pan-FSP Beilson Air Force Base
2.6.4 Sampling Equipment and Procedures
Equipment required to conduct the soil vapor survey includes: (a) stainless steel probes, (bi vapor-tight fittings for the probes, (ci vacuum pump for purging and sampling, and Cd) sample con- tainers (may include vapor-tight syringes, stainless steel cylinders, Tedlar bags, glass sample bulbs). Complete details on equipment and procedures for soil vapor probe installation, penetrating and sealing pavement, purge volumes, sample depths, soil vapor extraction, sample collection, and sample analysis shall be specified in the FSPs for independent OUs.
2.6.5 Sample Handling and Analysis
Soil vapor samples will be obtained in clean vapor-tight sample containers such as Tedlar bags. Screening level analysis for volatile organics and halogenated compounds will be conducted onsite using a field portable gas chromatograph (GC) in order to provide real-time data as the survey proceeds. The field GO will be equipped with a photo-ionization detector (PlO) and an electron-capture detector (ECD). The PID is suitable for detecting volatile organic compounds and the ECD is capable of detecting halogenated organic compounds at low concentrations. 2.7 DRILLING 2.7.1 Initial Well Siting
An area survey will be conducted to collect area specific informa- tion and familiarize field personnel with physical features. This survey will begin with the completion of the topographic map developed as described in Section 2.3.
The necessity of and locations of borings and monitoring wells will be determined independently for each OU. Boring data provide information about the geology, hydrogeology and contamination types, concentrations, and delineations. Data from monitoring wells provide hydrogeologic and groundwater contamination data.
Specific boring and well locations, access for drilling equipment, and locations of surface utilities and sources near potential drill
A.2.32 Sit. Mawynegeu Pfan-FSP Edelon Air Forc Bwe
sites will be determined independently for each OU, and 0 ~~~~~~presented inthe OU's FSP. 2.7.2 Drilling Methods
All boreholes will be monitored for organic vapors and explosive gases during drilling using either a flame or photoionization detector in conjunction with an explosimeter. Readings will be taken with both meters at the top of the borehole and in the breathing zone of the worker closest to the top of the borehole during drilling. The readings will be recorded in a field notebook. Each soil sample will be screened for organic vapors, and the reading will be recorded on the boring logs adjacent to the sample description. 2.7.2.1 Monitoring Wells
Wells will be drilled with hollow-stem auger, air rotary or cable tool drilling rigs depending on the depth of the boring and amount of gravel expected in the formation. For cable tool and air rotary drilling, each boring will be advanced to total depth with a temporary steel casing following the standard drill-and-drive sequence. Diameters of the boreholes will be determined independently for each OU. Hollow-stem auger drilling shall be used to advance the boring to the required total depth or refusal using hollow- stem augers. Air rotary or cable tool drilling may be used at locations where difficult subsurface conditions and deep holes may make auger drilling impractical. The air-rotary rig would be equipped with a pneumatic casing advancer and include a down-hole hammer. In the case of air rotary or cable tool drilling, casing will be advanced during drilling in all unconsolidated formations to keep it near the bottom of the hole and avoid sloughing problems.
Boreholes will be drilled by a truck- or track-mounted drill rig using hollow stem augers. If while drilling the deep monitoring well borings a silt or clay confining layer is encountered, then it will be necessary to abandon the hole and drill a new hole with air rotary or cable tool so that telescoping casings can be used to seal off the upper zone. 0~~~~~~~~~~A23 Sit. Managemet Plan-FSP Edeon Air ForcSeB.
The method depicted in Figure A.2.3 of sealing the upper aquifer is as follows. Alternately, drill and drive 12-inch- diameter temporary steel casing through the upper aquifer and 1 foot into the confining layer. Bail cuttings and water from borehole to check for sufficient seal. Alternately, drill and drive 8-inch-diameter steel casing to total depth. Install 4-inch PVC casing and withdraw 8-inch temporary steel casing as the well is being constructed.
A geologist or engineer will supervise the drilling and lithologically log the boring using the Unified Soil Classification System as described in Section 2.7.3.3.
A.2.34 -- GROUND SURFACE
SAND AND GRAVEL SHALLOW AQUIFER TEMPORARY 1'2 DIAMETER STEEL CASING
SILT OR CLAY AOUITARD 4" PVC WELL CASING
TEMPORARY 8' DIAMETRR STEEL CASING SAND AND GRAVEL CONFINED AQUIFER
0 ~~~~FIGURE A.2.1 Typical Telescoped -Casing Drilling Method
Site Management Plan, Eielson Amr Force 3as Site Managsmen Plan-FSP dekon Air Forc Bee
2.7.2.2 Soil Boring
The soil borings will be drilled using a hollow-stem auger drilling rig. Soil samples will be obtained at each location for field geological classification and laboratory testing. Soil borings will generally be advanced to the water table. They may be completed as piezometric wells, soil vapor extraction wells, or abandoned.
2.7.3 Drilling Procedures
2.7.3.1 Handling of Drilling Residuals
Drill cuttings produced during drilling will be drummed at each location and transported to a staging area. The drums will become the responsibility of Eielson AFB for proper handling and disposal.
2.7.3.2 Decontamination of Equipment
All drilling equipment will be decontaminated according to the procedures outlined in Section 8.4 of this FSP. 2.7.3.3 Geologic Logging
All drilling activities will be documented. The field form titled "Monitoring Well Drilling and Geologic Log" (Figure A.2.2) and the field notebook will be used for this purpose. CH2M HILL standard form 01586 (Figure A.2.3), the soil boring log form, may also be used for field logging. All heading information must be completely filled out on each log sheet, and all technical items in each column must be addressed in the field.
Forms should be filled out neatly and completely. Instructions for completing soil boring log, Form D1586, are presented in CH2M HILL, Geotechnical Engineering, May 1990. This document will be available for field personnel. The approach and format for classifying soils should conform to ASTM D 2488-84. Field classifications of samples should be checked against the laboratory test results, and corrections should be noted in red, initialed, and dated on the field log.
A.2.36 L.\CV0,30768\C0768F12 DWC MUNITE RING WELL DRILLING & GEOLOGIC LOG
PROJECT ______. PROJECT NO ______WELL NO. ______HYDROGEOLOGIST ______
ELEVATION, NOVD (Top of Wveli Casing) ______SURFACE ELEVATION (NOVfl)______
WATER LEVEL ELEV/DATE (NGVD)______START DATE ______
DRILLING CONTRACTOR ______F__INISH DATE ______
DRILLING METHOD ~~~~~~~SAMPLING METHOD ______
SAMPLE GEOLOGIC LOG L USCS DESIGNATION ~~> u~~i ~(Soilt name, color, grain < < I~~L size, noisture content, relative Z YL > - )zoZ Edensity, structur-e) U'- COSTUCIO Li-p 0 -CD a.0 0 mu Z)M ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~SKETCH
FIGURE A.2.2 Monitoring Well Drilling and Geologic Log PROJECT NUMBER BORING NUMBER SHEET OF
SOIL BORING LOG
PROJECT ______LOCATION ______
ELEVATION ______DRILLING CONTRACTOR ______
DRILLING METHOD AND EQUIPMENT ______
WATER LEVELS ______START _ _ _ _ _ FINISH ______LOGGER ______
SAMPLE STNADSOIL DESCRIPTION COMMENTS
- - ~~~PENETRATION wu J Cc TEST co CC~0- w RESULTS SOIL NAME, USCS GROUP SYMBOL. COLOR, DEPTH OF CASING, DRILLING RATE, > w>. > MOISTURE CONTENT, RELATIVE DENSITY DRILLING FLUID LOSS, ~t 0 OR CONSISTENCY, SOIL STRUCTURE, TESTS AND INSTRUMENTATION a. Iuj OR 6'-6'6 MINERALOGY oco DZ< w (N)
FIGURE A.2.3. Soil Boring Log Site Management Plan, Eielson Air Force Bose Mie Manageent Pfan-FSP HEason Air Force Sue
2.7.3.4 Geophysical Logging
Methods of geophysical borehole logging are discussed in Section 2.4 of this FSP.
2.7.4 Soil Sampling
2.7.4.1 Geological Characterization
Soil samples for geological (stratigraphic) characterization will be collected from each new boring. Sampling frequency will be determined independently depending on the purpose of the soil boring. Several methods of sampling may be employed for sampling soils from monitoring well borings. Because of the natural variability of geologic materials, the most appropriate sampling equipment cannot be specified in advance. Preferably samples will be taken with a precleaned split-spoon sampler. Although conditions may require that less-precise methods be used. For example, the formation may be too coarse to sample with any drive method, so cuttings may be collected from a discrete zone. This may limit the range of appropriate analyses for such a sample. When a split-spoon sampler can be used, the sampler will be * ~~~~~~~~driven at leastl1foot into the soil ahead of the steel casing or until refusal. After the split-spoon sampler is removed from the borehole, it will be opened, and the sample will be split lengthwise with a clean stainless steel knife. The project geologist or hydrogeologist will record the following information for each well boring on the soil boring log:
* project name
* date (start and finish) of drilling
* well number or soil boring number
* sample number and depth
* method of advancing sampler
* type and size of sampler
A.2.39 Site Managernes PfanFSP Edson Air Forc Bwee
* penetration recovery length of sampler * hammer weight
* description of soil (ASTM 0 2488-84):
- lithology - grain-size distribution and shape - sorting - color (may use the Munsell Color Chart) - structure - density or consistency - moisture content (relative) * visible indication of contamination (oily sheen, discoloration, or nonnative appearance)
* description of layering
*depth to water surface
*type and make of drill rig
* size of casing, depth of cased hole * remarks
* contamination monitoring.
All soil sampling equipment will be decontaminated between samples according to the procedures outlined in Section 8.3 of this FSP. Drive samples will be screened with a photoionization or flame ionization detector for volatile organics.
2.7.4.2 Physical Characteristic Samples
To assist in the hydrogeologic analysis, Shelby tube samples (ASTM D-1 587) may be taken for vertical permeability testing (ASTM D-2434). Stainless steel or brass sleeves may also be inserted into split-spoon drive samplers to obtain soil samples.
A.2.40 Mhe Magementw PV~FSP Befnn Air Few Bee
A list of soil physical parameters and the analysis method is 0 ~~~~~~~presented inTable A.2.4.
TABLE A.2.4. Soil Physical Parameters for the Site RI/FS ASTM Standard/Analytical Parameter Method Total porosity D-854-83
______D-221 6-80 Moisture content (above water D-221 6 table and in clay zones) Grain size distribution, including D-422
percent clay ______Soil classification (USCS) D-2487 Consolidation (clay zones only) D-2435 Cation exchange capacity EPA Method 9080
______(SW 846) Contaminant sorption by soils D-4646-87 Vertical hydraulic conductivity Granular material D-2434-68 Cohesive material Geotechnical Testing Journal, Vol. 7, No. 3, September 1984, ______pp. 113-122 Legend: ASTM =American Society for Testing Materials USCS =Unified Soil Classification System
2.8 WELL CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES
This section describes well construction, development, and surveying procedures. 2.8.1 Well Component Decontamination
All PVC casing, slotted casing, and stainless steel centralizers will be cleaned with a hot-water pressure washer immediately prior to installation. The decontamination of the well components will be documented in the field notebook.
A.2.41 Site Magementm Pla-FSP Ealuon Ak Fam Base
2.8.2 Well Construction
Figure A.2.4 illustrates a typical monitoring well construction drawing. Figure A.2.5 "Monitoring Well Record Drawing and Construction Log" form shall be filled out following monitoring well construction.
All casing diameters and well construction materials will be determined on an OU-by-OU basis. Some of the factors determining well drilling method and construction include well depth, stratigraphy, contamination types and depths, and the purpose of the monitoring well.
For example, a shallow (10- to 20-foot) well for monitoring the upper portion of the aquifer may be drilled by a hollow-stem auger rig using 5-7/8-inch-diameter ID augers. Well construction materials may consist of 2-inch-diameter Schedule 40 PVC flush- threaded screen (0.010 to 0.020 slot), coarse silica sand to 2 feet above the screen, 1 to 2 feet of bentonite pellets, a slurry grout seal, and a concrete surface seal.
A well completed into bedrock and screened just above the bed- rock may be better drilled by air rotary. Casing may be telescoped with a cement-grout surface seal to prevent upper aquifer contamination from commingling with the lower portion of the aquifer while drilling. Well construction materials may consist of 2- to 4-inch-diameter Schedule 40 or 80 PVC and 10 to 15 feet of 2- to 4-inch-diameter, Schedule 40 PVC, 0.01 0- to 0.020-slot screen with coarse silica sand filter pack, fine silica sand annulus seal, pure gold grout annulus seal, and a concrete surface seal.
All casing risers, sumps, and screens will be coupled with threaded joints using teflon tape to seal the joints; no PVC solvent or metal parts will be used. All PVC will be steam cleaned in the field prior to use.
Shallow wells should be screened with 10- to 20-foot screens such that at least 2 feet of screen extends above the water table. No screen section will be emplaced that creates an interconnection of two or more hydrostratigraphic units. Intermediate wells may be screened approximately between 40 and 60 feet BGS. Exact screen location will be determined by the hydrogeologist or engineer in the field.
A. 2.42 DEEP WELL SHALLOW WELL TELESCOPING CASING
GROUND SURFACE
TEMPORARY~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ EMORR CASING~ ~ ~ ~ ~~~~~~ASN
SILT OR CLAY AQUITARD
TEMPORARY CASING
1 SAND AND GRAVEL ALLU 0UM WELL CASING
BEDROCK
FIGURE A.2.4. Typical Monitoring Well Construction
Site Management Pion, ELeison Air Force Base MONITORING YELL RECERE DRAWING & CONSTRLJCTIEN LEG
PROJECT NAME ______PROJECT NE. ______
YELL NO. ______FIELD OBSERVERS ______ELEV, NEVD (top of weUi casinig) SURFACE ELEV, NGVED____
WATER LEVEL ELEV/DATE, NEVD ______START DATE ____
DRILLING CONTRACTOR ______FINISH DATE ____
DRILLING METHOD ______
PROTECTIVE SUFC WELL CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS
+ FT BOREHOLE DIA(S) -_____INCHESTO -____FT BOS
GROUND SURFACE __ INCHES TO -___ FT BGS
SURFACE SEAL ____ INCHES TO -____FT BGS
~ PROTECTI1VE CASING TYPE
PROTECTIVE CASINO DIAMETER ______
ANNULAR SEAL- ~~~~WELL CASING TYPE ~DIAMETER-____
COUPLING TYPE ______
SCREEN TYPE . .______DIAMETER
SLOT SIZE ______SCREEN LENGTH ______
TOP CAP TYPE WELL CASING ~~~~ENDCAP/PLUG TYPE
CENTRALIZER TY PEPE_ _
CENTRALIZER LOCATION(S) ______
FILTER PACK TYPE ______GRADATION _____
FILTER PACK VOLUME ______FT
SURFACE ______VOLUME
ANNULAR_____.._VOLUME
FTBENTONITE ______VOLUME
FILTER PACK BACKFILL ______VOLUME..
WELL DEVELOPMENT
DATE
COMMENTS
END CAP/PLUG FT______
FT ______
BACKFILL TD E-1T NOT TO SCALE m DEPTHS ABOVE/BELOW GROUND SURFACE FIGURE A.2.2, Monitoring Well Record Drawing and Construction Log Mhe Manogwna'a Plan-FSP 5cd*on Al, Forc Bao
The sump, screen, and riser assembly will be lowered through 0 ~~~~~~thehollow-stem auger (or into the 6-inch-diameter casing) to the proper depth or the bottom of the boring. A filter pack of medium to coarse, clean silica sand will be placed adjacent to the entire screen interval and extend at least 2 feet above the top of the screen. The level of sand will be confirmed by sounding with a weighted tape. The filter pack will be emplaced by carefully pouring it down the annulus between the casing and the hollow- stem augers. The auger will be pulled as the filter pack is being emplaced such that sand is always inside of the hollow-stem augers. This is to prevent caving of the natural formation around the screen. A minimum 2-foot-thick bentonite pellet seal will be placed above the filter pack. The seal will be placed in the same manner as the filter pack and will be sounded with a weighted tape. The bentonite pellets need not be emplaced frozen in the shallow wells because the seal will be emplaced at very shallow depths and above the water table. Thus, hydration problems are not anticipated. The bentonite pellets will be poured into the annulus very slowly to prevent bridging. Bentonite pellets may need to be frozen before emplacing into the annulus of intermediate * ~~~~~~~wells.
A minimum 2-foot fine silica sand seal may be used in place of the bentonite pellet seal.
The annulus above the bentonite or fine silica sand seal will be grouted with either Type I portland cement/bentonite slurry or a 2-component bentonite grout. The grout will be placed to the ground surface in the same manner as the filter pack or after the auger flights have been entirely withdrawn from the hole for the shallow wells. The grout will be pump-tremied into the annulus in the deep holes and the casing/augers will be removed as the grout is being emplaced in such a manner that there is never an open borehole. A 5-foot length of 6-inch-diameter steel pipe with a locking cap approximately 2.5 feet below ground surface and 2.5 feet above ground surface will be installed as protective casing around the well. Locks will be provided by the Base for all wells, and they will be keyed alike. A 4-inch-thick concrete pad will be poured 0~~~~~~~~~~A24 Sit. Maeagemae P.M-rsp 5.#son Air Peace Base
on the ground surface at each well. The surface pad will be constructed to slope away from the well.
If the well is in an area of heavy vehicular traffic, three 3-inch- diameter steel guard posts will be installed radially from each well head. The guard posts will be 5 feet in total length and will be recessed 2 feet into the ground. The protective steel casing will be painted and the well number will be marked on the steel casing exterior. Alternatively, the wells may be constructed below grade and protected by a concrete cover. The PVC well casing will be cut off below the ground surface; a 6-inch- diameter steel protective well cover with locking cap, 2.5 feet in length, placed over the well casing and cemented in below the ground surface; and a concrete valve box (Christy box), approximately 2 feet square, with a traffic rated cast iron cover, set flush with the ground surface and concreted in place. A 1- inch-diameter drain hole will be provided inside the Christy box to facilitate free drainage of any water infiltration. Other surface well completions may be acceptable also.
2.8.3 Well Development
The wells will be developed after construction to remove turbidity created by the drilling and the construction process. Well development will begin no sooner than 24 hours after construction is complete to allow bentonite and cement seals to stabilize. The wells may be developed by means of mechanical surging and over-pumping with a submersible, positive displacement, or a centrifugal pump. The pump intake will be set into the screened section of the well. The discharge rate may be periodically adjusted and the pump will be rapidly raised and lowered to create a surging action in the well. Development will continue as long as the water withdrawn continues to decrease in turbidity or to the satisfaction of the site hydrogeologist. Groundwater produced during development will be managed by a method described in Section 7.0. Decontamination procedures for pumps are presented in Section 8.0. The development will be documented in the field notebook or on a Well Development Form.
A. 2.46 Sit. Managuwwt Plan-FSP Ednin AkiFon &ee
Shallow wells may be developed using a stainless steel bailer and 0 ~~~~~~surge block. 2.8.4 Well Surveying
The new monitoring wells will be surveyed for location and elevation by a licensed surveyor. The elevation of the north side of the top of the PVC casing will be determined to the nearest ±0.01 foot. A mark in indelible ink will be placed on the casing to indicate the location that was surveyed. The horizontal location will be determined to the nearest 0.5 foot and referenced to the Alaska state plane coordinates and/or Eielson AFB coordinates. All measurements will be referenced to the NVGD datum. Surveying equipment and procedures are described in more detail in Section 2.3.3.
2.9 GROUNDWATER PROBES Groundwater probes will be utilized for temporary single-event monitoring of groundwater chemistry. The groundwater probes will be used to collect groundwater screening samples to determine nature and extent of contamination and the most appropriate location for new monitoring wells, if required. Probes will be installed in phases, directed by the groundwater analysis results. Representative samples of groundwater will be obtained by driving a minimum 1-inch ID steel pipe, fitted with detachable steel drive tip or steel bolt, 1 to 3 feet below the water table using a hand-operated pneumatic hammer or drill rig sampling hammer. The pipe will be retracted approximately 6 to 12 inches using hydraulic jacks or drill rig pulley, exposing an open annular zone between the bottom of the pipe and the drive tip. A 1/2-inch slotted PVC pipe may be lowered into the pipe before retracting the steel pipe to act as a temporary well. Groundwater samples will be extracted using a peristaltic pump. After the sample has been collected, the pipe (and PVC pipe) will be extracted, leaving the steel drive tip or steel bolt downhole. The upper 6 inches of the borehole will be enlarged to accommodate a flush 6-inch-diameter concrete surface seal.
0 ~~~~~~~~~~A.2.47 Whe Managan-it Plan SP 5 aaon Air Farc Base
2.10 PRODUCT PROBES i
Product probes may be installed to determine the extent of floating product. Product probes will be installed in phases, directed by the field team leader based on the presence and thickness of free product detected.
Product probes will consist of a 1.5- to 2.0-inch ID wire-wrapped or slotted steel drive point approximately 3 feet long coupled to an appropriate length of riser pipe. The well point will be driven with the drill rig sampling hammer to a depth of approximately 2 feet below the water table. Approximately 1 foot of the well point will remain above the water table to enable product thickness measurements. Product thickness measurements are described in Section 3.1.6.6. The product probes will be surveyed for elevation and horizontal location as described in Section 2.3.
The determination to retain or abandon the product probes will be made during the course of the field investigation as free product source and distribution data are gathered, and plans for ongoing monitoring are developed.
A.2.48~ Sit. Mangmentd PkanFSP Eduon Air Forc Bne
. ~3.0 ENVIRONMENTAL SAMPLING The following sections describe the general procedures to be fol- lowed by the field team in collecting environmental samples from soil, sediment, surface water, and groundwater. Additional procedures or modifications may be required during the course of the Eielson AFB investigations, and they will be detailed in the Source Sampling Plans as they are developed. The following general procedures ensure that:
* samples are collected in a manner representative of field conditions * samples are identified, preserved, and transported properly to retain sample integrity.
The sampling sites, number and frequency of samples to be obtained, and types of analyses will be determined separately for each QU.
3.1 SAMPLING EQUIPMENT COLLECTION PROCEDURES
* ~~~~~~Sampling procedures will meet EPA standards as outlined in Sampling at Hazardous Materials Incidents (EPA, 1984). An overview of concerns about sampling the different matrices and step-by-step procedures that will most likely be used at Eielson AFB have been extracted from that reference and are summarized in the following paragraphs.
A clean or decontaminated pair of gloves will be used to collect each sample. Reusable collection equipment, such as spades and spoons, will be cleaned and returned to the field team's storage trailer. Disposal of contaminated materials such as disposable equipment and clothing used during the sampling process will be coordinated with the Base Environmental Officer.
3.1.1 Surface Soil Samples (0- to 5-foot depth)
Soil types can vary considerably at source areas. These variations, along with vegetation, can affect the rate of contaminant migration through the soil. Therefore, it is important that a detailed record be maintained during sampling
0 ~~~~~~~~~~~A.3.1 Sit. Men. gemen PfanFSP Eq/son Air FamoBs
operations of location, depth, and characteristics such as grain size, color, visible stains, and odors.
The following procedures apply to all surface soil sampling:
*Check that the teflon liner is present in the cap, if required. Secure the cap tightly. Label the sample container with the appropriate tag. Record the sample in the field log book.
* Place the labeled sample in a cooler maintained at temperatures not to exceed 40 C throughout the sampling and transportation period.
* Decontaminate equipment before and after use. Keep equipment off contaminated surfaces to prevent cross- contamination of the samples.
3.1.1.1 Hand Implements
Stainless steel scoops, shovels, thin-walled tube sampler, trowels, or spoons can be used as sampling tools in most soils types. These implements are also useful in sampling some homogeneous bulk materials that might be contained in or spilled from bags, drums, or hoppers. Soil samples from depths greater than 50 cm generally become extremely labor intensive and use of hand implements is not recommended. However, depth of soil sampling is strongly dependent upon soil types encountered. A flat, pointed mason trowel or sharp shooter tile spade can be used to cut a block of soil when undisturbed profiles are required. Care will be exercised to avoid the use of devices plated with chrome or other materials that may interfere with chemical analysis. These procedures shall be followed for using scoop, shovel, thin-walled tube sampler, trowel, or spoon:
*Carefully remove the top layer of soil to the desired sample depth with a precleaned shovel or spade. Remove all twigs, rocks, litter, and surface vegetation and the first few centimeters of surface soil to reduce the impact of surface microbes on the sample. A.3.2~ Sit MangmentM PtaFSP meson Air Foe. Base
Using a precleaned stainless steel scoop, trowel, or spoon, remove and discard a thin layer of soil from the area which comes in contact with the shovel.
* Using the stainless steel sampling device, collect the desired quantity of soil. * If compositing a series of grab samples, use a stainless steel mixing bowl or teflon tray for mixing. Do not use this step when collecting samples for volatiles analysis in source areas.
* Samples for volatile analysis should be collected from the source areas with as little mixing and agitation as possible. Quickly and directly scoop such soil samples into the required sample containers with as little air space as possible.
* Transfer sample into an appropriate sample container with a stainless steel lab spoon or equivalent.
3.1.1.2 Thin-walled Tube Samplers
* ~~~~~~These samplers also can be used to sample surface soils when the soils are not too rocky. For shallow samples, drive the corer without preliminary boring. Samples can also be obtained from depths to 2 meters after preliminary boring, but care must be taken not to brush loose soil back into the bore hole when removing augers and the drill rod or inserting the corer.
These procedures shall be followed for using thin-walled tube samplers:
* Clear the area to be sampled of twigs, rocks, and litter. (Auger to required depth.) If augering is not possible, use a clean shovel or tile spade to reach the desired depth.
* Gradually force precleaned corer into soil. *Remove corer. Remove soil core from device.
A.3.3 Shet Magemenwt PYen-FSP Slason Air Forc B~ae
*Discard top of core (approximately 2.5 cm), which represents any material collected by the corer before penetration of the layer in question. Replace remaining care in appropriate sample container. If samples are collected for volatile analysis in source areas, immediately cap off both ends of the 6-inch brass sampling tube with teflon tap, plastic caps, and finally wrap electrical tape around the cap-brass tube interface.
3.1.2 Sludge and Sediment Samples
Sludges are defined as semi-dry materials ranging from dewatered solids to high-viscosity liquids. Sludges can often be sampled by use of a stainless steel scoop. Frequently, sludges form as a result of settling of higher-density components of a liquid and still have a layer of liquid above it. When the liquid is shallow, the sludge may be scooped up by a device such as the pond sampler described below or a thin-tube sampler described in the previous section. In coarse-textured sediments under water, the use of the thin-tube sampler is not possible. When the overlying layer is deep, a small gravity corer, such as those used in limnological studies, is useful.
Sediments are the deposited materials underlying a body of water and can range from a few inches to many feet in depth. Sediment samples may be collected on this project from streams, creeks, lakes, and ponds. On occasion, they are exposed by evaporation or stream loss. All sediment sampling should progress in an upgradient direction with the most downgradient sample collected first. Sediment samples will be collected only after all overlying water samples have been obtained.
The following procedures apply to all sediment or sludge sampling: *Check that the teflon liner is present in the cap, if required. Secure the cap tightly. Label the sample container with the appropriate tag. Record the sample in the field log book.
A.3.4 SWe Managemen Plan-FSP Nelson Air For".Base
* Place the labeled sample in a cooler maintained at temperatures not to exceed 40C throughout the sampling and transportation period.
* Decontaminate equipment before and after use. Keep equipment off contaminated surfaces to prevent cross- contamination of the samples. Place equipment on disposable polyethylene plastic sheeting.
3.1.2.1 Scoops or Trowels
If the water depth is very shallow (a few centimeters), sediment samples can be collected using stainless steel scoops, thin-walled tube samplers, or trowels as described for surface soils. However, this method, except for the thin- walled tube samplers, can be very disruptive to the water/ sediment interface and might cause alterations in sample integrity if extreme care is not exercised. Amount of disturbance and any problems encountered during the collection of the sample should be documented in the field log.
3.1.2.2 Hand Corer
A hand corer can also be used to collect sediment. It has the advantage of collecting an undisturbed sample that can profile any stratification in the sample as a result of changes in deposition. Some hand corers can be fitted with long handles to facilitate collection of sediment from under shallow layers of water. Most corers can also be adapted to hold liners available in brass, polycarbonate plastic, or teflon as required by the specific analyses. If liners are used, they are removed from the corer, capped, labeled, and sent directly to the laboratory.
These procedures shall be followed for using a hand corer:
* force precleaned corer in with smooth continuous motion * twist corer, then withdraw in a single smooth motion
A.3.5 site Management PIa-FSP Eleson Air Forc Base
* remove nosepiece and withdraw sample into a stainless steel or teflon tray * transfer sample into appropriate sample container with a stainless steel lab spoon or equivalent.
3.1.2.3 Ponar Grab/Ekman Dredge When the sediment is covered by a deep layer of water, a Ponar Grab, Ekman Dredge, or similar device can be used to collect the sample. The Ponar Grab is a clamshell-type scoop activated by a counter-lever system. The shell is opened, latched in place, and slowly lowered to the bottom. When tension is released on the lowering cable, the latch releases and the lifting action on the lever system closes the clamshell. Penetration by the grab sampler into the sediments usually does not exceed several centimeters. A disturbed sample is collected in which the first centimeter of sediment cannot be separated from that at lower depths. The sampling action of these devices causes agitation currents that may resuspend some settled solids. This disturbance can be minimized by slowly lowering the sampler the last half meter and allowing very slow contact with the bottom. These procedures shall be followed for using a sediment grab sampler such as a Ponar: * Attach a precleaned Ponar to the necessary length of sample line (usually nylon line at least 5 mm).
* Measure and mark the distance to bottom on the sample line. A secondary mark, 1 meter shallower, will indicate proximity so that lowering rate can be reduced, thus prevent unnecessary bottom disturbance. * Open sampler jaws until latched. From this point on, support sampler by its lift line or sampler will be tripped and the jaws will close. * Begin lowering the sampler until the proximity mark is reached.
A.3.6 Met Memwnegmr FfeFSP Hak on Air Forc Ba.
*Slow rate of descent through last meter until contact is felt.
*Allow sample line to slack several centimeters. In strong currents, more slack may be necessary to release mechanism.
*Slowly raise sampler clear of surface. *Collect a suitable aliquot with a precleaned stainless steel spoon or equivalent and place sample into appro- priate sample container.
3.1.3 Borehole Sampling Borehole soil sampling is also described in Section 2.7.4 of this FSP. Both surface and subsurface soil samples from boreholes may be collected using the following procedures:
* Using an auger, advance drill hole to the desired depth.
* Replace auger bit with precleaned, split-spoon drive sam- pler on end of drill rod. Operate the hammer of the drilling rig to force the sampler into the undisturbed soil at the bottom of the borehole. If the borehole was augered manually, use a sledge hammer on the top end of the drill rod to force the sampler into the soil.
* Retrieve the sampler from the hole and detach from drill rod.
* Retrieve samples from drive sampler in a manner that will minimize aeration and subsequent loss of volatiles. A small portion at the top of the sampler will usually be disturbed and should be discarded. Volatile samples, from the source areas, are always collected first and directly from the sampler with no mixing into VOA purge vials. For other analyses, duplicate samples can first be transferred to a stainless steel mixing bowl, gently homogenized, and then transferred to the appropriate container.
A.3.7 Sit Meagmewnt Plan-FSP Be/aen Air Fore a
*An alternative scheme is to collect samples in stainless steel or brass tubes (usually 6 by 2 inches in diameter) which were placed inside the split spoon prior to sample collection. The tubes are then capped at each end with PTFE-lined plastic caps sealed with PVC tape. Labs receiving the samples should be instructed to unseal the samples immediately prior to analysis. Either end of the tube may be opened, then discard the top 1/2 to 1 inch of soil. All subsamples should be taken from the center of the sample, away from the brass sides. Tubes are not appropriate where sample recovery is expected to be low or where brass may be thought to affect the chemical analyses.
* Check that the teflon liner is present in the cap, if required. Secure the cap tightly. Label the sample container with the appropriate tag. Record the sample in the field log book.
* Place the labeled sample in a cooler maintained at temperatures not to exceed 40 C throughout the sampling and transportation period.
* Decontaminate equipment before and after use. Keep equipment off contaminated surfaces to prevent cross- contamination of the samples. Place equipment on disposable polyethylene plastic sheeting. 3.1.4 Test Pit and Trench Sampling
The backhoe buckets used to dig test pits should be steam cleaned before and after each pit is dug.
Personnel should enter test pits only after the following conditions have been met:
* test pit walls have stabilized and have been dug to pre- scribed industry safety standards with respect to incline for the type of soil
* ambient air conditions in pits have been tested and are free of organic vapors, have sufficient oxygen levels, and are free of explosive conditions
A. 3.8 Met Managewnmn flanFSP Edeon Air Force Base
* *~~~~~~~water is not entering the pit.
If entry into the pit is possible, then soil samples can be collected from the walls and bottom of the pit using the same procedures as for surface soil sampling. The first few centimeters of disturbed soil should be removed and discarded.
If entry into the pit is not feasible, then the edge of the pit should be approached with caution. Precleaned, long-handled scoops or a corer can be used to collect soil samples. Water samples can be collected with precleaned, long-handled dippers or bailers similar to the procedures for surface water collection. Soil samples should be collected at the bottom of the pit and progress vertically upward to avoid cross-contamination. Soil grab samples can also be collected directly from the backhoe bucket. However, this is not recommended, especially for volatile organics analyses. Such samples have been disturbed and their depth is questionable due to soil falling back into the pit. 3.1.5 Surface Water Samples
When a surface film is visible or suspected, the water surface should be sampled. Otherwise, a water sample should be taken near the bottom of the body of water to maximize the chance of recovering volatiles and some heavier-than-water organic contaminants that might be present. Vertical water column sampling of lakes may be helpful in determining the distribution of contamination in the lake and its entry points.
Surface-film water samples can be collected directly into the pre- cleaned sample bottle by lowering the open bottle horizontally into the water at the designated sample point. As water begins to flow into the bottle, slowly turn the bottle upright, keeping the lip just under the surface so that only the top-most surface water is collected. Lift the bottle out of the water, wipe the outside with a disposable wiping cloth, and cap the bottle. This method is advantageous when the sample might be altered during the transfer from a collection vessel into another container through the loss of volatile organics to the air or adhesion of oil or metals to the transfer container.
A. 3.9 Sit. Momags~wt Pfan-FSP Beson Air Forc Owe
For deeper water samples, a sealed container can be lowered to the desired sample depth and the lid or stopper removed allowing the container to fill. A peristaltic pump system or a Kemmerer bottle can also be used. The following procedures apply to all surface water sampling:
* Preserve the sample, if necessary, following established guidelines described in the QAPP (Appendix B).
* Check that the teflon liner is present in the cap if required. Secure the cap tightly. Label the sample container, using a permanent marker, with the appropriate "tape-sealed" tag. Record the sample in the field log book. * All information and data associated with surface water field work will be recorded in logbooks or diaries. Surface water sample data sheets, surface water level data sheets, and surface water quality summary sheets will be filled out for each sampling event (Figures A.3.1 through A. 3.3).
* Place the labeled sample in a cooler maintained at temperatures not to exceed 40C throughout the sampling and transportation period.
* Decontaminate equipment before and after use. Keep equipment off contaminated surfaces to prevent cross- contamination of the samples. Place equipment on disposable polyethylene plastic sheeting. 3.1.5.1 Pond Samplers and Transfer Devices
Surface water can also be collected from streams, creeks , lakes, ponds, and lagoons with the use of a stainless steel dipper, pond sampler, or similar transfer device. A pond sam- pler consists of an adjustable clamp attached to the end of a 2- or 3-piece, telescoping, aluminum tube that serves as a handle. The clamp is used to secure a sampling beaker. The long handle allows for samples to be collected as far as 3.5 mn from the edge of the ponds. These sampling devices transfer liquid from their source to the sample bottle, A. 3.1 0 SURFACE WATER SAMPLING 0 ~~~~~FIELD DATA SHEET
PROJECT NAME ______JOB NUMBER ______
LOCATION NUMBER ______FIELD TEAM ______
FIELD CONDITIONS ______
FIELD MEASUREMENT! SERIAL/ID CALIBRATION/ CDLLECTION EQUIP. MAKE/MODEL NO., COMMENTS
pH M ETER ______
CONDUCTIVITY METER ______
THERMOMETER ______
SAM PLER ______
DECONTAMINATION ______
SAMPLING INFORMATION
DATE ______START TIME ______END TIME _ _ _ _
METHOD
FIELD MEASUREMENTS
TEMP pH CONDlUCTIVITY APPEARANCE/COMMENTS PRE SAMPLE I III POST SAMPLEI
FIGURE A.3.1 Surface Water Sampling Field Data Sheet I:\CV0.30768\Co7saF14.DWC SHIPPING INFORMATION SIPN
SAMPLE NO/ID ANALYSIS LABORATORY CARRIER DATE
COlMMENTS AND EXCEPTIONS TO SAP/QAPP
-- -- *------~~~~7-
~~~~~~~~-7--F------
7 11
F -FGU EA3. ufaeW te-a pln iedD taSet cn. 1:\K 378C781.W 0)
LLJ ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~C)
Li~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~E
-J< -LJ
2 -~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~1 *~~~~~ 0 0~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~0 < <~~~~~~~~~~C w~ ~ t tD F- ~ Uz C ~ ~ 3 0
WwW SAMPLE DATE NO/ID SAMPLER COMMENTS po FIGURE A.3.3 Surface Water Quality Scmo~lin;- S-,rnmc'w Sit. Managanwt Pla-FSP MEson Alr Fame ha. preventing unnecessary contamination of the outer surface of the sample bottle that would otherwise result from direct immersion in the liquid. Long handles (and proper personal protective garments) allow the sampler to avoid coming in contact with the liquid. A transfer device can be used in most sampling situations, except where aeration must be eliminated (such as volatiles organic analysis) or where significant material may be lost due to adhesion to the transfer container. These procedures shall be followed for using a transfer device or pond sampler: * Assemble the precleaned sampling device. (For the pond sampler, make sure that the beaker and the bolts and nuts that Secure the clamp to the pole are tightened properly.) * With proper protective garment and equipment, take grab samples by slowly submerging the sampling vessel with minimal surface disturbance. * Retrieve the sampling device from the surface water with minimal disturbance. * Remove the cap from the sample bottle and slightly tilt the mouth of the bottle below the sampling device edge. * Empty the sampling device slowly, allowing the sample stream to flow gently down the side of the bottle with minimal entry turbulence. 3.1.5.2 Peristaltic Pump The portable pump system consists of a peristaltic pump and teflon tubing for the intake, and can be either battery or generator operated. The chief disadvantages of the pump system for deep water sampling is that it can only lift approximately 25 feet of head or less and may strip volatiles from the sample. A. 3.1 5 Sie Mangmwent Ptan-FSP Edeon Air Forc Rae These procedures shall be followed for using a peristaltic pump: * Install clean, medical-grade silicone tubing in the pump head, according to the manufacturer's instructions. Allow sufficient tubing on the discharge side to facilitate convenient dispensation of the liquid into sample bottles and only enough on the suction end for attachment to the intake line. This practice will minimize sample contact with the silicone pump tubing. * Select the length of suction intake tubing (heavy- walled teflon) necessary to reach the required sample depth and attach to the intake side of pump tubing. * Allow several liters of sample to pass through the system before actual sample collection. Collect this purge volume and then return to source after the sample aliquot has been withdrawn. * Fill necessary sample bottles by allowing pump dis- charge to flow gently down the side of bottle with minimal entry turbulence. Cap each bottle as filled. 3.1.5.3 Kemmerer Bottle The Kemmerer bottle is a messenger-activated, deep water sampling device. In the open position, water flows easily through the device. Once lowered to the desired depth, a messenger is dropped down the sample line, tripping the release mechanism and closing the bottle. In the closed position, the bottle is sealed on both top and bottom from any additional contact with the water column. These procedures shall be followed for using a Kemmerer bottle or other bottom filling device: *Inspect Kemmerer bottle for thorough cleaning and ensure that sample drain valve is closed (if bottle is so equipped). A. 3.1 6 Bk.o Manag&ment Pfan-FSP igteon Air Force Base * Measure and then mark sample line at desired 0 ~~~~~~~~~sampling depth. * Open bottle by lifting top stopper-trip head assembly. * Gradually lower bottle until desired depth is reached. * Place messenger on sample line and release. • Retrieve sampler. Hold sampler by center stem to pre- vent accidental opening of bottom stopper. * Rinse or wipe off exterior of sampler body. Wear proper gloves and protective clothing. * Recover sample by grasping lower stopper and sampler body with one hand (gloved), and transfer sample. * Allow sample to flow slowly down side of sample bottle with minimal disturbance. 3.1.6 Groundwater Samples Groundwater samples are most often collected from monitoring wells or temporary well points but can also be collected from drinking water supplies (preferably before the addition of chlorine and other chemicals to the drinking water), seeps, and springs. Sampling from nearby drinking water wells at the household taps is very important if the site investigation has risk assessment as one of its goals. Seeps and springs are generally areas where the surface contour intersects the water table. Surface microbial populations can extend some distance into the aquifer and alter the oxygen content, pH, nutrient, and metals concentrations of a sample. Hence, samples from seeps and springs at the surface may not be representative of the groundwater conditions deeper in the aquifer. Monitoring wells must have been previously developed (purged of many gallons of water until physical parameters of pH, conductivity, and temperature have stabilized). Field parameters (pH, temperature, and conductivity) will be used along with reduction in turbidity to gauge development. A general rule of 0~~~~~~~~~~~~~~A . Si.Mo~nmgeme Pfan-FSP Ee~son Air Force Base thumb is to remove the following volumes of water at a minimum during development: Minimum Diameter of Volume Well Casing Depth to Water of Water (inches) Below Ground (gallons) 2 Shallow Aquifer 100 2-4 Middle Aquifer 100-500 4-6 Deep Aquifer 1,000 Once wells are developed, they should not have to be redevel- oped. After development, the wells should be allowed to stabilize for several days. Prior to each sampling event, three to five volumes of the water in the casing should be purged again to remove the standing, static water. Wells should be sampled within 24 hours of purging. 3.1.6.1 Documentation The Groundwater Quality Sampling Summary and Groundwater Sampling Field Data Sheets, shown in Figures A.3.4 to A.3.5, will be completed during sampling at each location. These forms will become permanent records of sampling activities to document field sampling quality control procedures. 3.1.6.2 Head Space Screening Prior to sampling at each well, the head space will be screened with an OVA or HNu during the opening of the security cap and removal of the PVC well cap for safety monitoring during presampling and purging. The results will be documented in the Groundwater Sampling Field Data Sheet, Figure A.3.5. 3.1.6.3 Groundwater Elevation Measurements Water-level measurements will be taken at each well prior to purging. The wells will be approached with an HNu/OVM and carefully opened. The HNu/OVM will be used to monitor for A. 3.1 8 GROUNDWATER WATER QUALITY SAMPLING SUMMARY SAMPLE DATE NO./ID SAMPLER COMMENTS FIGURE A.3.4 Groundwater Quality Sampling Summary '2V030768\CO7ESF'6 DWC, GROUNDWATER SAMPLING FIELD DATA SHEET PROJECT NAME ______JOB NUMBER ______ WELL NUMBER ______FIELD TEAM ______ FIELD CONDITIONS FIELD MEASUREMENT/ SERIAL/ID CALIBRATION COLLECTION EQUIP, MAKE/MODEL NO. COMMENTS pH METER CONDUCTIVITY METER THERMOMETER WATER LEVEL INDICATOR _____ BAILER/PUMP OVA/HNU DECONTAMINATION ______ PURGE INFORMATION OVA/HNU HEADSPACE DATE ______START TIME ______END TIME _ _ _ _ INITIAL DEPTH TO WATER _____WELL DEPTH _____ ST. WELLBORE VOL. FINAL DEPTH TO WATER-____TOTAL VOL. PURGED ___DISCHARGE.. RATE~ METHOD ______PUMP DEPTH .______ VOLUME PURGED TEMPQ'C) pH CONDUCT(UMHOS) APPEARANCE PURGE WATER DISPOSAL______ FIGURE A.3.5 Groundwater Field Data Sheet i. \CV030768\C0768r1 7 OWG *SAMPLING INFORMATION ______END TIME _ __ a DATE ______START TIME WME THOD INITIAL DEPTH TO WATER ______DEPTH TO WATER AFTER SAMPLING __ FIELD MEASUREMENTS REPLICATE NO. TEMP pH CONDUCTIVITY APPEARANCE/COMMENTS 1. 2. 3. ______ 4, . ______ SHIPPING INFORMATION SHIPPING SAMPLE NO/ID ANALYSIS LABORATORY CARRIER DATE AND NO, COMMENTS AND EXCEPTIOlNS TO SAP/QAPP K-~-r .- .------*. - LV 9.- <2~~~7 T -- ~ 4-~~_------~j------ A _ _~~~~ RCRArepticates shou~~cl Ice measured foown c pe-le------FIUEt,75GoudatrFel2atihet(cn. sit. MaOnageen PIAn-FSP Bdson AlFrceBs organic vapor released from the groundwater in the well. The depth to water will be measured with an electric water-level indicator. Water-level measurements will be taken from the top of the PVC casing at the surveyed measuring point to the nearest one-hundredth foot. Water-level measurements taken prior to purging will be documented on the Groundwater Field Data Sheet shown in Figures A.3.5 The water-level indicator will be decontaminated between each well as indicated in Section 8.0. Decontamination Procedures. 3.1.6.4 Well Purging The goal of groundwater sampling is to collect samples that are representative of the water present in the water-bearing zone. To meet this goal, each well will be purged until the well contains fresh water from the formation. Wells being sampled for product shall not be purged prior to sampling. Prior to purging, the depth to groundwater will be measured and recorded to determine the volume of water in the well bore. Whenever possible, wells will be purged a minimum of three well bore volumes prior to sampling or until the field parameters stabilize, whichever is greater. The wells will be purged with a peristaltic, centrifugal, or submersible pump or bailer. The suction line or submersible pump intake will be placed near the top of the well screen so that fresh formation water will move through the screen and up to the sampling point. Purged water will be managed as described in Section 7.0. Any purge water that is drummed will become the property of Eielson AFB. Eielson AFB will be responsible for proper handling and disposal. If the well yield is low enough to make purging three well bore volumes impractical, the well will be purged as much as possible and a sample will be collected after the well has recovered. Well purging details will be recorded on the Groundwater Sampling Field Data Sheet. A.3.220 Sit. Mnagme~nt Pan-FSP Eedvon A# Fewe Sa"e 3.1.6.5 Field Parameters A disposable plastic cup will be filled from the pump discharge after each well bore volume during purging. These samples will be measured immediately in the field for temperature, specific conductance, and pH, and possibly dissolved axygen and Eh. Results will be documented in the Groundwater Sampling Field Data Sheet. The probes used to take these measurements will be rinsed with distilled water prior to each measurement. Each probe will be field-calibrated or checked against standards according to the manufacturer's specifications on a daily basis. Monitoring probes will not be placed in the sample containers to be used for laboratory analysis. After all laboratory samples are collected, a final field sample will be collected in a plastic cup, and field parameters will be measured and again documented in the Groundwater Sampling Field Data Sheet. If the final check of field parameters is not within 10 percent of the last measurement taken before sample collection, then the sample will be flagged in the field notebook to indicate that discrepancy. 3.1.6.6 Sample Collection Sampling is best done with a bladder pump that does not strip volatiles or with a hand-operated bailer. When a pump is used for sample collection, its discharge rate should be controlled to avoid excessive drawdown, which may result in nonrepresentative samples due to changes in groundwater flow. Bucket-type bailers are tall, narrow buckets equipped with a check valve on the bottom. This valve allows water to enter from the bottom as the bailer is lowered, then prevents its release as the bailer is raised. The bailer is particularly useful when samples must be recovered from depths greater than the capability of suction-lift pumps, when volatile stripping is of concern, or when well casing diameters are too narrow to accept submersible pumps. A.3.23 Site Manageet PtanFSP Bamson Air Forc Oase These procedures shall be followed for using a bailer: * Using a clean electronic level indicator, determine the water level in the well, then calculate the fluid volume in the casing. * Purge well of three volumes or until physical parameters stabilize, whichever is greater. The exception to this is when the well can be bailed dry due to poor recovery. In that case, bail the well dry at least twice before sampling. * Whenever possible, wells expected to be least contaminated will be sampled first, followed by wells with increasing levels of contamination. * Wells will be sampled using disposable polyethylene bailers and nylon or monofilament line (a new line will be used at each well). It is a good idea to secure the loose end of the line to the well casing so that the bailer will not be accidently lost down the well. * Lower precleaned bailer slowly until it contacts water surface. Allow bailer to sink and fill with the minimum of surface disturbance. Remove the first bailer and discard (properly dispose of) in order to rinse the bailer with well water. Repeat as often as necessary to collect adequate sample volume. • Tip bailer to allow slow discharge from top to flow gently down the side of the sample bottles with a minimum of entry turbulence. Collect samples in the following order: volatile organics, semnivolatiles, other organics, inorganics, other parameters. Cap each bottle after it is filled. * Preserve the sample if necessary in accordance with established guidelines. * Check that the teflon liner is present in the cap if required. Secure the cap tightly. Label the sample container with the appropriate tag. Record the sample in the field log book. A.3.240 Ske Managenmw~ PfanFSP BEfscn Air Forc B~as *Place the labeled sample in a cooler maintained at tern- peratures not to exceed 4 0C throughout the sampling and transportation period. This procedure shall be followed for sampling for floating product using a bailer: * Do not purge well prior to sampling floating product. * Use a clear polyethylene bailer with a bottom check valve. * Lower precleaned bailer slowly until it contacts water surface. Allow bailer to sink and fill with the minimum of surface disturbance. Remove bailer from well. * Note the water/product interface in the clean bailer. * Open bottom check valve to water to escape bailer, stop when product is at bottom valve. • Drain product into appropriate sampling containers. 3.1.7 Drum Sampling Since some of the source areas at Eielson AFB may involve drum burial sites or staging areas, drums with unknown containerized liquids may be encountered and need to be sampled. Prior to sampling, drums should be set upright and level in a staging area to allow easy access. Drums that are in good condition, full, sealed, and labeled as to contents probably do not need to be sampled, but that information needs to be documented in the field log. Any standing water or other material should be removed from the container top so the representative nature of the sample is not compromised when the container is opened, and to avoid the possibility of encountering a water-reactive substance. Drums must be opened with the proper techniques, tools, and safety equipment. Samplers should stand upwind from the drum and wear appropriate eye, skin, and respiratory protection. There is a potential for vapor exposure, skin exposure due to A.3.25 Site Manegernet Plen-FSP Eateon Air Foce Base splash or spraying, or even explosion resulting from sparks produced by friction of the tools against the drum. Drums that 0 are bulging and obviously under pressure shall be opened only by experienced persons and, if possible, with remote equipment. Since the contents of some drums may be under pressure but do not appear to be bulging, the bung should be turned very slowly. If any hissing is heard, the person opening the drum will back off and wait for the hissing to stop. A common method of opening drums is with a universal bung wrench. These wrenches have fittings made to remove nearly all commonly encountered bungs. They are usually constructed of cast iron, brass, or a bronze-beryllium, nonsparking alloy formulated to reduce the likelihood of sparks. A "nonsparking" wrench only prevents a spark caused by wrench-to-bung friction; it cannot prevent sparking between the threads on the drum and the bung. Containerized liquid sampling will be done with a glass tube com- monly called a "drum thief" or another commercially available drum sampler. Glass tubes are also convenient to use when sampling fluid from old transformers. The glass tubes are normally 122 cm in length and 6 to 16 mm inside diameter. Larger diameter tubes may be used for more viscous fluids. The tubing is broken up and discarded in the container after the sample has been collected, eliminating difficult cleanup and disposal problems. These procedures shall be followed for using glass tubes: *Remove cover from sample container opening. *Insert glass tubing almost to the bottom of the container. Try to keep at least 30 cm of tubing above the top of the container. *Allow the waste in the drum to reach its natural level in the tube. *Cap the top of the tube with a safety-gloved thumb or a rubber stopper. A.3.260 Sit Monygsnnt PtN-FSP Edien Ak Fen Ome *Carefully remove the capped tube from the drum and insert the uncapped end in the sample container. *Release the thumb or stopper on the tube and allow fluid to flow into the sample container. Repeat the steps if more volume is needed to fill the container to approximately 90 percent of its capacity. *Remove the tube from the sample container and replace the tube in the drum. *Check that the teflon liner is present in the cap of the sample container, if required. Secure the cap tightly. Label the sample container with the appropriate tag. Record the sample in the field log book, along with a complete description of the drum. *Place the labeled sample in a cooler maintained at temperatures not to exceed 400 throughout the sampling and transportation period. Preservatives are usually not added to drum samples because of their assumed high concentrations of components and consequent lack of microbial action. In fact, nothing should be added to the sample until compatibility testing has been done. * Break the glass sampling tube so that all parts of it are discarded inside the drum. (in some instances, disposal of the tube in the drum may interfere with eventual disposal plans. In this case, alternative sampling methods should be used.) * Replace the bung or place plastic over the drums. * Decontaminate equipment before and after use. Keep equipment off contaminated surfaces to prevent cross contamination of the samples. Place equipment on disposable polyethylene plastic sheeting. 3.2 SAMPLE CONTAINERS, PRESERVATION, AND HOLDING TIMES Sample container, preservative, and holding time requirements are discussed in the QAPP, Appendix B. Holding time starts at the time of sample collection in the field. A.3.27 Site Management Plan-FSP EFiAron Air Forc Bee All samples will be maintained at a sample temperature of 4 0C or less. Water samples for dissolved metals analysis will be filtered through 0.45 micron filter paper immediately upon arrival in a close support laboratory using a pressure filtration device. Immediately after filtration, the metal samples will be preserved by acidifying with nitric acid. Samples for other analytes will be preserved in the field as required by the standard methods. 3.3 SAMPLE LABELS Sample labels (Figure A.3.6) must be completed properly to pre- vent misidentification of samples. Labels will be marked with indelible ink pens and firmly affixed to the sample containers. The sample identification code (sample ID) is unique to a particular sample and has the following format: (source area #)-(sample type and station #)-(lower depth or date) Example: 1OSB14-05.0 would be a soil sample collected from Source Area 10 from Soil Boring No. 14, where the bottom of the drive was at a depth of 5.0 feet. where: Sample type and station number = a 2-letter and 2-digit code for the specific sample location. Designators used for different sample types include: SE =Sediment SW =Surface Water SB =Soil Boring MW = Monitor Well TP =Test Pit SL =Surface Location not associated with a boring, monitor well, or test pit PZ =Piezometer WP =Well Point SG =Soil Gas Probe A.3.28 Site Manag~ene PfanFSP Eduon Air Fa mehe Notes: The same number would be given to a monitor well or piezomneter that went into a soil boring, just the letter designation would change. Depth = in tenths of a foot, from 00.0 to 999.9 feet. For a split spoon drive sample, give depth at bottom of drive: if sample is taken from 4.5 to 6 feet, use 6.0 feet. For monitor wells, piezometers, and well points, no sample depths will be given. The sample identification code should also be written with indelible ink on the cap of the sample bottle in case the sample label is lost or destroyed. See Figure A.3.7 for an example of a chain-of-custody form. 3.4 SAMPLE DOCUMENTATION 3.4.1 Sampling Location Where appropriate, sampling locations will be marked in the field with wooden stakes, allowing approximately 30 inches of each stake to remain visible above ground. The top portion of the stake will be painted orange and labeled for identification. If the exact location cannot be marked (e.g., a sediment sample in the middle of a creek), then stakes will be placed as close as possible to the location with the distance and direction to the sample marked on the stake and in the field notebook. Sample numbers can be painted directly on drums. The distance to the sample location will be measured from at least two permanent structures (buildings, power poles, survey markers, etc.) to the nearest foot with a measuring tape and recorded in the field log and on a field map. 3.4.2 Field Notebooks Bound field notebooks will be issued to the sample manager to be maintained as a permanent record of daily events, observations, and measurements, including instrument calibration. Entries will be made in sufficient detail to allow reconstruction of site activities without reliance on memory. The language must be descriptive, objective, factual, and free of A.3.29 Analysis Sampler's Signature: FIGURE A.3.6. Example of Typical Sample Identification Label Site Manogement Plan, Eijeson Air Force Bose Q{HWILL QUALIYAN'ALYTICS CHAIN OF CUSTODY RECORD ______PROJECTNUMBER PROJECTNAMIE CLIENTADDRESS MND PHONE NUMBER FORLAB USE ONLY I ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~LATI, 0 REQUESTD COMPDATEPING REUIREME TS A II ACK VERIFIED SW I~~~~A SINKA NPOS KRCA OTHER N IUI-e C C Cl I SOT AT UME A SAMIKE DESCRITOHS , 'NOS4 G O .0 ATE TI PASF1 L (I 2 CH RACTERS) I ' REMARKS I ~~~~~~I I ,KEIL I I ______P_ _ SMEDBY nDE DATE/TME RELINQUISHED BY DATE/TIME R4& MEAEV By W MR BILL'~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~EIL REEE YQT/MREELNQISEKBSDTETIEDO C EC SAMPU- " D This FORM IS65% of ORIGINAL SIZE. FIGURE A.3.7. Chain-of-Custody Record Form0 Site Management Plan, Eietson Air Force Base Met Managwinnt PfanFSP Eduon Alt Forc Be* personal feelings. Pertinent data recorded on field worksheets will be transcribed by the sampling team leader into the field notebook, signed, and dated. Each notebook will contain the following information on its cover: * person or team to whom the book is assigned • book number * project name * start date * end date. This information will either be written on the notebook cover with a permanent marker or on an affixed, weatherproof label. Entries into the notebook will contain all the information necessary to recreate the sampling event, including all field observations and all information that tracks the chain of custody. At the beginning of each daily entry, the date, start time, weather, and names of all field personnel present will be entered. Names of visitors to the site, all field sampling team personnel, and the purpose of each visit will be recorded in the field notebook. Each page of the notebook will be signed and dated by all individuals making entries on that page. Sample information recorded in the log book shall include: * sample date and time * field conditions affecting collection, such as weather, wind, and ambient air temperatures * location (distance measurements including sample depth) * matrix (water, soil, sediment, oil, etc.) * unique sample ID * method of collection, including well development and purging techniques and equipment, groundwater level prior to sampling A.3.31 SMe Manag~aw' PFan-FSP Edebon Air Fone Bite * field measurements, i.e., pH, conductivity, temperature, HNu readings, flammability, explosiveness * number and type of sample containers and tests requested * preservatives * field observations (color, odor, unusual conditions, etc.) * collector's name *references to photographs and field maps. Additional readings, weather conditions, and field modifications or decisions will also be recorded. Photographs with the time, date, location, and task description will also be noted in the log book. The log book will be written in waterproof ink unless Alaskan weather (wet or extreme cold) conditions dictate otherwise. No erasures will be allowed. If an incorrect entry is made, the information will be crossed out with a single strike mark and the correction will be initialed and dated. 3.4.3 Photographs Photographs of the location with respect to surrounding area and relative to objects used to locate the site will be taken. The picture number, roll number, name of photographer, date, and time will be logged in the field notebook to identify which sampling site is depicted in the photograph. A general description of the subject and direction faced will also be recorded. The film roll number will be identified by taking a photograph of an informational sign on the first roll number written on it so as to identify the pictures contained on the roll. A date-back camera that displays the date on the photograph will be used for this project. A.3.32 Sit. Manage~Me PfanFSP Seken Air Force Base . ~3.5 SAMPLE CUSTODY All samples will be collected under chain-of-custody procedures. Standard paperwork used for sample tracking and records include: * chain-of-custody forms * custody seals * field log books * field worksheets * surface water sampling forms * groundwater sampling forms * sample shipment receipt and air bills * laboratory log book. Custody of a sample is defined by the following criteria: • the sample is in a person's possession or view after being in possession * the sample was in a person's possession and was locked up or transferred to a designated secure area by that * ~~~~~~~~person. Each time the sample bottles change hands, both the sender and the receiver will sign and date the chain-of-custody form and specify what has changed hands. When a sample shipment is sent to the laboratory, the top signature copy is enclosed in plastic with sample documentation and secured to the inside of the cooler lid. The second copy of the chain-of-custody form will be retained in the project files. A chain-of-custody record will be completed for each shipping container. Chain-of-custody procedures for the laboratory are found in the QAPP, Section 6.0. A copy of the sample chain-of-custody form used by the field team during collection of environmental samples is shown on Figure A.3.8. A.3.33 Site Managemnt Pfan-FSP BEson Air F SoreBs The following information is included on the chain-of-custody form: * sample number * signature of sampler * date and time of collection *place of collection * type of sample * number and type of container * inclusive dates of possession * signature of receiver. 3.5.1 Directions for Completing Chain-of-Custody Form To assure custody of samples during transport and shipping, each sample being shipped is recorded on a chain-of-custody form. Following are step-by-step instructions for completing the form. 1. Project Number. Complete project number, including region, point, and function, if applicable. 2. Project Name. Print the name of the project. 3. Laboratory. Print the name of the laboratory to which the samples are being sent in the remarks section at the bottom of the form. 4. Station Number. Print the station code. 5. Date. Print the date of sample collection. (MM/DD/YY) 6. Time. Print in military time that the sample was taken. 7. Composite/Grab. Check the correct column to indicate the sample type. 8. Sample Descriptions. Print the sample identification code. 9. Number of Containers. Print the number of containers collected. A.3.34 site NMONanaan PNJFSP Beket Al, Fac Base 10. Analyses. Print the analyses requested and indicate by an "X" in the boxes below which sample should be submitted for each analysis. 11. Container Type and Preservative. Print container type and preservative in the remarks column on the right side of the form for each sample. 12. Sampled By and Title (Signature). The sample collector should sign and date this space. 13. Relinquished By (Signature). The person who relinquished the samples should sign and date this space. 14. Received By (Signature). If the samples are being shipped by commercial carrier, such as Federal Express, the box is left blank for the receiving laboratory to sign. If the samples are being received by a courier or the analytical laboratory, then the person receiving the samples should sign his or her name. 15. Sample Shipped Via. Check only the appropriate box. If another method of shipment was used, note this in the REMARKS section at the bottom of the form. 16. Air Bus Bill Number. If shipped by air or bus, circle the appropriate term, AIR or BUS, and fill in the shipping bill number. 3.6 SAMPLE HANDLING, PACKING, AND SHIPPING Sample handling, packing, and shipping are important to maintaining sample quality. Sample container requirements are found in the QAPP, Appendix B. The sample container must be of the correct material, otherwise the sample container may absorb some of the sample constituents. At all times the samples must be kept at 4 0C or lower. Care must be taken to assure that water samples do not freeze. Collection of water samples in the winter in Alaska can be tricky since collection takes place in a natural outdoor freezer. Water samples need to be stored in an area or container that maintains the temperature above freezing. Likewise, care must be taken to A.3.35 Site ManogoanaW PManFSP Eensn Air Few. BAa. keep water bottles and vials from direct contact with ice or blue ice during transport. To enable a sample to be shipped safely, special care must be taken when packing to assure that it is not broken or lost in transit and that the ice chest used to ship the samples is properly labeled. The following paragraphs describe the proper way to pack samples and label ice chests for shipment. 3.6.1 Packing Environmental Samples It is anticipated that most project samples will be shipped as environmental samples in small volumes. Environmental samples are samples whose contaminant concentrations are significantly reduced by normal environmental weathering processes such as volatilization to the air, degradation due to exposure to sunlight and microbes, or simply mixing with soil or groundwater. As such, the samples present little shipping hazard in terms of corrosiveness, flammability, and explosiveness. To pack environmental samples, the following procedures shall be followed: * The sample container caps are checked to assure that they are properly tightened. * For samples contained in glass jars, bubble wrap or foam, packing material is placed on the bottom and sides of the ice chest to prevent breakage. * For samples contained in glass jars or polyethylene bottles, the individual sample containers are wrapped with the bubble wrap or foam packing material. Tape the bubble wrap or foam ends so that it does not unravel. This prevents the containers from falling sideways and breaking. * Place the sample containers right side up in the ice chest. *Add additional bubble wrap or foam to prevent the containers from moving. A.3.36 Site Maagmpent Plan-FSP Delsen Air Forc Bwee * Pour vermiculite or equivalent over the containers to mini- mize container movement. * Place ice in double-bagged zip-lock baggies and place bag- gies over the containers to preserve them, or use blue-ice if available. Metals samples and some traditional inorganic parameters do not need to be iced down. * When packing glass containers, place several layers of packing material on top. *Place the appropriate paperwork (i.e., chain-of-custody) into a plastic bag, seal the plastic bag, and tape it to the inside lid of the ice chest with the shipping papers. * Close and lock the chest. Wrap a strong adhesive tape (i.e., fiber tape) around ends of chest to secure it, making sure to cover the spigots at the bottom of the chest and any open space between the lid and the cooler. * Affix the proper shipping labels onto the outside of the chest. Do not obscure any labels on the ice chest. Place * ~~~~~~~~chain-of-custody seals over the lid. 3.6.2 Packing Hazardous Samples Samples of pure products can sometimes be classified as hazard- ous in terms of shipping regulations. Most of these samples have not been affected by environmental dilution and may have been collected directly from drums, fuel tanks, or other containers. Due to their concentration, only small volumes (usually 2 ounces or less) are required for most analyses. Hazardous samples should not be stored or shipped in the same ice cooler as other environmental samples, especially if volatile organics analyses are requested. When transported by means other than a government vehicle, these samples must be packaged, marked, labeled, and shipped according to Department of Transportation (DOT) regulations. Most hazardous samples are classified as flammable liquid or flammable solid shipments and require the following packaging procedure. A.3.37 Shte Manmgawut PfeFSP Eelson Air Faer Base * Place the sample container, properly identified, in a poiy- ethylene bag and seal the bag. * Place the sample in a metal can, cushion it with vermiculite, and secure the can lid tightly with clips or tape. *On the metal can, print or in label form show the laboratory name and address and "Flammable Liquid, n.o.s. UN 1993" or "Flammable Solid, n.o.s. UN 1325." * Place the metal can(s) into the plastic-bag-lined cooler, surround the can(s) with vermiculite, and seal the outer plastic bag. * Documentation accompanying the shipment must be enclosed in a waterproof plastic bag and taped to the underside of the cooler lid. * Secure the cooler lid shut with fiber tape and custody seal tape. * The following DOT labels should be placed on top of the cooler: "Flammable Liquid, n.o.s." or "Flammable Solid, n.o.s." A "Cargo Aircraft Only" label is needed if the net sample quantity is greater than 1 quart (liquid) or 25 pounds (solid). 3.6.3 Sample Shipping Samples will be shipped via Federal Express or DHL by overnight delivery in order to meet laboratory holding times. It is anticipated that daily shipments will need to be made from the field when samples are being collected. For environmental samples, no DOT marking, labeling, or shipping papers are required, nor are there any DOT restrictions on the mode of transportation. For hazardous samples, the following procedures shall be followed: A.3.38 Sit Mam~nagem Ffan-FSP BA~son Alr Forc Bare Complete a carrier-approved airbiti or Shipper's Certification for Restricted Articles providing the following information in the order listed: - 'Flammable Liquid, n.o.s. UN 1993" or "Flammable Solid, n.o.s. UN 1325" - "Limited Quantity" (or "Ltd. Qty.") - Net weight or net volume of total sample material in cooler - "Laboratory Samples" - "Cargo Aircraft Only" * Ship by airlines that carry ONLY cargo, such as Federal Express, etc. * DOT regulations do not apply to transport by government- owned vehicles, including aircraft (similar DOD regulations take precedence). . ~3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL SAMPLES Quality assurance samples for this project will typically be collected on a 1-for-lO ratio, unless noted below. The types and numbers of QA samples that will be collected will be summarized in the QAPPs. The QA samples to be used for Eielson AFB include travel blanks, equipment blanks, bottle lot blanks, and field duplicates. Travel blanks are sample bottles filled with ASTM Type 1I Reagent Water or equivalent organic-free water, transported to the field site, handled like a sample, and returned to the laboratory for analysis. Travel blanks are analyzed for volatile organic compounds only, and are sent at a rate of one per shipment. The travel blank for soils is Type II reagent water or equivalent, as in the case of water samples. Equipment blanks are collected when Type II reagent water is poured into the decontaminated sampling device, or pumped through it (in the case of sampling pumps, transferred to the A.3.39 Site Maag*wnt flAn-FSP Ea'sen Air Ame Bee sample bottle, and then transported to the laboratory for analysis). If the equipment is disposable, then only one 0 equipment blank will be taken for each equipment type. Bottle lot blanks are sample bottles for each bottle lot filled with ASTMV Type 1I Regent Water or equivalent organic-free water and returned to the lab for analysis. Bottle lot blanks need to be collected for each bottle lot and sample parameter. Field duplicates are two samples collected independently at a sampling location during a single act of sampling. Field duplicates are collected for each sample parameter and media type. They will be assigned dummy station codes that will be indistinguishable from other analytical samples so that personnel performing the analyses are not able to determine which samples are duplicates. These dummy station codes will be correlated with the actual station codes in the field notes. 3.8 LABORATORY ANALYSES Laboratory analyses are presented in the QAPP, Appendix B. 3.9 SAMPLE ANALYSES SUMMARY Each OUMVP should have tables summarizing the number and types of samples and analyses anticipated. Headings on the table include: * parameter name * analytical method number and reference * reporting units. Rationales should be given in the OUIMPs as to why the samples are being collected and the specific analyses requested. The analyses must provide the information necessary to achieve the data quality objectives. A.3.400 Sit. NM~ngwnent Pftn-FSP Me~son A# Forc Sue . ~4.0 FIELD MEASUREMENTS As required by the HSP, ambient air quality will be monitored for organic vapors using either a flame or photolonization detector during field activities such as drilling, trenching, and water sam- pling. Explosivity and oxygen meters are also required by the HSP, and their operation is discussed in that document. The organic vapor analyzers can also be used to field screen soil samples. During monitor well purging and sampling, pH, temperature, and specific conductance will be measured. Dissolved oxygen and pH may also be measured. Instruments will be operated according to the operation manuals provided by the manufacturers. A backup unit of each instrument will be available in the field in case one unit fails. The following paragraphs present a summary of the calibration, maintenance, and decontamination procedures for the instruments that will be used to measure the field parameters. 4.1 PARAMETERS The parameters to be measured in the field consist of pH, temperature, and specific conductance. Specific brands and models of equipment to be used will be identified in the field log book. pH and/or dissolved oxygen may also be measured. The calibration for these will be covered in the OUMP when these parameters need to be measured. 4.2 EQUIPMENT CALIBRATION Quality control procedures for field instruments will be limited to checking the reproducibility of measurements to within 10 percent by taking multiple readings and periodic instrument calibration. If the variability among multiple readings at a single site with any instrument is greater than 10 percent, the instrument will be recalibrated if appropriate, and the measurement will be repeated. If variability remains unacceptably high and the instrument fails to calibrate properly, the backup instrument will be calibrated and used. The field manager will be notified when a piece of equipment fails so that additional backup units can be sent to the field. A.4.1 Sit. Maagmoet Plan-FSP Edson Air Fme Ruse Records of all calibrations are kept in the field notebook. 4.2.1 H-Nu Meter The HNu is a photolonization detector used to measure the pres- ence and relative level of total volatile organic vapors. At Eielson AFB, it will be calibrated at the beginning of each sampling day. If the HNu is being used to measure total organic vapors in the heated head-space of a soil sample, frequent calibration is recommended due to increased temperatures and soil moisture. The HNu is calibrated daily with isobutylene relative to what would be expected if the calibrant had been benzene. An organic vapor meter (OVM) may be used in the place of an HNu. 4.2.2 pH Meter The pH meter is used to measure the hydrogen ion concentration in aqueous solutions. Calibration of the pH meter will be done on a daily basis as follows or as per manufacturers instructions: 1. Rinse electrode in distilled water and blot dry. 2. Determine solution temperature and set temperature compensator to the proper reading. 3. Place electrode in a commercial buffer solution with a pH of approximately 4 (expected lower range) and adjust calibration knob until readout displays the proper pH value. 4. Remove probe from solution, rinse with distilled water, and blot dry. 5. Place the probe in a second commercial buffer solution with a pH of 7 (expected upper range) and adjust slope control until the meter reads the pH value of the buffer solution. 6. Remove probe from solution, rinse with distilled water, and blot dry. 7. If the measured value varies from the expected value by greater than 0.2 pH units, recalibrate the instrument with fresh aliquots of buffer solution. lIfthe discrepancy persists, A.4.20 Sfte Maage~Na PkanFSP BSaon"Ak Fome Base begin troubleshooting the instrument as prescribed in the operating instructions. 4.2.3 Specific Conductance Meter The specific conductance meter is used to measure the electrical conductance of aqueous solutions. The specific conductance of a solution provides an indirect estimate of total dissolved solids and can be useful in determining the extent of a contaminant plume in the groundwater. Most units require that the instrument probe be soaked in distilled water at least an hour before use. Specific conductance is usually recorded relative to 250 C. Some meters automatically convert the conductivity reading to what it would be at 250C. Other units need to have reported conductivity calculated from the measured reading using a cell constant. All conductivity units are calibrated using salt standards of known concentration. Calibration should be done at least once each day. 4.2.4 Thermometer or Temperature Probe Field ambient temperature measurements will be made using a mercury thermometer or temperature probe. No calibration is required for the mercury thermometer. If a temperature probe is used, it will be calibrated according to the instructions provided by the manufacturer with the specific meter or against the mercury thermometer. If the temperature probe is used for indication of consistent temperature only, then no calibration is necessary. 4.3 EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE Field measurement equipment will be maintained according to the manufacturer's recommended procedures provided in the operations manual for each instrument. Common repair tools and routine replacement parts such as batteries, probes, and sensors will be available to the field crew. At least one person will be trained and assigned to make sure all equipment is functioning properly in the field. Any malfunctioning equipment that requires more than minor field repair will be taken out of service immediately and conspicuously tagged. The field manager will be notified so repairs can be scheduled through the manufacturer. A.4.3 Sit. Mamgwnawn Plan-FSP E~son Air Fame Ba. 4.4 DECONTAMINATION Field measurement equipment will be kept as clean as possible to assure accurate performance and reduce cross-contamination. Sampling probes that are immersed in sample media will be rinsed and stored in distilled water during operating hours. The probes will be cleaned daily and stored overnight according to the manufacturer's recommended procedures. A.4.4~ sit. MangMmitM PfanFSP NEskn Air Fame Baa . ~5.0 FIELD QA/QC PROGRAM Quality assurance (QA) is discussed in Section 4.0 of the QAPP in terms of completeness, comparability, representativeness, accuracy, and precision. Sections 4 and 5 of the QAPP addresses general descriptions of the methods to be used to provide quality control (QC) checks on the field program. This section of the FSP discusses QC samples for groundwater, soils, surface water, and sediment. 5.1 CONTROL PARAMETERS Quality control (QC) samples will be collected for all sample media. Types of QC samples include duplicate samples, equipment blanks, container blanks, and travel blanks. Container requirements and QC sampling requirements for specific analyses are presented in Section 5.1 of the QAPP. Both QC and field sampling activities will be documented in field log books in which descriptions of the sampling procedures, sample materials, and sampling conditions are recorded; on the chain-of-custody record forms, which document the physical transfer of samples and requested analyses; on labels, which show time, date, and location of sampling, the analytical parameters, and the sample preservation techniques. 5.1.1 Duplicate Samples Additional volume is collected on samples at a frequency of 1 in 20 (with a minimum of one duplicate for each sample parameter for each media type per day). The duplicates will be blinded and sent to the labs for field precision measurements. 5.1.2 Container Blanks Bottle lot blanks are samples to check possible cross contamina- tion from the sample containers. One sample container of each bottle lot wilt be filled with ultra-pure, organic-free water and submitted as a blind sample to the laboratory. A.5.1 Site Magemenwt PfN&FSP Fiason Air Forc Bass 5.1.3 Equipment Blanks Rinseates are samples collected to document the effectiveness of decontamination procedures and to verify that contamination is not introduced into wells by various equipment. Rinseate samples are collected from split spoons, samplers, corers, and other nondedicated sampling equipment. The purposes of these samples and analyses are to document the effectiveness of decontamination procedures and to verify that no cross contamination of the borehole or sample has occurred. If surface water samples are collected directly into the sample bottles, no equipment blank will be necessary. Rinseate samples should be obtained from the appropriate item or pieces of equipment immediately after decontamination and prior to the next sampling activity or insertion into the well or hole. Frequency for equipment blank collection will be based on the number of samples collected each day. Equipment blanks will be collected at a frequency of 5 percent or once per day when 10 or more samples are collected per day. When less than 10 samples are collected per day, this batch of samples will be submitted with the samples and equipment blank collected on the following day. Use only ultra-pure, organic-free water for the samples. Collect the rinseate sample by passing the water over and through the equipment. Collect the water directly into the sample containers. 5.1.4 Travel Blanks Travel blanks will accompany each shipment to the laboratory that contains two or more volatile organic samples for all sample media an a daily basis. The purpose of travel blanks is to detect contamination that may be transferred from one closed sample container to another, or from the environment into the closed sample container. The contaminants of concern are volatile organics; other contaminants are much less likely to exhibit this degree of mobility. 5.2 CONTROL LIMITS Duplicate measurements of field parameters will be considered suspect if they differ by more than 20 percent. A. 5.2 Site ManagsWni PfanFSP Edeson Air Fome Bseo . ~6.0 SITE MANAGEMENT 6.1 FIELD PROGRAM LOGISTICS The subcontractor will be responsible for acquisition and transportation of all equipment needed on this project. USAF equipment or transport services will only be used when circumstances are in the best interest of the USAF. 6.2 SITE ACCESS Access to proposed work areas will be coordinated by the Eielson AFB point-of-contact and Battelle EMO's project manager. This work may include items such as: * identification badges for field personnel * vehicle passes and entry permits * utility locates and digging permits * keys to locks on existing monitor wells. It is anticipated that base personnel will be available to assist in problem resolution and minimizing field down time. . ~6.3 SITE AND EQUIPMENT SECURITY Base personnel will be requested to provide heated storage space for contractor equipment and for contractor equipment decontamination. 6.4 BASE SUPPORT Prior to commencement of sampling activities, Eielson AFB personnel will be notified to coordinate scheduling, locate underground utilities, obtain any necessary permits, and provide necessary staging and parking areas. It is anticipated that the Eielson AFB point-of-contact will also provide: A.6.1 Sit. Manegrmnrt PfanFSP EWaon Airom Bauc * accumulation points for well development fluids * existing engineering plans, drawings, diagrams, and aerial photographs related to this site investigation * identification badges, vehicle passes, and entry permits as needed *a dedicated staging area for storing equipment * a potable water supply * an area for decontamination of sampling equipment * temporary office space and telephone * keys to locks on existing monitoring wells * temporary construction barriers and parking and traffic controls at the sites, if needed * written authorization for private property access * fifty-five-gallon drums in new condition or steam cleaned 0 for containment of soil or purge water. A.6.20 Site Managemen Plan-FSP Ba#onA,W Forc Bwe . ~7.0 MANAGEMENT OF INVESTIGATION-DERIVED WASTES 7.1 INTRODUCTION The Rl/FS field investigation activities may generate investigation-derived waste (IDWI. These wastes may include drilling muds, cuttings, and purge water from test pit and well installation; purge water, soil, and other materials from collection of samples; residues (e.g., ash, spent carbon, purge water) from testing of treatment technologies and pump and treat systems; contaminated personal protective equipment (PPE); and decontamination solutions used to clean nondisposable protective clothing and equipment. This IDW must be managed to protect human health and the environment and may require management in accordance with certain of applicable or relevant and appropriate requirements (ARAR). This section outlines general procedures for managing IDW produced during an RI/FS. Investigation-derived waste (IDW) generated during the EBelson AFB RI/FS phase should be managed together with the majority of site wastes, where possible, using the final remedy selected for the Site. Managers always should minimize the generation of IDW as much as possible to reduce the need for special storage or disposal that may generate additional costs and that may have to comply with ARARs apart from those associated with the final remedial action. Eielson AFB will be responsible for managing all hazardous waste generated during RI/FS field activities. Management of IDW is very specific to the type of waste being generated. Therefore, the FSP prepared for each OU investigation should contain specific procedures for handling IDW. For sitewide investigation, specific procedures should be included in addenda to this FSP. 7.2 IDW MANAGEMENT REQUIREMENTS Table A.7.1 outlines options for various types of IDW produced. When selecting a disposal option for IDW, managers are required to choose an option that meets two requirements: (1) protective of human health and the environment, and (2) in compliance with ARARs (to the extent practicable). A.7.1 Site Management Plian-FSP Eafaron Air Force Bas. TABLE A.7.11. lOW 0 ispoeiai Options Type of IDW Generation Process8 Disposal Options Soil Well/test pit installation Return to boring/pit immediately after generation Borehole drilling Spread around boring/pit Soil sampling Send to onsite existing TDU Consolidate in a pit (within the AOC) Send offaite immediately Store for future disposal Sludges/sediment Sludge pit/sediment sampling Return to boring/pit immediately after generation Store for future disposal Send offsite immediately Aqueous liquids Well installation Discharge to surface water (groundwater, surface water, wastewaters) Well purging during pump and Reinject into well treat tests Pour onto ground Groundwater/surface water sampling Send to onsite existing treatment/disposal unit (TDU) Send to POTW Send cffsite immediately Store for future disposal Disposable PPE (clean) Sampling procedures Send to onsite existing TDU Place in onsite industrial dumpster Send offsite to appropriate TDU immediately Store for future disposal Decontamination fluids Decontamination of PPE end Sand to onsite existing TDU equipment Evaporate (for small amounts of organic fluids) Send offsite immediately Store for future disposal Reference: EPA Management of Investigation Derived Waste, Superfund Publication 9345.3-02FS. February 1991. aThe generation processes listed here are provided as examples. IDW may also be produced as a result of activities not listed here. A.7.2S shte MUamgrenmt Ptan-FSP Bgasn Ak For"e BAse Regulations that may be potential ARARs for IDW at Eielson AFB include the Resource Conservation and Recovery Act (RCRA), the Clean Water Act (CWA), the Toxic Substance Control Act (TSCA), and state requirements. In addition, disposal of IDW should comply with the CERCLA Offsite Disposal Policy (OSWER Directive No. 9834.1 1, November 13, 1987). 7.3 GENERAL POLICIES FOR IDW MANAGEMENT In addition to the two requirements outlined in Section 7.2, there are three general policies that apply to the management of IDW: minimization of IDW, management of IDW consistent with the final remedy for the Site, and consideration of community concerns. 7.3.1 IDW Minimization Managers should minimize the amount of IDW that is produced to the degree practicable. Generation of IDW can be minimized through proper planning of all preremedial and remedial activities that may generate IDW, as well as through use of screening information from the site inspection. Techniques such as replacing solvent-based cleaners with aqueous-based cleaners for decontamination of equipment, reuse of equipment (where it can be decontaminated), and careful sampling techniques can help minimize IDW generation. 7.3.2 Consistency in Management Managers should select, where possible, a management option for IDW that is consistent with the final remedy anticipated for the Site. This will avoid the need for separate treatment and/or disposal arrangements such as the construction of a separate storage area that may require compliance with RCRA design and operating requirements. Two examples follow: *A manager knows that wastes will ultimately be sent offsite for treatment, and that conditions allow IDW to be stored until the remedial action begins. It may be appropriate to containerize the IDW and manage it when wastes are generated from the remedial action. 0 ~~~~~~~~~~~~~A.7.3 Sie Managemen PtanFSP Staon A# Fme B"aa *The soil contains wastes that will be stabilized onsite during the remedial action. Sending IDW offsite may not be cost-effective, because offsite disposal would involve testing and transport costs for a relatively small amount of waste. Instead, returning soil IDW to the ground from which it originated may be an appropriate option, provided it is protective until the stabilization occurs and the action meets the other conditions outlined in this fact sheet. 7.3.3 Community Concerns Residents of communities near this CERCLA site, local govern- ments, or Alaska may have concerns about certain disposal methods or long-term disposal of IDW at the site. Site managers should evaluate community concerns in order to avoid public relations problems. For example, if a community is concerned about the direct discharge of IDW water to surface water onsite, site managers may want to consider sending the water to a POTW, if one is located nearby. In some instances, it may be appropriate to prepare fact sheets, include options in other community relations documents, or explain IDW management decisions at public meetings prior to actions. 7.4 SELECTION OF IDW DISPOSAL OPTIONS Options for IDW disposal can be grouped into two categories: 1. Immediate Disposal. This option can include returning lOW to its source or shipping it offsite immediately after generation. 2. Interim Management. This means temporary management of the IDW onsite without returning it to its source or otherwise disposing of it immediately. Interim management may include consolidation and containerization of lOW for temporary storage. Selection of an appropriate disposal option for IDW depends on several factors: * whether the IDW is a known RCRA hazardous waste * the anticipated final remedy for the site, if known (on or offsite) A.7.4 She ManagemntW Plan-FSP Eafson Air Forme ha * whether the management option is protective * requirements of ARARs triggered by actions and wastes at the site * other factors, such as community concerns and objectives. Table A.7.2 summarizes some guidelines for management of IDW taken from EPA Management of Investigation Derived Waste, Superfund Publication 9345.3-O2FS. February 1991. Again, it should be emphasized that disposal of IDW is very source-specific and must be carefully evaluated for each investigation. 0 ~~~~~~~~~~A.7.5 Sit.r Managwnta'v flan-FlP Eduon Air Force Base, ______- TABLE A.7.2. Guidelines for IDW Management Sheet 6of 2 Factor, That May Modify Presumption Final Management Wante Remedy Presumption Prowectivenese ARARs Other IDW is a Known to Soil: Return to Waste medium: RCRA: If IDW is Community known RCRA be sonile source Soil: If returning soil in containerized concerns/ hazardous or immediately after source is not protective (i.e., put in a non- objections (listed or unknown generation; (e.g., because of high land-based unit), may make characteristic final aqueous liquids: concentrations), drum put on clean soil, temporary remedy collect and waste, or put outside the storage or dispose in well; Aqueous liquids: If AOC; the IDRa immediate nonindigenous returning to well is not prohibit returning offsite IDW protective (e.g., because it to the source disposal (decontamination high contaminant without appropriate. fluids, PPE); concentrations are present treatment. store until final or because it will flush the CWA: remedy or aquifer), it may be Discharges to dispose necessary to discharge it surface water immediately (if it or send it to a POTW. may be subject to cannot be Concentrationlnature: BATACT handled as part Presence of high treatment before of final remedy). concentrations and/or disposal; highly toxic constituents discharges to may not allow lOW to be POTWs may be returned to source, subject to Volume: It may not be pretreatment practical to return large requirements volumes of IDW (e.g., before disposal. groundwater) to the TSCA: If IDW source. contains PCBs,0 Worker safety: IDW disposal returned to source may restrictions apply. require covers or other Stat. security so as not to anticiegradation endanger workers requirements: undertaking subsequent May prohibit activities. reinjection of Site access/location: If contaminated site is located in residential water. area or site access restrictions cannot be assured, immediate offsite disposal may be appropriate. ______Known to Drum and store Volume: It may not be State Community be offelte. for future offsite possible to store large requirements may concerns/ disposal. volumes of lOW and prohibit objections ensure protectiveness, hazardous waste may make Site acceseflocation: If storage; immediate site is located in residential immediate offtite off sit. area and/or site access disposal or disposal restrictions are not returning to appropriate. possible, immediate offsite source may be disposal may be appropriate. appropriate. A.7.6~ Sit. Man. gansnt Mfn-FSJP Biegan Air Ferc Base TABLE A.7.. Guidelines for IDW Management Sot7 of 2 Factor. That May Modify Presumption Final Management Waste Remedy Presumption protectiveness ARARs Other RCRA Known to Soil: Return to Waste medium: RCRA: If IDW Community identity of be omilte source Soil: If returning soil to must be concerns/ IDW is or immediately, source is not protective containerized objections unknown unknown Aqueous liquids: (e~g., because of high because returning may make final collect and concentrations), other it to the source is temporary remedy dispose in well, management options (e.g., not protective storage or Nonindigenous containerization) should be and if it is later immediate IDW: store until considered, determined that offsite final remedy or Aqueous liquids: If the lOW is a disposal until identity is returning to welt is not RCRA hazardous appropriate. known. protective (e.g., because waste, the high contaminant restrictions concentrations are present outlined above or because it will flush the may apply. aquifer), it may be necessary to consider other management options. Concentration and volume of waste: It may not be protective to return lOW to site if volumes and concentration are high. Worker safety: Wastes returned to source may require covers or other security so as not to endanger workers. Site access/location may also affect protectiveness. ______Known Drum and store Community onsite. for future offsite concerns/ disposal. objections may make immediate off site disposal appropriate. Reference: EPA Management of Investigation Derived Waste, Superfund Publication 9345.3-O2FS. February 1991. 0 ~~~~~~~~~~A.7.7 MetMane gwnent Pfen-FSP Beson Air ForweBa . ~8.0 DECONTAMINATION PROCEDURES The objectives of decontamination are to prevent the introduction of contamination into samples from sampling equipment or other samples; to prevent contamination from leaving the sampling site by way of sampling equipment, personnel, drilling equipment, or construction materials; and to prevent exposure of field personnel to contaminated materials. This section discusses general procedures to be followed to meet these objectives. 8.1 SOAPS AND DETERGENTS Alconox or Liquinox will be used as the "detergent" for cleaning all equipment and materials. Use of other products must be approved by the field manager. Certain elemental impurities, such as boron and phosphorous, are extremely detrimental even at concentrations in the ppm range. These elements are common ingredients in soaps and detergents, which are often used for the cleaning of personnel equipment and sampling equipment. Therefore, formulations containing these elements must not be used during RI/FS activities at the Eielson AFB site * ~~~~~~byany contractor or agency personnel. 8.2 PERSONNEL Personnel decontamination procedures depend on the level of protection specified for a given activity. The Health and Safety Plan identifies the appropriate level of protection for each type of field work involved in this project. It is anticipated that most of this work will be conducted in Level D protection, which includes disposable coveralls, neoprene boots or disposable shoe covers, outer neoprene gloves, and disposable inner gloves. Decontamination procedures for Level 0 include the following steps: 1. Remove disposable shoe covers (if worn) and place in a secure area for disposal by an appropriate method described in Section 7.0 of this manual. A.8.1 site Man~ageet PRarrFSP BE/son Air Forc Base 2. Wash visible soil and contaminated materials from neoprene boots and outer gloves, using tap water and Alconox or Liquinox. 3. Rinse boots (if rubber) and outer gloves with tap water. 4. Remove outer gloves. 5. Remove disposable overalls (if worn) and place in a secure area for disposal by an appropriate method described in Section 7.0 of this manual. 6. Remove disposable inner gloves. 7. Wash hands and face. In the event that Level C protection is required, respirators will also be required. The decontamination steps are similar to those for Level D: remove boot covers, boots, disposable coveralls, hoods, respirators, and then gloves. 8.3 SAMPLING EQUIPMENT Decontamination procedures are designed to remove trace-level0 contaminants from sampling equipment to prevent cross- contamination of samples. This section describes the decontamination procedures to be used on sampling equipment before it is taken to the project area. Sampling equipment includes, but is not limited to, the following: * split spoons1 * Shelby tubes1 * stainless steel knives, spatulas, and mixing bowls * stainless steel scoops, spoons, and trowels * hand cores and augers * sample thieves * sampling dippers tOnly an Alconox-and-water wash is necessary when using this equipment during drilling to collect soil samples for classification and physical parameters testing. A.B.2~ Met ManegwmntW PRanFSP Saeamy Air Faw. Bus bailers 0 *~~~~~~~jetting equipment. Equipment used to collect samples for chemical analyses will be cleaned before field use and between each sample collection according to the following procedures: 1. Detergent (Alconox or Liquinox) and tap water wash 2. tap water rinse 3. 10 percent acidic (HNO3) solution ris2(only if samples for metals are to be collected) 4. distilled-deionized water rinse2 5. methanol (or hexane) rinse3 6. air dry 3 7. distilled-deionized water rinse3 The purpose of the first step, an detergent-and-water wash, is to remove all visible particulate matter and residual oils and grease. This is followed by a tap water rinse to remove the detergent. An acid rinse, included if metals samples are to be collected, provides a low pH medium for trace metals removal. It is followed by another distilled-deionized water rinse. If the sample is not to be analyzed for metals, this step can be omitted. Next, a high-purity solvent rinse is designated for trace organics removal. Methanol has been chosen because it is an excellent solvent miscible in water and is not a targeted parameter in priority pollutant analysis. After the solvent has been allowed to evaporate, the sampler is rinsed with distilled-deionized water. This rinse removes any traces of the solvent. Distilled water, commonly used for water coolers and available in 5-gallon plastic carboys, is acceptable for sampling equipment 2nyif sample is to be analyzed for metals. 3Eliminate steps 5, 6, and 7 if samples are not to be analyzed for organics. 0 ~~~~~~~~~~A.8.3 sit. NMa&WNgn flN-FSP Befson A# Fo weBa decontamination and will not be used for field and travel blank water. 8.4 DRILLING EQUIPMENT AND WELL CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS Field decontamination of drilling equipment and well construction materials before use and between sampling locations is critical to prevent cross contamination between monitoring well locations. Equipment cleaning will be done in a designated area, which will not be in the vicinity of borehole locations, monitoring wells, or sampling devices. A description of cleaning procedures follows. 8.4.1 Drilling Equipment Drilling equipment will be cleaned with hot pressurized water upon project area entry, between each borehole, and upon project area exit. The drilling equipment to be cleaned will include: *casing * drill rods (if applicable) * drill bits *augers *tamping hammers *back of the drilling rig *couplings *pumps *hoses *water lines and hoses *cables. Equipment that does not become visibly contaminated during drilling may be exempted from cleaning at the discretion of the project hydrogeologist. 8.4.2 Cleaning Monitoring Well Construction Materials, Devel- opment Equipment, and Dedicated Sampling Equipment Before installation into the boreholes, all well construction materials, development equipment, and dedicated sampling equipment (if used) will be cleaned with pressurized hot water. Equipment and materials to be cleaned will include, but not be A. 8.40 Sit Mageentpnw PfanFSP Ed~ean Ak Foe.Bse limited to, well casing and screens, riser pipes, couplings, fittings, dedicated pumps and bailers, suction lines, and access tubes. 8.5 WATER LEVEL INDICATOR Water level indicators will be decontaminated between each well by using distilled water rinse. If visible contamination is present or suspected, use a detergent and tap water wash followed by a tap water rinse, a methanol rinse, and finally a deionized water rinse. 8.6 SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS Submersible pumps used for well development and purging will be decontaminated to remove trace-level contamination from the pump housing, bowls, and discharge line. The pump will be submerged in a clear 55-gallon drum partially filled with a solution of Alconox or Liquinox and water. The exterior of the pump and hose shall be scrubbed with brushes. The pump bowls will be cleaned by activating the pump and allowing the Alconox or Liquinox solution to pass through the pump and discharge line. The pump will then be placed in clean water and flushed by pumping to remove the Alconox or Liquinox solution. A.8.5 BATTELLE PACIFIC NORTHWEST LABORATORIES PNL-MA-567 PROCEDURES Procedure AD-2 Ground-Water Sample Chain-of-Custody Procedure 0 S0 PNL TECHNICAL PROCEDURE . ~AD-2 GROUND-WATER SAMPLE CHAIN-OF-CUSTODY PROCEDURE 1.0 APPLICABILITY To ensure the integrity of ground-water samples from the time of collection through data reporting, the history of the custody of each sample will be documented accord- ing to this procedure. Anyone having custody of samples must comply with the proce- dure described below. This procedure replaces the Chain-of-Custody procedure described in PNL-MA-580, Section 13.3. 2.0 DEFINITIONS * Custody -a sample is considered to be under a person's custody if 1it is in any of the following states: 1) in his physical possession;;2) in his view after he has taken possession; 3) secured by him so that no one can tamper with the sample; or 4) secured by him in an area that is restricted to authorized personnel * RPT - Radiation Protection Technologist * Sample Custodian - the person responsible for sample custody. 3.0 RESPONSIBLE STAFF * Radiation Protection Technologist * Technical Staff Sample Custodian Sample Recipient. 4.0 PROCEDURE 4.1 Prerequisites 4.1.1 Equipment * appropriate sample containers * sample labels * sample seals * Field Record Forms * Chain-of-Custody Forms * Sample Analysis Request Forms. Concurrence Date Approval Date '7+_Lk n0 40A & - 711 './',/ Prepared by ~'Date QAD Concurrence Date Procedure No. Revision No. Effective Date Page . AD-2 1 6/13/89 1 of 9 PNL TECHNICAL PROCEDURE 4.2 Step-by-Step Instructions 4.2.1 Sample Identification and Delivery Position Responsible: RADIATION PROTECTION TECHNOLOGIST OR TECHNICAL STAFF SAMPLECUS~TODIA~N 1. Record in permanent ink all pertinent information about each sample on a Chain-of-Custody Form. An example of the collected form to be used for samples for radionuclide analysis only is shown in Figure 1. of the form An example to be used for samples collected for multiple chemical and radionuclide analyses is shown in Figure 2. NOTE: A Chain-of-Custody Form will accompany all samples from the time collected until they are they are disposed of after analysis and reporting. A single form may be used for as many samples as possible. 2. Fill out and affix sample labels to the sample containers before time of sample or at the collection. Examples of the label to be used are shown in Figure 3. 3. Attach sample seals to the samples immediately Attach on sample collection. the seal in such a way that the sample cannot be opened without breaking the seal. This does not apply to radionuclide samples (Figure 1). 4. Record (inblack ink) all pertinent information about Ground-Water each sample on a Sample Field Record Form. A sample of a Ground-Water Sample Field Record Form is shown in Figure 4. 5. Record all pertinent information about each sample on a Sample-Analysis Request (SAR) Form. An example of the form to be Figure used is shown in 5. This does not apply to radionuclide samples (Figure 1). 6. Deliver the samples to the analytical laboratory along Custody with the Chain-of- and Sample-Analysis Request Forms. Deliver samples only to authorized laboratory personnel. Samples are normally delivered directly to the laboratory collection. on the day of If they cannot be delivered on the day of collection, the Sample Custodian stores them in a locked building. 4.2.2 Transferring Custody of Samples. Position Responsible: SAMPLE CUSTODIAN AND SAMPLE RECIPIENT 1. At the time the custody of the samples is transferred the Sample signs the Chain-of-Custody Custodian Form in the uppermost blank "Relinquished by" space. The signature is witnessed by the Sampe ecpint Procedure No. Revision No. Efective Date fPage AD-2 1 6/13/89 2 of 9 PNL TECHNICAL PROCEDURE ______AIOF CST__MEL__ECOR SHEET..____ a~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~alteffe~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~------ *~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ C. AD-2 1A 6nad1b3S89b 3.,ofm.9 PNL TECHNICAL PROCEDURE CBailefle ~~~CHAIN OF CUSTODY S *O0 - Ii ICh * N, FIdLiW m eWs.m. CW d by: by: ______ie: ______ SPn~cd IN: a I D M FIUR 2. Sapl Chain____of___ Custody_____Form fr~t_ Mlotiaple Chemical and_ R a d i o n u c l i d e A n a_ l__ y _s __es______ Procedure No. 'tS~.oRenvision No. Effective Date Page______ I Itfam 6/13/89n. 0~~~~~~~~~PL EHIA RCDR GROUNDWATER - Sponsor:- Lab: * Sze:Bottle:.pe Date/Time:. Collector: "-3W9 6 0 2-E25-25 GROUNDWATER 741 .741 *G Sponsor: B 237 FARSENI- Lab: B/IL B39 FSELENI Sample Size: 1000 ML- 241 FLEAfl 07/01/88 Bottle: PWC, Date/Time:7fa/5 Collector: AnO~ ri188a8 1-F81* 111-BETA GROUNDWATER .998' GAMMA Sponsor: 121 SR 90 Lab: M/LL 108 TRITIUM Sample Size: 3000 ML 104 U 08/01/88 14 Date/Time: 9/r7/8B Collector:4,.J~. -7- FIGURE 3. Blank Sample Label and Two Examples of Completed Sample Labels. A description of each item on the sample label is contained in the procedure for ground-water sample collection (GC-1). a Procedure No. ReiinN.Efctive Date Page 5o w ~~AD-2 1 6/13/89 5o PNL TECHNICAL PROCEDURE .fBatteiie GROUND-WATER SAMPLE FIELD RECORD TOaL Purge Volume (gal) auaon Purge Flow Rate g.rnn Mydrosta' (TomeOn) ______ Bladder(T... On) ______ SAMPLESCOLLECTED SAMPLENO BOTTLE10 PUMP COLLECTOR TOTALNJQMBER OF aOTTLE S ______ FIELDMEASUREMENTS (N ~~~~~WATERALEVELS- P-~rC.~d No C.,I1I. - . W."e .Pndhetrr ,~o - Sta T.SI...... Rd...b WaT~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~er~CIS 1)O~v FeerGUroRErn4.Un~ Events aGon-WtrSmleFedReodFr Equr~~rrre~~rt rrregularrtresPag Co~~~rtarner)rltgu~~~~~~~~~~~ttrtrtl6 f PNL TECHNICAL PROCEDURE SAMPLEANJALYSIS qUEST PROJECT_GROUT UNITED STATES TES7T!hG DATE______f... BttL.I. PIt 2856 GEORCEIASHINCC.IO lAY CHAINOF ~CLSTODY RICHLANiD.VA99352 EMA 1~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ W~~~~ATER__SOIL__ CTHER__ ANA I 11I 142 CIO 726 741 A21 Mg3 742 H457 126 737 112 181 168 MAKA2 A29 8437 ill MANA3 A22 1439 AxIA4 ASl 1441 OIL S ~~~~121251 259 IL. IL 610 MN 12512 L. 41 IL II. 125 GILT P CA/SCGA/S PCW PlC C DC P CA UA CA PKDCPDC PBC M9Th 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I 1 1 1 P*ESE 8-l2SO H3PIIH0O3 1003 l0i3 HIO3 -- - - - W43 0N03 -- NOTESAA HSI TURBIDITY - ---- 1417 TOTALDISSOLVED SOLIDS----- 1og COLIFOmLBACTERIA ------291 pH (LA))-- --- 588 cnwNrTTVM nn AR,------"a5 ALKALIN ITY-- -- 1442 TOX LOVERDET LIMIT ------Cog TOC -n - His TOTAL CARBN- - - - 728 TpIttp.,shrh__ ------741 FILTD ICP £ETAUSEIHA - A21 ARENIC ----- A21 MSW1Y -- - A22 SELENIUM------A23 TIHAJIAL -- -- Asi LEAD BY &FA 1437 FILTERSAMSIIC -... -- 1438 FILTENEIDERUY ------K3l FILTESOSELEIUM - - -1... --- - 1441 FT'* W RFOhu III'M H441 FILTERSLEAD - - -. I - - - -- 742 (COMBINATIONOF735,14-88 - - - .t-.--- - 1485 NITRA~TE(HUL) ------1485 PUMAERMlEm(.t)------ 739 V0A METHOD8241 ENCD------731 VOAIETHODS8241IENtANCED ------759 VGAByT14C 8249 BIIiCE ------732 ,Rfl_2. _ ------733 A/B/MN827IBO]WNCED ------751 A/BjN 8279 (NHANCED ------N(57 PHENOL A.- --. - - 728 PESTICIDES 8085 - -- 737 HU8BICIDE8159 DOWICED ------A24 THIOUREA8339 - - 727 WNDM835S OWICED (th - -- 734 PESTIClIDEETHOD8314S ------138 Tom6T~n ------182 IPYDRAZINE (LDL) - - 139 KBPt - - - - - 152 ICDa, PCD, KOFs - c7s CYMNIDlE. - - pig r-MfIZ1D''------Fla OXALATE ------P11 C)ROlIlM (VI) - - cri POODLOMIE ------cm8 SULIDEn--G - - Cal ETHASIEQE.GYCOL- -- C87 CITRUSREDl2 -- 112 ALPM -A- iil BETA- ---- 114 URANEIUM ------7 -- 993 DimA ------121 SR-Of -- 188 314H 1 ------g81 1 129 ISPCI/L - - - 28 1 1129 (LD) IPCI/L - -- 998 PU ISOTOPES -- -- - 195 ANl - - FIGURE 5. Sample Analysis Request Form a Procedure No. IRevision No. Effective Date Page W ~~~~~AD-2 16/13/89 7o PNL TECHNICAL PROCEDURE 2. The Sampe ecpin signs Sape the "Received by" space on the same line the Custodian signed. The signature is witnessed by the Sample Cus- todan.Either the S~ample Recip~ient or Sample Custodian records the date and time of the tran-sfer. The Samle Rcipen becomes the Sample Custodi-an on completion of this step in the procedure. NOTE: Sample collection is routinely accomplished by a team of two RPTs. Either one of the team members identified on the "Sample Collected by" space of the Chain-of-Custody at the top Form is a sample custodian and may sign the form when the sample is relinquished. 3. The new Sample Custodian examines the sample containers samples or ensures that the and sample seals are intact, the total number of bottles match the number on the Chain-of-Custody Form, and that the samples with were in contact the ice. If there is an observed problem with the samples, the new Sample Custodian records the condition of the samples section in the remarks of the Chain-of-Custody Form and notifies the Sample Analysis Task Leader of the problem. 4. The person relinquishing custody of the sample to the analytical returns the laboratory top or original copy of the form to the company contact who se name appears on the top line of the form. If the sample was an RPT, collected by the copy of the form is transmitted to the company contact through the RPT supervisor. 4.2.3 Disposal of Samples _ _ Position Responsible: TECHNICAL STAFF When all analyses for a sample have been completed, the laboratory continues the samples in to hold secure storage for 30 days. This allows time for reanalysis if requested. Information on the sample label may also be verified The laboratory during this time. notifies the contact person identified on the Chain-of-Custody Form when the sample holding time is completed. The requirement contact for notification of the person by letter is contained in the contract or letter of instruction laboratory. to the When samples are disposed of by the analytical laboratory: 1. If the contract or letter of instruction for the analysis provision includes a for disposal of the samples, the contact person notifies the laboratory by letter that the samples may be destroyed or holding that an extended period is desired. When the samples are destroyed, a copy of the Chain-of-Custody Form is returned to the contact person by the analytical laboratory. 2. The contact person records the date of receipt of the Chain-of-Custody Form in the Chain-of-possession section of the form. Procedure No. Revision No. Effective Date Page AD-2 1 6/13/89 PNL TECHNICAL PROCEDURE 3. Following completion of the chain of possession, the Chain-of-Custody Form . sincluded in the files of the appropriate project. When samples are disposed of by the Pacific Northwest Laboratory (PNL): 1. If the contract or letter of instruction does not contain provisions for the disposal of samples, samples are picked up at the laboratory by PNL personnel and disposed of in accordance with PNL MA-81. These procedures are under the direction of the Waste Management and Environmental Com- pliance Section, Laboratory Safety. The disposal procedure uses the Onsite Radioactive Shipment Record Form to document sample radioactivity. 2. Record the date samples are relinquished to PNL personnel in the Chain-of- Possession section of the Chain-of-Custody Form. 3. Following completion of the chain of possession, the Chain-of-Custody Form is included in the files of the appropriate project. Procedure No. Revision No. Effective Date Page AD-2 1~~~ 6/13/89 9 of 9 Procedure AD-4 Sediment Sample Chain-Of-Custody 0 0O a7 PNL TECHNICAL PROCEDURE . AD-4 SEDIMENT SAMPLE CHAIN-OF-CUSTODY 1.0 APPLICABILITY This procedure details the methods for establishing the traceability of sediment samples that will undergo hazardous chemical and radionuclide analysis. This process ensures the integrity of the sediment samples from the time of collection through sample disposal. The sequential custody of sediment samples will be documented using this procedure. Each custodian of the samples shall comply with the procedures described below. The applicability of sediment samples requiring this chain- of-custody procedure shall be identified in the appropriate sediment sampling and analysis plans. See also procedure 00-4, Contaminated Sediment Sampling. 2.0 DEFINITIONS Custody - custody of a sample requires control of the sample in one or more of the following manners: 1) physical possession, 2) in his/her view after taking possession, 3) secured by him/her in a manner that prevents tampering of sample, and/or 4) secured by him/her in an area restricted to authorized personnel. * Sample Custodian - responsible person in custody of sample. 3.0 RESPONSIBLE STAFFI * technical staff in charge of sediment sampling • technical staff in charge of analysis * Sample Custodian * Sample Recipient * Company Contact * Project Manager. 4.0 PROCEDURE 4.1 Prerequisites 4.1.1 Equipment * permanent ink markers * appropriate sample containers * sample labels * sample seals * Chain-of-Custody Forms Concurrenc~~~~~e Date Approval Date Prepared by ,.Date QAD Concur ence Date yAN~-'Tht/Lc 5A;4'fi /J27,IJ______Procedure No.' Revision No. Effective Date Page Al 0 I~~~~~~~~~~~of 6 PNL TECHNICAL PROCEDURE * Drill Log Forms * applicable Sampling and Analysis Planli * applicable Health and Safety Plan. 4.1.2 Safety Precautions Sediment samples may pose a hazard to the responsible staff; therefore, the applicable safety precautions outlined in the Health and Safety Plan shall be adhered to. 4.2 Step-by-Step Instructions 4.2.1 Sample Identification and Delivery Position Responsible: TECHNICAL STAFF IN CHARGE OF SEDIMENT SAMPLING 1. Record in permanent ink all pertinent information about each sample on a Chain-of-Custody Form. Multiple samples collected on the same date may be recorded on one Chain-of-Custody Form provided each sample is identified individually on the form. Record the procedure and revision number in the remarks section. (An example of a Chain-of-Custody Form is shown in Figure 1). 2. Record date, time, depth, location, type of sample, sample size, preserva- tion method (ifapplicable), and other pertinent information on the Drill Log. (An example of a Drill Log form is shown in Figure 2.) 3. Fill out and affix sample labels to the sample containers before or at the time of sample collection. Sample label will identify the time, date, depth, location presevation method, constituents to be analyzed for, and name of sample collector. 4. Attach sample seals to the samples immediately on sample collection. Attach the seal in a way that the sample cannot be reached without breaking the seal. 5. Deliver the samples to the analytical laboratory and transfer custody of the samples to authorized laboratory personnel. NOTE: If custody of the sediment samples cannot be transferred to the authorized laboratory personnel on the same day of sample collection, the samples must be stored in a locked and secure building until a transfer can be made. 4.2.2 Transferring Custody of Samples Positions Responsible: SAMPLE CUSTODIAN AND SAMPLE RECIPIENT 1. The SAMPLE CUSTODIAN and the SAMPLE RECIPIENT shall examine the container to ensure the sample seals are intact and the sample containers have not [Procedure No. 'Revision No. [Ef~fective Date Page p AD 4 0OH /o I/~q 2 ofS PNL TECHNICAL PROCEDURE P~iLaorit No ciCHAINh~ei (OF CUSTODY Cornpany Contact Telephone: ______Samples Collected by: ______Datm: ______Tm, Sample Location: _ _ Page No.: ______Ice Chest No.. ______Field Logbook Remarks Method of Shipmnnt. Sample Identification CHAIN OF POSSESSION Relinquished by- Received by Date/Time: Relinquished by Received by Date/Time: Relinquished by. Received by: Date/Tme: Relinquished by: Received bry: Dasej'irne, *c.,3004.3as ('45 FIGURE 1. Chain-of-Custody Form a Procedure No. IRevision No. Effective Date Page W ~~~~AD-4 0 oq4 /ol /a 9i 3 of 6 PNL TECHNICAL PROCEDURE - E~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~S 0~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ 0, 0 C~ ~~ ~~ ~ ~ ~~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~~~ ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~- L-- ------tiveDat i~~~~~~~~~~~~~ 01/ PNL TECHNICAL PROCEDURE been damaged. If any seals have been broken and/or the sample containers are damaged, the SAMPLE RECIPIENT records the condition of the seals and containers in the remarks section of the Chain-of-Custody Form. 2. The SAMPLE CUSTODIAN signs the Chain-of-Custody Form in the uppermost blank "Relinquished by" space. 3. The SAMPLE RECIPIENT signs and records the date and time in the "Received by" space next to the Sample Custodian's signature. The Sample Recipient now becomes the Sample Custodian completing the transfer of sample possession. 4. The SAMPLE CUSTODIAN relinquishing custody of the sample to the analytical laboratory returns the top or original copy of the form to the Company Contact, whose name appears on the top line of the form. 4.2.3 Disposal of Samples Positions Responsible: COMPANY CONTACT. SAMPLE CUSTODIAN. SAMPLE RECIPIENT. AND PROJECT MANAGER Samples are to be maintained for 30 days in secure storage after sample analyses are complete. This allows for re-analysis if requested. The laboratory or responsible technical staff in custody of the samples will notify the contact person identified on the Chain-of-Custody Form when the holding time is complete. * When samples are disposed of by the analytical laboratory: 1. If the contract or letter of instruction includes a provision for disposal of the samples by the analytical laboratory, the COMPANY CONTACT will notify the laboratory that the samples may be destroyed, or that an extended period of storage is required. 2. After destruction of samples, the analytical laboratory returns a copy of the Chain-of-Custody Form to the COMPANY CONTACT. 3. The COMPANY CONTACT records the date of receipt on the Chain-of-Custody Form in the "Received by" section of the form space and indicates the samples were destroyed ending the chain of possession. 4. The Chain-of-Custody Form is then filed in the appropriate project files. When samples are disposed of by the Pacific Northwest Laboratory (PNL): 1. If the contract or letter of instruction does not contain provisions for the disposal of samples, PNL personnel will obtain custody of the samples from the analytical laboratory and will dispose of the samples in accor- dance with PNL-MA-81. Procedure No. Rvso o Effectiv DaePage W ~~AO-4 0 OH'A/OI /~5 of 6 PNL TECHNICAL PROCEDURE 2. After destruction of samples, PNL personnel responsible for sample destruction return a copy of the Chain-of-Custody Form to the COMPANY CONTACT. 3. The COMPANY CONTACT records the data of receipt of the Chain-of-Custody Form in the "Received by" space next to the Sample Custodian's signature and indicates the samples were destroyed ending the chain of possession. 4. The PROJECT MANAGER shall ensure that Chain-of-Custody Form is then filed in the appropriate project files. Procedure No. Revision No. Effective Date Page AO-4 ~~0 oH /OI /S 6 of 6 Procedure GC-1 Ground-Water Sample Collection Procedure PNL TECHNICAL PROCEDURE Gcc- GROUND-WATER SAMPLE COLLECTION PROCEDURE .1.0APPLICABILITY These procedures are intended for use during collection of ground-water samples that will be analyzed for hazardous chemicals and radiological constituents. 2.0 DEFINITIONS N/A 3.0 RESPONSIBLE STAFF * Radiation Protection Technologists (RPTa). .4.0PROCEDURE 4.1 prerequisites 4.1.1 Equipment * copy of the safety plan dated June 16, 1989, Revision 2, "Addendum to all PNL Site Safety Plans Concerning Ground-Water Monitoring Activities Conducted on the Hanford Site" applicable to ground-water sampling * truck-mounted air compressor (equipped with dryer and lubricator) and generator, air hose and power cord * bailer winch * HydroStar pneumatic cylinder * purge hose * extra discharge line for submersible pump a stainless steel sampling manifold and back flow preventer * 2 Teflon bailers * 2 pH and conductivity meters pH 7 and 10/conduct. sol. * 2 digital thermometers Concurrence Date Approval ~t Prepared by D / QAD Couurrenpe -~ aw.t Date Khris B. Olsen / y{c Dorothy tS 'eiart t/p//q/ * Procedure No. Revision No. Effective Date Page GC-I 2 ~~~~~~~08/15/91 1 of 16 PNL TECHNICAL PROCEDURE * 2 steel measuring tapes (300 ft, 500 ft) and 1 E-tape * carpenter's chalk * large plastic bags a engineer's measuring tape * Hanford well Fact Book * NO DUMP well list/appropriate RWPs * stopwatch or watch with second hand * bucket (for measuring flow rate) * distilled water a sealed plastic bags *ice chests with ice *rubber gloves *disposable surgical gloves *towels 4 *extra sample labels *sample seals *manual from Document Control with Procedures AD-2, AD-6; GC-1, GC-2, GC-3; FA-1, FA-2, FA-3; - Manual PNL-MA-567 "Procedures for Ground-Water Investigations." *sample containers with caps and liners (including extras) *catch basin (1/2 of 55 gal plastic drum liner) *box of extra bottles *Well Services Request (WSR) Forms (Figure 1) *rubber boots (can be disposable) *radiation work protection clothes *radiation detection instruments Procedur No Revision No. Effective Date Page GC-l 2 08/15/91 2 of 16 PNL TECHNICAL PROCEDURE WELL SERVICES REQUEST RESOURCE PROTECTION WELL SERVICES COMPLETED BY NOTIFYING ORGANIZATION DESCR2PTIO14,0FAEASON $OR WELL. SEAVICES REQUEST ton3: Abo.~tsn tmio ori. odhcto: I. Y.. C No. Naife..... 3, FORWARD TO: GROUNDWATER WELL. SERVICES SECniON. EKYVIRONMV4TAL ONItSION. W1C COMPLETED BY GROUNDWATER WELL SERVICES SECTION Notncdnon Rfc.v~c 1,y 5..gnanns8s: Aomgn PntonryLws MoinnqNot.,: A~~oc~~ In: 10 M0 I hl~~~~~~~~U: IQ 0 With. SERVICES PERFORMED ______Prntd N mt.Siqntut,O~t.: ~~~oFIUR.c WllSeviesReuet or Procedure No. Revision No. Effective Date Page GC-1 2 08/15/91 3 of 16 to PNL TECHNICAL PROCEDURE * shovel • wire cutters 4 * tool bay (with tools) * miscellaneous as fitting/teflon tape * blue coveralls • safety glasses • hearing protection * first aid kit * waterproof markers and black pens * masking tape * water for washing hands. NOTE: Duplicate equipment may be temporarily stored at an easily accessible location. 4.1.2 General Preparation Read and be familiar with the current safety plan applicable to ground-water sampling. Before going to the field, test the field equipment (pH/conductivity meter, temperature probe). Load the truck in a secure and safe manner with the necessary supplies. Pick up the sample bottles. Check the Fact Book and "NO DUMP" well list to determine the need for an organic vapor monitor and/or a purge water truck. When the sample team arrives at the collection site, park the truck near the well for convenience and safe operation of sampling equipment, but downwind. Refer to the NO DUMP well list for determining if containment of purge water and/or the use of an organic vapor monitor are required. If a well cannot be sampled for any reason, return all sample bottles and paper work to the sample preparation laboratory. Log the well number and the reason for no sample in the "Uncollectible Wells" log book. Fill out a WSR Form and turn it in to the RPT supervisor. (Figure 1.) 4.1.3 Sampling Precautions Do not smoke, drink, or eat during sampling, and avoid handling any objects not necessary for performing sampling procedures. Procedure No. Revision No. Effective Date Page GC-i 2 08/15/91 4 of 16 PNL TECHNICAL PROCEDURE Park downwind of the well being samplied. . Do not sample downwind from sources of volatile organics (e.g., car or generator exhausts, open fuel tanks). These types of equipment could contaminate the sample. if any such sources of contamination are unavoidable, make a note of them on the Field Record Forms (Figure 2). Leave caps on the sample containers until just before filling. Figure 3 illustrates typical sample labels and provides an explanation key. Avoid handling the Teflon bottle cap liners. Do not use any liner that falls out of the cap and onto the ground. wear disposable or rubber gloves when taking samples and when handling containers, especially those with preservative added. If gloves become soiled replace or wash them. Wear safety glasses when filling sample bottles. 4.2 Step-by-Sten Instructions 4.2.1 General Sample Collection Procedure Position Responsible: RAflIATION PROTECTION TECHNOLOGISTS 1. Select the appropriate sampling method by a. determining whether the borehole to be sampled is a well or a piezometer (by comparing diameter). Piezometers are usually 2 in. or less in diameter. b. determining which kind of pump, if any, is in the well (submersible pump, HydroStar pump, or no pump, which requires the use of a bailer). This information is given in the Hanford Well Fact Book. The procedure to follow for each of these types of pump can be found in subsections 4.2.2 through 4.2.4 below. Follow those procedures first, before continuing with step 2 of this general procedure. 2. once the water begins to flow from the outlet, pump the well for the length of time indicated on the Field Record Form, and until pH, temperature, and specific conductivity stabilize (see Procedures FA-1, "Temperature Measurement Procedure;" FA-2, "Calibration of Conductivity Meter and Measurement of Field Conductivity;" and FA-3, "Calibration of pH Meter and Measurement of Field pH"). If no purge volume or purge time is listed on the Field Record Form, pump for 20 minutes or pump for the time required to remove the purge volume listed in the Hanford Well Fact Book. Pump for the shorter time period for this situation. Check for stabilization of the pH, temperature, and specific conductivity before sampling. NOTE: If the well pumps dry while purging, a sample can still be obtained by following these steps: Procedure No. Revision No. Effective Date Page GC-l 2 08/15/91 5 of 16 PNL TECHNICAL PROCEDURE OBaflefle GROUND-WATER SAMPLE FIELD RECORD 0t.1 SAA4K IS COILI CTEO SAMPtE 'JO IOTTLE 30 PUMP COLLECTOR TOTAL 4UIMBER OF 30 rrLES ______ FIELOMEASUREMENTS I WATIR LEV10 ' s rhrf,.,n..,rr I~~~loinT.NO FIELDOUSIBAIIONS rn~NhMrqmrj rnnr N~~mI LaO~flC ~.. .~O~ Octd'JO tttb.. SW'nyf lot Ge,,.. AAPat.On by APT,______ flNL VI 67 GC I 'q O ______ ACSO I tOi~ds FIGURE 2. Field Record Form Procedure No. Revision No. Effective Date Page GC-1 2 08/15/91 6 of 16 o GAcNOAT5 5Ipie St zd: C- Date/T ime:Q 9076 HO007256 GRCU1,EWATER IC? HNQW Sponsor: Lab: /IL. sample Size: S00 Ni. 07/09/91 Bottle: P Date/Time: Cotllector: 9076 iC007206 GRCUNCWATER 7S1 ICmTF HNC3 Sponsor: Lab: lIL. Sample Size: 500 "L. 07/09/91 Bottle0: P Date/Time: Collector: *tt Filter GROUNC-WATEft SAMPLE LABEL KEY The fotLlowing information is printed On the Label by the coqxster program that creates the label from the sampling schedule: 1. WelL Name (e.g., 299-E25-25) or HEIS nwtber. 7. The type of bottLe to be used (e.g., PWC - a pLastic bottle with a white cap). 2. The sponsor code - Labels are created from the Hanford Ground*Water Data Base (HGW6). This field B. Sample Size (e.g., 150 milliliters, is no longer used but still appears on the labels. 1000 milliliters). the constituent 3. The lab code - Labels are created from the hOWDl. 9. The preservative, If used, for This field is no longer used but still appears on being analyzed. the Labels. 10. The Chain-of-Custody nwtber. 4. The analyses to be performed on the samrPle by the List (i.e. anaLytical laboratory. 11. "N" indicates well is a "NO DUBhP" welt purge water mu~st be contained and not allow~ed to go 5. "-Filter"- indicates samrple should be filtered, into the grou'd). 6. The Initial, date for the sampling period. The following information is written on the Label by the field sampling persornel at the time the sample is collected: 12. The collector's initials, time, and date samrpled. FIGURE 3. Typical Sample Label ~Procedure No. Revision No. Effective Date Page GC-1 2 08/15/91 7 of 16 PNL TECHNICAL PROCEDURE a. Turn the pump off. b. Wait for the well to recharge. This recharging period should take about4 15 minutes but may take as long as 30 minutes. c. Turn the pump back on. If you cannot feel air coming out of the pipe or water does not appear after a few minutes, turn the pump off, wait 30 minutes, and repeat the procedure. If water still fails to appear, report the problem on the Field Record Sheet and a WSR Form and discontinue the sampling effort at that well. NOTE: Pumping times (shown on Field Record Farm) are usually based on voiding three bore volumes of water from the well at a pumping rate of 10 gpm. To calculate an adjusted pumping time based on a field measurement of flow rate: a. Divide the size of the container (in gal) by the number of seconds it took to fill. Multiply by 60 to get the new pumping rate (per minute). b. Divide the purge volume given on the Field Record Form by the new pumping rate to determine the adjusted pumping time. 3. Measure the pM, temperature, and specific conductivity of the discharged water at least three times during purging (beginning, middle, and end of the designated purge time), according to the standard procedures for measuring pH and conductivity (Procedures FA-2, 'Calibration of Conductivity Meter and Measurement of Field Conductivity' and FA-3, "Calibration of pH Meter and Measurement of Field pH"). The pH will be considered stable when two consecutive measurements agree within 0.1 pH unit. Temperature will be considered stable when two consecutive measurements agree within l.00C. Conductivity will be considered stable when two consecutive measurements agree within 10% of each other. If pH, temperature, and conductivity do not stabilize within the listed purging time, repeat the measurements. If necessary, repeat a maximum of four times. If the parameters fail to stabilize, collect the sample and note the problem on Field Record Form. NOTE: Four additional pH and conductivity readings may be required to meet RCRA requirements. If they are needed the additional readings will be requested on the Field Record Sheet above the Field Measurement section. These four sequential readings are to bemade after thevH and conductivity have stabilized. Readings are to be taken on different water samples in rapid succession. 4. Enter time, date, and your last name or initials clearly on all sample labels. S. Record information, as it becomes available, on the Field Record Form. The information that must be recorded on the Field Record Form is described in Procedure Afl-2, "Ground-Water Sample Chain-of-custody Procedure." Place Procedure No. Revision No. Efcive Date Page GC-l 2 08/15/91 8 of 16 PNL TECHNICAL PROCEDURE the names of both members of the sampling team on the Field Record and Chain-of-Custody Forms. 6. Fill the appropriate sample containers starting with unfiltered samples first and filtered samples last. 7. All sample bottles with septum tops, which require zero headspace, are filled first. Unscrew the cap from the sample container, being careful not to touch the lip of the bottle or the inside of the Teflon liner. Also avoid touching the mouth of the discharge line. Reduce the flow rate when filling bottles with septum tops to less than 1 liter/minute. Measure the flow rate with a graduated container before sampling. 8. Fill the sample bottle slowly, placing the outlet tube near the inner side of the sample bottle to prevent trapping any air bubbles. Avoid splashing or agitating the water while the bottle is being filled. NOTE: For those bottles requiring zero headepace (i.e., those having a septum top), the bottle should be filled completely so that a meniscus forms over the mouth. Cap the bottle immediately, turn it upside down, tap it a few times and check for air bubbles in the sample. If there is a bubble, fill the bottle further, until a bubble-free sample is obtained. On all other sample containers, fill the sample container to the neck of the bottle. These samples (without septum containers) do not have to be checked for air bubbles. 9. Attach the filter assembly and purge the filter according to directions listed in Procedure GC-2, "In-Line Sample Filtration Procedure." If too much pressure is exerted across the filter, the membrane will rupture, usually causing a popping noise. If this happens, replace the filter and begin the filtering procedure again. 10. Survey the sample container with a radiation detection instrument. If the count is greater than 200 c/rn, record it on the Field Record Form and use Radiation Work Procedure 2400-1. Contact the Environmental Monitoring Supervisor for instructions concerning where the sample is to be taken. Check the statement on the top of the Chain-of-custody (Figure 4) that requires a yes or no response to the 200 c/rn level. If not over 200 c/rn, samples delivered per Chain-of-Custody. 11. Attach the security tape on each sample container immediately after filling. Attach the tape in such a way that the sample cannot be opened without breaking the tape seal. However, do not place the sample seal over the top of the 40-mL VOA vials. Place around the cap and bottle. 12. Place the samples in an insulated container with ice. Be sure the Ice is distributed evenly so that all samples are surrounded and in physical contact with ice. 13. Place all nondedicated sampling equipment (e.g., manifolds) that comes into contact with the well water in a plastic bag until the next use. aProcedure No. Revision No. rEffective Date Page W C~~~C-1 2 08/15/91 9 of 16 PNL TECHNICAL PROCEDURE OBaneiieCofc Comoany Contact ______Telephone. ______ Samples Collected by- __ _ _at______Time:______ 0/Samole No. ______ Ice Chest 'J0o. ______Field Logbookli Page No ______Remnarks- Posil Samcle rOazard Identification.Carraol o:______ Destinatior. _ _rn______r__ __ _W _ycdC___ a___ No. ______ Ground-W ater ______01 ______Other ______Shivping container internal temoerature Shipping container internal temperature when samoles sealednnit ______when opened in laboratory ______ Sample ldentificationI Chain of Possession Reiinclusneo ay: Received by: Date/iTme: Ro#infouisreO oy, Receivedl by: Date'Time. qelinctuisnied 3y: Received by: Date/Time: letinui;Vsed oy: Received by: Date/Time, Disposal Recoro No.. Datetln~tjaas. FIGURE 4. Chain-of-Custody Form Procedure No. Revision No. Effective Date Page GC-1 2 08/15/91 10 of 16 PNL TECHNICAL PROCEDURE 14. complete Field Record Forms (see Procedure AD-2, "Ground-Water Sample Chai-fl-OCustody Procedure"). 15. Place the sample cooler in a secure location while driving. 16. Deliver the sample to the appropriate laboratory for analysis as soon as possible, following Chain-of-Custody Procedures (see Procedure AD-2, "Ground-Water Sample Chain-of-Custody Procedure," and Figure 4), and have the person receiving the sample sign the Chain-of-Custody Form. Only authorized personnel shall receive custody of samples. If a sample cannot be delivered to the laboratory the same day, store the sample in a refrigerator (40C ± 2 0 C) located inside a locked building or within a secured area. If custody of a sample(s) is transferred to another party, follow the strict Chain-of-Custody procedure signing the relinquishment, date, and time to the new sample custodian who must sign as "Received by." (sign in the presence of each other.) NOTE: DO NOT ALLOW SAMPLE BOTTLES TO FREEZE I 4.2.2 Sample Collection Using the Submersible Pump Position Responsible: RADIATION PROTECTION TECHNOLOGIST i. Check electrical connection to be assured the pump is properly grounded to casing. If the pump is not properly grounded complete a WSR Form. Do not operate the pump if it is not properly grounded. 2. Take water-level measurements according to Procedure WL-1, "Water-Level Measurement Procedure," and record the value on the Field Record Form. 3. Check to see that the hose bibb for the submersible pump is open. Place the stainless steel sampling manifold on the hose bibb or pump outlet. Be sure a valve is open to allow water to flow freely. 4. Plug the power cord into one of the 230-V outlets on the generator on the truck and into the outlet at the well head. S. Start the electric generator. 6. Turn the power switch on to begin the pumping process. Do not handle energized power cords. If the pump does not work properly, as indicated by a lack of air flow out the discharge hose or by generator "lug" down, turn the switch off immediately. Wait a few seconds, then turn the switch on and off several times rapidly, finally pausing in the ON position to determine whether the pump has started to function properly. Repeat this several times. If the sample pump still doesn't work, it needs repair. If the breakers or fuses on the generator disengage, an electrical short in the system is indicated and repair is needed. Record problems on the Field Record Form and WSR Form (Figure 1). Procedure No. Revision No. Effective Date Page GC-l 2 08/15/91 11 of 16 PNL TECHNICAL PROCEDURE 7. Once pumping of the well has begun proceed to section 4.2.1 step 2. 4.2.3 Sample Collection Using the HydroStar Pump Position Responsible: RADIATION PROTECTION TECHNOLOGIST 1. Determine the depth to water (see Procedure WL-1, "Water-Level Measurement Procedure") and record it on the Field Record Form. 2. Attach the pneumatic cylinder assembly to the well head assembly in the following manner: a. Insert the support for the pneumatic cylinder into the column support on the well head assembly (Figure 5). When inserting the cylinder support into the column support on the pump assembly, make sure that at least two holes on the dylinder support overlap with two holes on the column support. If fewer than two holes overlap, fill out Problem Identification Report Form. Align the pumping system in the same manner as described above. b. Pull the cylinder rod down until it is fully extended and has stopped. c. Align the eyelet on the top portion of the turnbolt with the clevis pin hole on the lower portion of the cylinder rod. d. Align the hole on the cylinder support with the column support on the well head so that the turnbolt eyelet and clevis pin hole on the cylinder rod are aligned when the piston is fully extended. e. Insert the clevis pin through one of the intersecting pairs of holes on the column support and clip a hitch pin into the holes in the small end of the clevis pin. f. Check the alignment on the turnbolt eyelet with the hole on the cylinder rod. on deep wells located in the 200 Areas, the eyelet should be 1/8 to 1/4 inch below the hole on the cylinder rod. Pull the turnbolt assembly up to align with the hole on the cylinder rod. g. Adjust the alignment by rotating the turnbolt clockwise or counterclockwise. 3. Attach stainless steel manifold to the outlet on the discharge tee of the sampling pump. NOTE: Do not collect samples using the purge hose. 4. Attach the quick-connect on the air supply hose to the unattached end of the control valve on the pneumatic cylinder. The input air pressure should not exceed 120 psi. 5. Turn on the air supply to the control valve. Procedure No. Revision No. Effective Date Page ac-i 2~~~~~- 08/15/91 12 of 16 el~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~~PLTCNIA RCDR Fiat Edge Handle Support Column Support FIGURE S. Well Read Assembly Prcedure No. Revision No. Effective Date P-age 7 7 ~~GC-J. 2 08/13/91 13 of 16 PNL TECHNICAL PROCEDURE 6. To regulate the water-flow rate during sample collection, adjust the throttle control valve (on Hydrostar) to obtain the desired flow rate. 7. Turn on the control valve on the pneumatic cylinder. The piston will begin to operate. 8. Adjust the stroke rate to no more than 60 per minute. (A stroke is defined as one downward and one upward extension.) The stroke rate of the pneumatic cylinder can be adjusted with the control valve located on the top of the pneumatic cylinder. On deep wells, the stroke rate could be significantly less than 60 per minute. 9. Once pumping has begun go to section 4.2.1 step 2. 10. After sampling dismantle the pneumatic pumping assembly by disconnecting the air supply at the pneumatic cylinder and disassembling pneumatic cylinder in reverse order of substeps 2a thrctgh 2g above. 4.2.4 Sample Collection Using a Teflon Bailer Position Responsible: RADlIATION PROTECTION TECHNOLOGIST NOTE: Except where specifically noted, only tritium and nitrate samples should be collected from an unpurged well sampled with a bailer. 1. unclasp the metal bailer from the winch line and replace it with the Teflon bailer. 2. Disengage the winch clutch and slowly lower the bailer into the water. 3. Engage the winch clutch when the bailer strikes the water surface. 4. Turn on the electric winch and slowly raise the Teflon bailer to the surface. S. Lower, fill, and empty the bailer at least twice before collecting a sample. 6. Unscrew the cap of the sample container, being careful not to touch the lip of the bottle or the inside of the Teflon liner. Avoid touching the mouth of the Teflon bailer. 7. Unclasp the Teflon bailer. 8. Pour the water from the bailer into the sample container slowly. 9. Obtain sample temperature, pH, and conductivity as described in Procedures FA-1, "Temperature Measurement Procedure;" FA-2, "Calibration of Conductivity Meter and Measurement of Field Conductivity;" and FA-3, "Calibration of pH Meter and Measurement of Field pH;" and record on the Procedure No. Revision No. Effective Date Pg GC-1 2 08/15/91 1 f1 PNL TECHNICAL PROCEDURE Field Record Form. However, a single pH, conductivity, and temperature measurement is adequate. 10. If the ground-water sample is being collected when the water table is encountered during drilling, measurement of pH, conductivity, and temperature is not required. 4.2.5 Collecting samples from a Piezometer Using the Air-Lift Method Position Responsible: RADIATION PROTECTION TECHNOLOGIST NOTE: This method should be used for radioactive constituents only. sample water Some piezometer tubes are sampled by the air-lift method, in which the is pushed up and out of the well by compressed air. A 1/2-in.-diameter PVC tube has been installed in the wells for this purpose. i. Connect the compressor hose to the piezometer tube. 2. Open the regulator valve to pressurize the hose and keep the compressor running until water is forced out of the outlet on the side of the piezometer adapter head. 3. Rinse the bucket twice with purge water before filling. obtain sample temperature, pH, and conductivity as described in Procedures FA-1, "Temperature Measurement Procedure;" FA-2, "Calibration of Conductivity Meter and Measurement of Field Conductivity;" and FA-3, "Calibration of pH Meter and Measurement of Field pH;" and record on the Field Record Form. However, a single pH, conductivity, and temperature measurement is adequate. 4. Fill the sample bottle from bucket. 4.2.6 Collecting Samples from a Piezometer Using the Bailing Method NOTE: This method should be used to sample for radioactive constituents only. Position Responsible: RADlIATION PROTECTION TECHNOLOGIST bailing method. These piezometers do not - A few piezometer tubes are sampled by the produce enough water to sample by air lift. The bailer used consists of a flexible the rubber tube, 1 in. in diameter and approximately 1.5 to 3 ft long. on one end of tube, a plug has been inserted and wired in place. 1. Bail the piezometer tube in the same manner as in steps 1 through 9 of subsection 4.2.4 of this procedure. * ProcedureNo.Revision No. Effective Date Pg GC-1 2 08/15/91 15 ofe 16 PNL TECHNICAL PROCEDURE - 2. Pour the sample collected into a sampling bottle until the required amount 4 is obtained. 3. Obtain sample temperature, pH, and conductivity as described in Procedures FA-l, "Temperature Measurement Procedure;" FA-2, "Calibration of Conductivity Meter and Measurement of Field Conductivity;" and FA.-3, "Calibration of pH Meter and Measurement of Field pH;" and record on the Field Record Form. However, a single pH, conductivity, and temperature measurement is adequate. 4.2.7 Cleaning Sampling Manifolds Position Responsible: RADlIATION PROTECTION TECHNOLOGIST All sampling manifolds should be cleaned at the end of the day: 1. Rinse sampling manifold with tap water, then distilled water, and place it in a plastic bag. 2. If oil or grease is present on the manifold, wash both the inside and the outside of the manifold with a mild detergent, and rinse twice with warm or hot tap water, then with deionized (DI) or distilled water, and place in a plastic bag. Procedure No. Revision No. Effective Date Page GC-1 2 08/15/91 16 of 16 Procedure GC-2 In-Line Sample Filtration Procedure 0 a PNL TECHNICAL PROCEDURE . GC-2 IN-LINE SAMPLE FILTRATION PROCEDURE 1.0 APPLICABILITY This procedure is to be used when filtered ground-water samples are to be collected during routine sample collection from monitoring wells. 2.0 DEFINITIONS N/A 3.0 RESPONSIBLE STAFF * Radiation Protection Technologists. 4.0 PROCEDURE 4.1 Prerequisites 4.1.1 Equipment * filters (QED "Sample Pro" Model 8000, 8100, 8200, or equivalent) * graduated container * .~~~tubing for the filter adapter * stainless steel manifold (must be used with a submersible pump but is an option with the HydraStar) * Field Record Form specifying sample volume. 4.2 Step-by-Step Instructions Follow Procedure GC-1, "Ground Water Sample Collection," to prepare the well for ground-water sampling using the bladder, HydraStar, or submersible pump. Collect the filtered sample after all other samples have been collected. One filter should be sufficient to collect the required sample volume under normal conditions. If a second filter is required, repeat the filter wash procedure described below. If the filters clog too quickly, replace the standard filter COED Model 8100) with the high capacity model NOD Model 8000) and repeat preparation, Procedure GC-1. Indicate on the Field Record sheet if a high volume filter was required to filter a sample. Concurrence * I;2 Date ~ Approval Date S. H. H~, (hjj ~ icp .E4 //7 Prepared by (J~... (3YQ... Dale QAD Concurrence Date * K. B. Olsen D~IV~G. R. Dahli Y 6 d~ Proceddce No. Revision No. Effective Date Page 2 1 01/10/90 ~~~~~~~~~~~~1of 3 PNL TECHNICAL PROCEDURE 4.21 Badder Pump Method Position Responsible: RADIATION PROTECTION TECHNOLOGISTS To collect a filtered sample from a well that contains a bladder pump: I. Set the maximum discharge pressure to 60 psi and turn off the bladder pump controller. 2. Screw the inlet end of the filter assembly (marked inlet) into the threaded adapter, being careful not to touch filter ends to any surface. 3. Turn on bladder pump (check maximum pressure). 4. Filter approximately 500 mL, as a filter wash, into the graduated container. S. Dispose of the filter wash and fill the sample bottles as specified on the Field Record Form and on the sample bottle labels. 6. Turn off bladder pump, remove the filter assembly, and return the assemble to the sample bottle box for proper disposal at the laboratory. 4.2.2 HydroStar Pump Method Position Responsible: RADIATION PROTECTION TECHNOLOGIST To collect a sample from a well that contains a HydroStar pump: 1. Turn off air to the HydroStar pump at the piston assembly. 2. Screw the inlet end of the filter assembly (marked "inlet") into the threaded adapter at the end of the teflon tubing extending from the Hydro- Star pump, being careful not to touch filter ends to any surface. 3. Slowly turn on the air until the piston just operates smoothly. This rate should be less than 10 strokes a minute or as slow as possible to maintain water flow. If too much pressure is exerted across the filter, the mem- brane will rupture, usually resulting in a popping noise. If this happens, replace filter and restart the filtering procedure. 4. Filter approximately 500 mL, as a filter wash, into the graduated container. 5. Dispose of the filter wash and fill the sample bottles as specified on the Field Record Form and on the bottle labels. 6. Turn off the HydroStar pump, remove the filter assembly, and return the filter assembly to the sample bottle box for proper disposal. PNlL TECHNICAL PROCEDURE * 4.2.3 Submersible Pump Method Position Responsible: RADIATION PROTECTION TECHNOLOGIST This pump should be used to collect a filtered sample only if a stainless steel manifold is used to regulate the water pressure going to the filter apparatus. The manifold must also be capable of maintaining a sufficient water flow to prevent damage to the submersible pump. To collect a sample from a well that contains a submersible pump: 1. Before turning on the submersible pump, mount the manifold assembly to the well head and the Teflon sampling hose to the manifold. 2. Turn on the submersible pump. 3. Purge the well with the by-pass valve completely open. 4. To collect filtered samples, open by-pass valve completely. 5. Screw the inlet end of filter assembly (marked "inlet") into the threaded adapter at the end of the Teflon tube. Be careful not to touch filter ends to any surface. 6. Slowly close the by-pass valve until a steady flow of water is observed through filter. 7. When a steady flow is achieved, filter approximately 500 mL, as a filter wash, into the graduated container. 8. Dispose of the filter wash and fill the sample bottles as specified on the Field Record Form and on the sample bottle labels. 9. Turn off the submersible pump and remove the filter assembly from the stainless steel manifold. 10. Disconnect the stainless steel manifold from the well head. 11. Return the filter assembly to the sample bottle box for proper disposal at the laboratory. * Procedure No. Revision No. Effective Date Page GC-2 101/10/90 3 of 3 Procedure FA-1 Temperature Measurement Procedure 0 3* PNL TECHNICAL PROCEDURE . FA-1 TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENT PROCEDURE 1.0 APPLICABILITY This procedure is to be used during routine ground-water sampling, where temperature measurements are made during well purging and just before actual sample collection. Samples may not be collected until the temperature of the sample stream has stabi- lized, that is, two consecutive readings must arewithin *1.00C. A minimum of three measurements must be made during wel purging. 2.0 DEFINITIONS N/A 3.0 RESPONSIBLE STAFF * Radiation Protection Technologists. 4.0 PROCEDURE 4.1 Prerequisites 4.1.1 Equipment * Calibrated electronic digital thermometer * .~~Field Record Form. NOTE: Before leaving for the field, ensure that the electronic thermometer reads within 10 Centigrade of the NBS calibrated thermometer in the laboratory. If not, adjust (ifpossible), or replace. Document this calibration check on the Digital Thermometer Calibration Check Log (Figure 1). 4.2 Step-by-Step Instructions Position Responsible: RADIATION PROTECTION TECHNOLOGIST 1. Switch on the digital thermometer. Make sure that it is set to read in degrees centigrade. 2. Place the probe into the stream of water being discharged by the pump. 3. The temperature is indicated by a digital display, which will normally fluctuate for a few seconds. Wait until fluctuation ceases, then record the time and temperature on the Field Record Form (Figure 2). Concurrence Date Approval Date Prepared by Date QAD Concurrence Date Proced.r No. Revi~sion No. Effective Date Page a ~~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~~~61/91o PNL TECHNICAL PROCEDURE Standard Mercury Thermometer Serial Number (S/N) ______ As-Found Digital Within *10C If No, Adjusted Thermometer of Standard to *10%? Date S/N Performed By Ye o Ys No Comments FIGURE 1. Digital Thermometer Calibration Check Log Procedure No. Revision No. Effective Date Page FA-1I I 1 6/13/89 2 of 3 PNL TECHNICAL PROCEDURE OBallelle GROUND-WATER SAMPLE FIEL.D RECORD F Pagt .(N.th. (.pu LfliW (T,~~~~~~~.~O ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ Dt OnTRae0)gdr.) SAMPLES COLLECTED SAMPLE NO BOTTLED1 PUMP COLLECTOR TOTAL NUMBER OF BOTTLE5"S______ FIELDMEASUREMENTS Sre~io ______r~d WATER LEVELS j______ Pi~ldNO _ _ _ _ _ CAt TtrrP No______OcovaDet C(o.n. - M~~~~~~~~~~~FELDOBSERVATIONS C~~~~~~~~~im ~ ~m n ~~ ~ ~ ~ ~t3d ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ C $ FIGURE 2. Field Record Form * Pr~~ocedure No. Revision No.EfcieDt Page FA-1 1 6/13/89 I3 of 3 PE Procedure FA-2 Calibration of Conductivity Meter and Measurement of Field Conductivity 0 0 . FA-2 CALIBRATION OF CONDUCTIVITY METER AND MEASUREMENT OF FIELD CONDUCTIVITY 1.0 APPLICABILITY This procedure is to be used during routine ground-water sampling, where conductivity measurements are made during well purging and just before actual sample collection. Samples may not be collected until the conductivity of the sample stream has stabi- lized; that is,two consecutive measurements must agree within * 10 percent. For wells equipped with pumps, a minimum of three measurements must be made during well purgi ng. For wells being sampled by bailer, a single reading is sufficient, and the determination of stabilization will not be done. The calibration of the instrument used to measure sample conductivity must be veri- fied each day before leaving for the field to collect samples. This procedure replaces Section 13.5, PNL-MA-580 (July 1986). 2.0 DEFINITIONS N/A 3.0 RESPONSIBLE STAFF e Radiation Protection Technologists. . 4.0 PROCEDURE 4.1 Prerequisites 4.1.1 Equipment * a field portable conductivity meter with the following specifications: - accuracy * 5% of full scale or better - resolution, by either digital or analog display, to 1% of full scale or less - ~~~-inclusion of a dip sensor, a cup cell, or a flow-through cell - either manual or automatic temperature compensation. * distilled or deionized water * Concurrence Date Approval Date XJL 4~~~~1dt/w/2 -a L 4 -Z74?, Prepared by ~~9O.{Date QAD Concurrence Date Proedr No. Revilsion No. Effective Date Page VA-2 ~~~~~~~~~~6/13/89 1 of 5 PNL TECHNICAL PROCEDURE NOTE: Many suitable commercially available conductivity meters exist,an the manufacturer's catalog listing of specifications is acceptable evidence that a given instrument meets the above specifications. * a standard solution of known conductivity for conductivity bration. meter cali- For Hanford surface and ground water, a standard solution having a conductivity of from 500 to 1000 AS/cm is most suitable. The solution must meet the following requirements: - The nominal conductance of the solution must be clearly noted on the label of the solution bottle. - The temperature dependence of the solution must be clearly noted on the label. - The accuracy of the solution must be noted on the label , and the tolerance must be no greater than * 1%. relative error. NOTE: Commercially prepared conductance standard solutions that meet the above requirements are acceptable for this procedure, and the manu- facturer's label containing lot number and expiration date is accepted as certification of specifications. Laboratory prepared conductance standards are acceptable, if made using accepted proce- dures fully described in standard reference works. In this case, the label must also include reference to the procedure used to prepare the solution, the date of preparation, and the name of preparer. the * if the meter does not include a temperature display 0 readable to at least the nearest 0.5C, a thermometer accurate to * 1.00C is required. of Any type thermometer may be used, and the manufacturer's catalog listing of specifications is acceptable evidence of the required accuracy. * training records for Radiation Protection Technologists who cedure use this pro- must include certification that the user has received instruction in the operation, calibration, and routine care and maintenance of the specific instrument applied in the field measurement of conductivity * the manufacturer's written instructions for the instruments) in use are to accompany and be considered part of this procedure * Field Record Forms (Figure 1) * Conductivity Meter Calibration Record (Figure 2). Procedure No. Revision No. Effective Date Page0 FA-2 1 6/13/89 2 of PNL TECHNICAL PROCEDURE Osattelle GROUND-WATER SAMPLE FIELD RECORD Total Purge VOlume (gal) ______C acu1. .sun Purge Flo Raebe(galamin) NydO tif (Time On,)______ Bladder (Time* On,) ______ SAMPLES COLLECTED SAMPLENO BOTTLEID Pump COLLECTOR TO7AL NUMBER OF 8OTTLES ______ FIELDMEASUREMENTS WATERALEyE LS ys 0,0t Co,,d I T rmmt'NO Below!T C IIL1t I F ELD OBSERVATIONS 1 CNonMA.W itCh uI9.g NO C ommenit~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~CI oII 0. FIGURE 1. Field Record Form a Procedure No. 'Revision No. Effective Date Page W ~~~~~FA-2 1 6/13/89 3 of 5 PNL TECHNICAL PROCEDURE Calibration Check for Conductivity Meter Calibration Std Lot U _____ USE CALIBRATION METHOD LISTED IN PROCEDURE FA-2 Calculated Observed Value Serial No. Operator Date Value AM PM I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I r i I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I p I I FIGURE 2. Conductivity Meter Calibration Record Form Procedure No. Revision No. Effective Date Page FA-2 1 6/13/89 4 of 5 PNL TECHNICAL PROCEDURE . 4.2 General Instructions Position Responsible: RADIATION PROTECTION TECHNOLOGISTS Because there is a wide variety of commercially available conductivity meters (and thermometers) suitable for use in this procedure, it is not possible to provide detailed operating instructions. In each case, follow the manufac- turer's instructions. It is particularly important to strictly observe the manufacturer's recommendations regarding care and storage of the sensing elements, battery charging (where applicable) or battery life, exact cali- bration procedure, and the environmental extremes under which the instrument is operable. In addition to the manufacturer's instructions, the following steps must be followed: 1. Calibrate the conductivity meter before it is used in the field to measure sample conductivity, and periodically thereafter. Follow the manufac- turer's recommendation for the frequency of calibration, and use the cali- bration standard solution for conductivity described above. A calibration record will be maintained for each instrument and will be on file with the instrument custodian. Check the instrument calibration each day before leaving for the field, and record, sign, and date a log form showing the results. (This ensures that instruments subject to daily use are in operating condition.) If the calibration check shows greater than 5% error with respect to the standard used, the instrument must be recalibrated. 2. After instrument calibration or calibration check, discard the used portion of the standard solution. Never return it to the solution bottle. NOTE: Always replace cap to standard solution bottle when calibration is completed. 3. In the field, thoroughly rinse the cell or dip sensor with two portions of the actual sample, and then measure conductance on a third portion. Record the conductance as shown on the meter display, sample temperature, and any other required data on the Field Record Form. After measuring sample conductivity, rinse the probe or cell with distilled or deionized water. __ Procedure No. Revision No. Effective Date Pag e W ~~FA-2 16/13/89 5 of 5 Procedure FA-3 Calibration of pH Meter and Measurement of Field pH 0 I a F ~~~~~~~PNLTECHNICAL PROCEDURE * ~FA-3 CALIBRATION OF pH METER AND MEASUREMENT OF FIELD pH 1.0 APPLICABILITY Ground-water pH is measured during well purging and just before actual sample collection. Samples may not be collected until the pH of the sample stream has stabilized; that is,two consecutive measurements agree within 0.10 pH units. For wells equipped with pumps, a minimum of three measurements should be made during purging. For wells being sampled by bailer, a single reading is sufficient, and a determination of stabilization will not be done. The instrument used to measure sample pH in the field must be calibrated each day before leaving for the field to collect samples. This procedure replaces Section 13.6, PNL-MA-580 (July 1986). 2.0 DEFINITIONS N/A 3.0 RESPONSIBLE STAFF * Radiation Protection Technologists. 4.0 PROCEDURE . 4.1 Prerequisites *a field portable pH meter with the following specifications: - accuracy * 0.1 pH unit or better - resolution, by either digital or analog display, to 0.01 pH units or less - inclusion of dip electrodes, a cup cell, or a flow-through cell - ~~~~-either manual or automatic temperature compensation. NOTE: Many suitable commercially available pH meters exist, and the manufac- turer's catalog listing of specifications is acceptable evidence that a given instrument meets the above requirements. * distilled or deionized water * standard buffer solutions for pH meter calibration. At least two solutions are required, usually with nominal pH values of 7 and 10. Buffer values of 7 and 10 bracket the normal pH of surface and ground water at the Hanford Site. Other values may be used so long as the sample pH is bracketed. It Concurrence Date Approval Date >J&.Q~~~~~~~ OJ.- Q 1. L~~~~~~~~~~~L~~~ -t Prepared by Date QAD Concurrence Date Procedu~re. No. Revision No. Effective Date Page ~~~~~A-3 ~~~~~~~~~~~~~1 of 5 PNL TECHNICAL PROCEDURE is best to choose buffers whose values are near to the sample pH. The buffers must meet the following requirements: - The temperature dependence of the solution must be clearly noted on the label of the solution bottle. - The accuracy of the solution must be clearly noted on the label, and the tolerance must be no greater than * 0.05 pH units. - Nominal value, lot number, and expiration date must be clearly noted on the label, and the solutions should be color-coded. NOTE: Commercially prepared pH buffer solutions are almost always color- coded, with the labels printed in different colors for different nominal pH values, and the solutions tinted the same color as the respective labels. The colors used by different manufacturers are not necessarily the same. The use of color-coded solutions is urged as a convenience, but is not a strict requirement of this procedure. NOTE: Commercially prepared buffer solutions that meet the above require- ments for this prerequisite are acceptable for this procedure, and the manufacturer's label is accepted as certification of specifications. Laboratory prepared buffer solutions may also be used, if made using accepted procedures fully described in standard reference books. In this case, the label must also include reference to the procedure used to prepare the buffers, the date of preparation, and the name of the preparer. * training records for Radiation Protection Technologists who use this pro- cedure must include certification that the user has received instruction in the operation, calibration, and routine care and maintenance of the specific instruments) applied in the field measurement of pH * the manufacturer's written instructions for the instrument should accompany the instrument into the field * Field Record Forms (Figure 1) * pH Meter Calibration Record (Figure 2). Procedure No. Revision No. EfcieDt Page FA-3 1I 2of 5 PNL TECHNICAL PROCEDURE C,) Battene~ ~ ~ROUND-WATER SAMPLE FIELD RECORD Total PurgeVolume gal ______Cak.lanmOn, Purge Flo R.,* lgaIUn.r) Submttt.bit (T.trieOfl 81.0a.' (Tirni On) ______ SAMFAKISCOLLECTIO SAMPLENO BOTTLEID pump ZOLLECTOA TOTAL NUMBER Of 80TTLES ______ FIELDMEASUREMENTS WATERLEVELSTie- Cut Th,~mttNo el r____ we at ~net ~ ~ 001 o- rh n. aI l~ tflU uu-IEc nt ______N______)______C______.,. ______ C OmlY~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~CrnI 3'j" FIGURE 1. Field Record Form . Pro~~cedure No. Revision No. Effective Date Page FA-3 13 of 5 PNL TECHNICAL PROCEDURE pH 7 Lot II Calibration Check for pH Meter pH 10 Lot # ------USE CALIBRATION PROCEDURES LISTED IN PROCEDURE FA-3 Calculated O~bserved Value Serial No. Operator Date Value AM PM u ~ II FIUR2 IpMee Caibaio ecr Procedure No.Revision No. Effect~~~~~~~~~~~~~iveDtePg FA-3~~~~~~~~~ 4Iof PNL TECHNICAL PROCEDURE . ~4.2 General Instructions Position Responsible: RADIATION PROTECTION TECHNOLOGISTS Because there is a wide variety of commercially available pH meters (and thermometers) suitable for use in this procedure, it is not possible to provide detailed operating instructions. In each case, follow the manufac- turer's instructions. It is particularly important to strictly observe the manufacturer's recommendations regarding care and storage of the sensing electrodes, battery charging (where applicable) or battery life, exact cali- bration procedures, and the environmental extremes under which the instrument is operable. In addition to the manufacturer's instruction, the following steps must be followed: 1. Calibrate the pH meter daily before leaving for the field, and log, date, and sign the results of calibration on the pH meter calibration record form (Figure 2). NOTE: The principal reason for the above step is to ensure that the meter is in operational condition. Also, if this calibration step is performed using the same buffers used in the field, recalibration in the field may be avoided if meter drift is within the limits described below. Always replace cap to standard solution bottle when calibration is complete. 2. Before measuring sample pH in the field, check the meter calibration against both buffer solutions. If the results for both measurements are within 0.05 pH units of the correct values for the buffers, the meter need not be recalibrated. If not, follow the manufacturer' s instructions for meter calibration. It is extremely important to thoroughly rinse the electrodes or cell with distilled or deionized water between measurements of different solutions. This prevents cross-contamination. Never return used buffers to the bottle; discard them instead. Meter calibration must be rechecked upon arrival at each sampling site. Also, it is recommended, but not required, that the meter be fully recalibrated before each sample measurement. 3. Thoroughly rinse the electrode or cell with distilled or deionized water, then dip the electrode in (or fill the cell with) the sample solution. Record the pH (to the nearest 0.01 unit) on the Field Record Form. After measuring sample pH, rinse the electrode with distilled or deionized water. . Procedure NO. Revision No. [Effective Date Page FA-3 1 5 of 5 0 Procedure WL-1 Water-Level Measurement Procedure 0 0 a PNL TECHNICAL PROCEDURE . ~WL-1 WATER-LEVEL MEASUREMENT PROCEDURE 1.0 APPLICABILITY Water-level measurements are taken to determine piezometric head in the aquifer or to determine water-level changes during aquifer testing. Both radiation protection technicians and technical staff perform such measurements. Depth-to-water from the top of the well casing is measured with a steel tape or an electrical water-level indicator. Depth-to-water is subtracted from the surveyed elevation of the top of the well casing to obtain the elevation of the water table. Graduated steel measuring tapes are more accurate than electrical water-level indi- cators and so should be used when accurate measurements are required. An electrical water-level indicator can be used to determine the approximate depth-to-water and may be the preferred technique for measuring depth-to-water during periods of rapid water-level change (e.g., during aquifer testing), where cascading water is present, when the inside of the casing is wet, or when oil or similar liquid is present above the surface of the water. This procedure replaces Procedure P-S and Section 13.1 of PNL-MA-58O (July 1986). 2.0 DEFINITIONS *Measuring point - the place from which the depth-to-water in a well is measured. It is a point, generally the top of the casing on the north side, which has a known elevation and from which a measuring device can hang freely into the well. 3.0 RESPONSIBLE STAFF * Project Manager * Radiation Protection Technologist (RPT) * Technical Staff. 4.0 PROCEDURE 4.1 Prerequisites 4.1.1 Equipment The following equipment will be needed when measuring depth-to-water using a gradu- ated steel tape: * Concurre Date Approval Date •> i8/ j 7"'lit it t Prepared by Date QAD Concurrence Date 9//fl 1~~A~TA ~ _5• , /7/ 5/121-/8M9 * Procedure No. Revision No. Effective Date Pg WL-1 1 ~~~~~~~~~6/13/89 1 of 9 PNL TECHNICAL 1-ROCEDURE * standardized steel measuring tape with attached stainless steel weight * carpenter's chalk * a record of previous water-level measurement in the well [e.g., from copy of Hanford Wells (PNL-5397)], if available * Field Record Forms, Field Record Book, or Water Level Measurement Form * towel * wash bottle containing distilled or deionized water. A wash bottle with distilled or deionized water is required to decontaminate the portion of the tape that penetrates into the water. Store and transport steel tapes with care so that damage to the tapes are minimized and tapes are kept free of rust, dirt, and contamination. The following equipment will be needed when measuring depth-to-water using an electrical water-level indicator: * electrical water-level indicator * engineer's measuring tape graduated in hundredths of a foot * a record of previous water-level measurement in the well [e.g., copy of Hanford Wells (PNL-5397Y1, if available * Field Record Forms, Field Record Book, or Water Level Measurement Form * towel * wash bottle containing distilled or deionized water. A wash bottle with distilled or deionized water is required to decontaminate the portion of the tape that penetrates into the water. Store and transport electrical water-level indicators with care so that damage to the instruments are minimized and the instruments are kept free of rust, dirt, and contamination. The following safety equipment is required for measuring depth-to-water in wells: * gloves * steel-toed shoes * hard hat when working near drilling or pump setting rigs. Procedure No. 'Revision No. Effective Date Pg WL-1 1 6/13/89 2of 9 @4.1.2 Steel Tape Calibration Requirements Steel tapes must be standardized before use by comparison with a calibrated steel tape as described in Procedure WL-2, "Standardization of Steel Tapes." Verify that the tapes are within their standardization period before use. Standardization status tags (Figure 1) have been attached to the steel tape frame. 4.1.3 Safety Precautions Select appropriate gloves (e.g., viton, nitrile, or butyl rubber) based on contami- nants expected in the well. If contaminants are not expected, leather gloves may be selected for protection. Leather gloves shall be worn while making depth-to-water measurements with a steel tape, unless other-wise stated in the safety plan. Hard hats are to be worn when making measurements in the vicinity of a drilling or pump setting rig. Steel-toed shoes are to be worn at all times in the field. 4.2 Step-by-Step Instructions 4.2.1 Graduated Steel Tape Method Position Responsible: RADIATION PROTECTION TECHNOLOGISTS OR TECHNICAL STAFF NOTE: If automatic long-term water-level recording equipment is in the well , do not @ take water-level measurements unless other-wise instructed by the Project Manager. Note this on the Water-Level Measurement Form or in a Field Record Book. Steel Tape Standardization Last Standardization Date ______Next Standardization Date ______Standardization performed by Deviation From Calibrated Tape PNL-MA-567, WL-1 FIGURE 1. Steel Tape Standardization Status Tag @Procedure No. 'Revision No. Effective Date Page WL-1 16/13/89 3 of 9 PNL TECHNICAL PROCEDURE *. Record the * date (1) * name of the measuring device (e.g., Lufkin 500-foot steel tape) (2) * serial number of steel tape (3) * name of the person taking the measurements and number of the procedure followed (4) * well number (5) in the designated space on the Water Level Measurement Form (Figure 2) or in a Field Record Book. 2. Find the elevation of the measuring point and the estimated water level in Hanford Wells (or equivalent), or use an electric tape to find the approxi- mate depth to water. 3. Chalk the 1-foot section of steel tape that is graduated in tenths or hundredths of a foot. 4. Lower the steel tape from the well's measuring point (marked with paint or stamped with an "X"on the top of the casing) to the estimated water level. To avoid splashing at the water surface, lower the tape slowly into the water. 5. Once the estimated water level has been reached, hold the nearest foot mark (held value) against the measuring point on the casing, and without allowing the tape to move any farther into the well, remove the tape from the well. 6. If the water level can be observed on the chalked portion of the tape, read the distance between the zero mark on the tape and the wet line (cut value) to the nearest 0.01 foot. If none of the chalked portion is wet, repeat the procedure, but allow more of the tape to go down the well (i.e., use a greater hold value). If all of the chalked portion of the tape is wet, dry the tape, rechalk it and repeat the procedure allowing less tape to go down the well (i.e., use a lesser hold value). Continue adjusting the length of the tape suspended in the well until the water level can be observed on the chalked portion of the tape. Procedure No. IRevision No. Effective Date Pg WL-1 1 6/13/89 4 of- 9 PNL TECHNTCAL PROCEDURE Date Ct Pge Measuring Device (2) ----- Measured By ) Well Number lime (PST) Held Cult__DM or PSI FIGURE 2. Water Level Measurement Form * Procedure No. 'Revision No. Effective Date Page WL-1I 1 6/13/89 5 of 9 PNL TECHNICAL PROCEDURE 7. Record the * held value (6) * cut value to the nearest 0.01 foot (7) * time of measurement (8) * any deviations from the procedure, anomalies, or comments in the designated space on the Water Level Measurement Form (Figure 2) or in a Field Record book. 8. Calculate and record the depth-to-water on the Water Level Measurement Form. When using a steel tape with the section marked in tenths or hundredths of a foot between zero and 1 foot on the tape, subtract the wetted portion of the tape (cut value) from the held value. When using a steel tape with the section marked in tenths or hundredths of a foot below the zero mark on the tape, add the dry length of the graduated foot (cut value) to the held value. 9. Dry the wetted portion of the tape with a towel and repeat the procedure until two depth-to-water measurements agree within 0.02 feet. If two measurements within 0.02 feet cannot be obtained, record the suspected problem on the Field Record Form or Field Record Book. NOTE: The requirement to obtain a second water level may be waived by the project manager during aquifer testing because the water level in the well may be changing so rapidly that it is not possible to obtain successive measurements within 0.02 feet of each other. 10. When all measurements in a single well are completed, rinse the wetted portion of the tape with distilled or deionized water. 11. Dry the wetted portion of the tape with a towel to prepare it for the next measurement and prevent the tape from rusting. This is required whether the tape has been rinsed or not. 4.2.2 Electrical Water-Level Indicator Method Position Responsible: RADIATION PROTECTION TECHNOLOGISTS OR TECHNICAL STAFF Electrical water-level indicators consist of an insulated wire 100 to 1000 feet in length that is graduated in standard increments. A probe, which is attached to the end of the wire, is lowered into the borehole. On contact with the water, the electrical circuit is closed as signaled by an indicator (light or buzzer) at the surface. Procedure No. 'Revision No. Efective Date Pg WL-1I 1 6/13/89 6 of9 PNL TECHNICAL PROCED'URE NOTE: If automatic long-term water-level recording equipment is in the well,' do not take water-level measurements, unless otherwise instructed by the Project Manager. Note this on the Water-Level Measurement Form or in a Field Record Book. 1. Record the * date (1) * name of the measuring device (e.g., brand and model of water-level indicator) (2) * serial number of electrical water-level indicator (3) * name of the person taking the measurements and number of the procedure followed (4) * well number (5) in the designated space on the Water Level Measurement Form (Figure 2) or in a Field Record Book. 2. Turn on the indicator and turn the sensitivity switch to full sensitivity. 3. Push the test button (ifthe instrument has one) to see if the battery is * ~~~~charged and the buzzer and light are working. NOTE: An operational check of the indicator can be performed by dipping the probe in a container of water. Indicator light or buzzer should come on. 4. Lower the probe from the measuring point into the well or borehole until the buzzer or the light indicate contact with the water. 5. Mark the wire at the location adjacent to the measuring point. 6. Measure to the nearest 0.01 foot the distance between the mark (cut value) and the nearest graduation mark (held value) on the wire using a measuring tape that is scaled to hundredths of a foot. 7. Record the * held value (6) * cut value to the nearest 0.01 foot (7) * time of measurement (8) * any deviations from the procedure, anomalies, or comments in the designated space on the Water Level Measurement Form (Figure 2) or in a Field Record Book. . Procedure No. lRevision No. Effective Date Page WL-1 I16/13/89 7 of 9 PNL TECHNICAL PROCEDURE 8. Calculate and record the depth-to-water on the Water Level Measurement Form (9), or in a Field Record Book. If the water level is deeper than the nearest graduation marked on the tape, add the cut value to the held value to obtain the depth to water. If the water level is shallower than the nearest graduation marked on the tape, subtract the cut value from the held value to obtain the depth to water. 9. Repeat the procedure until two depth-to-water measurements agree within 0.02 feet. if two measurements within 0.02 feet cannot be obtained, record the suspected problem on the Field Record Form or in a Field Record Book. NOTE: The requirement to obtain a second water level may be waived by the project manager during aquifer testing because the water level in the well may be changing so rapidly that it is not possible to obtain successive measurements within 0.02 feet of each other. 10. When the probe is removed from the well, rinse the probe and the wetted portion of the wire with distilled or deionized water. 11. Dry the probe and the wetted portion of the wire with a towel. This is required whether the tape has been rinsed or not. 4.3 Computations Position Responsible: RADIATION PROTECTION TECHNOLOGISTS OR TECHNICAL STAFF The water-level elevation in a well is obtained by subtracting the depth-to-water from the elevation of the measuring point: Water level = measuring point elevation - depth-to-water NOTE: Corrections for thermal expansion and tape stretch caused by the suspended weight of the tape and plumb weight are described by Garber and Koopman (1968). Errors resulting from these effects can become significant at high temperatures and for measured depths in excess of 1000 feet. 5.0 REFERENCES This procedure was developed in accordance with the techniques described in: * ASTM. 1988. "Standard Method for Determining Subsurface Liquid Levels in a Borehole or Monitoring Well (Observation Well)." 0 4750-87, American Society for Testing and Materials, Philadelphia, Pennsylvania. * EPA. 1986. Resource Conservation and Recovery Act (RCRA) Gound-Water Monitoring Technical Enforcement Guidance Document. Nation'al Technical Information Service, Springfield, Virginia. WL-1 1~~ 6/13/898 of PNL TECHNICAL PROCEDURE 0 * ~~USGS. 1977. National Handbook of Recommended Methods for Water Data Acquisition. Office of Water Data Coordination, Reston, Virginia. Other references used were: * Garber, M. S. and F. C. Koopman. 1968. Methods of Measuring Water Levels in Deep Wells: U.S. Geological Survey TRWI, Book 8, ~Chap. A-i. U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C. * PNL. 1988. Hanford Wells. PNL-5397, Pacific Northwest Laboratory, Richland, Washington. * Procedure No. 'Revision No. Effective Date Page Met Management Pfman-AFP Ewkon Air Pne Base Appendix B SITE MANAGEMENT PLAN (SMVP) QUALITY ASSURANCE PROJECT PLAN (QAPP) FOR EIELSON AIR FORCE BASE 0 :0 Sheo Menamged Ptan-QAPP Halattn Air flas Base . ~CONTENTS--QAPP Page 1.0 Introduction...... 6B.1.1 2.0 Project Description...... 6B.2.1 2.1 Site History and Description...... B.2.1 2.2 Project Objectives...... B.2.1 3.0 Project Organization and Responsibilities...... B.3.1 3.1 Technical Lead Responsibilities...... B.3.1 3.2 Analytical Laboratories...... 5B.3.3 3.3 Other Support Contractors...... 5B.3.3 4.0 Quality Assurance Objectives for Measurements...... 6B.4.1 4.1 Objectives...... B.4.1 4.2 Data Quality Objectives...... 5B.4.1 4.3 Quality Assurance Objectives...... 5B.4.2 4.3.1. Representativeness...... B. 4.3 4.3.2 Comparability...... B. 4.4 4.3.3 Precision...... B.4.4 4.3.4 Accuracy...... 5B.4.5 4.3.5 Completeness...... 5B.4.6 5.0 Sampling Procedures...... B.5.1 5.1 Sample Containers, Preservation, and Holding Times...... B. 5.2 6.0 Sample Custody and Document Control Procedures...... 6B.6.1 6.1 Field Custody Procedures...... 5B.6.1 6.2 Laboratory Custody Procedures...... B. 6.3 6.3 Document Control...... B. 6.5 7.0 Calibration Procedures and Frequency...... 6B.7.1 7.1 Initial Calibration...... 5B.7.1 7.2 Continuing Calibration...... 5B.7.2 7.3 Calibration QC...... 8B.7.2 8.0 Analytical Procedures...... B.8.1 9.0 Data Reduction, Validation, and Reporting...... 6B.9.1 iii Sit. Management Pfan-aAPP SEison Air Fame Base CONTENTS (Continued) Page 10.0 Internal Quality Control...... B.1O.1 10.1 Field Sampling QC Checks...... B.10.1 10.2 Laboratory Analysis 00 Checks...... 8B.10.2 11.0 Performance and Systems Audits...... B. 11.1 12.0 Preventive Maintenance...... B.12.1 13.0 Data Assessment Procedures...... B.13.1 13.1 Precision...... 8B. 13.1 13.2 Accuracy...... 8B. 13.1 13.3 Completeness...... 8B. 13.2 14.0 Corrective Actions...... B.14.1 15.0 Quality Assurance Reports to Management...... B. 15.1 Attachment 1 Quality Assurance Project Plan Addendum, Elelson Air Force Base TABLES B.4.1 Quality Assurance Objectives for the Analysis of Soils and Sediments B.4.7 B.4.2 Quality Assurance Objectives for the Analysis of Groundwater and Surface Water...... B.4.8 B.4.3 Alternate Volatile Organic and Semnivolatile Organic Compound Methods for Analyzing Soil and Sediment Samples...... B.4.9 B.4.4 Alternate Volatile Organic and Semnivolatile Organic Compound Methods for Analyzing Groundwater and Surface Water Samples...... B.8.4.1 0 8.4.5 Method, Target Detection Limit, and Quality Assurance Objectives for the Characterization of Free-Product Total Hydrocarbon Analytical Methods...... 8B.4.1 1 iv Sit. Management Pl~a-A PP E~a~sn Air Forc Base . ~CONTENTS (Continued) Page 6.5.1 Container, Preservative, and Holding Time Requirements for Soil and Sediment Samples...... B. 5.3 6.5.2 Container, Preservative, and Holding Time Requirements for Groundwater and Surface Water Samples...... 6B.5.4 FIGURES B.3.1 Project Organization Chart...... 8B.3.2 5.6.1 Sample Custody Seal...... B. 6.2 6.6.2 Chain-of-Custody Procedures for Shipment and Analysis of Samples . B.6.4 0~~~~~~~~~~~~~ sh. Manawne'it Pan-aAPP Revision 2 Ejeson Air Farc Base . ~1.0 INTRODUCTION This Quality Assurance Project Plan (QAPP) has been prepared in accordance with the Federal Facility Agreement (FFA) for Elelson Air Force Base (AFB3). The FFA was signed by the United States Air Force, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), and the Alaska Department of Environmental Conservation (ADEC). The purpose of this QAPP is to specify the overall procedures and methods for office and field documentation for field sampling data, sample handling and custody, recordkeeping, equipment handling and calibration, and laboratory analyses that will be followed during the Remedial Investigation/Feasibility Study (RI/PS) to be conducted for Eielson AFB. This QAPP was developed in conjunction with, and is supple- mented and accompanied by, other documents. They are as follows: *Site Management Plan. A document that presents the objectives and approach to the overall RI/FS, and specifies the objectives, approach and work scope, and rationale of the RI/FS process. * Field Sampling Plan (FSP). A description of anticipated field activities, including sampling equipment and proce- dures. The FSP complements the QAPP, and the two documents frequently refer to each other. * Health and Safety Plan. A description of procedures to be used in the field to protect field personnel from potential hazards that investigation activities may present. 0 6~~~~~~~~~~~.1.1 August 1992 Sit. Managemnt&Plan-GAPP Revision 2 Edeon Air Force B... . ~2.0 PROJECT DESCRIPTION The USAF is conducting an RI/FS at the Elelson AFB to assess the nature and extent of contamination from past waste disposal operations and spill sites on the installation. 2.1 SITE HISTORY AND DESCRIPTION A description of the Site and its history is included in the Draft Site Management Plan (SMP). 2.2 PROJECT OBJECTIVES The primary objective of the environmental response actions to be taken at Eielson AFB is to protect human health and the environment. To achieve this goal, milestones have been defined in the FFA that will lead to a sitewvide ROD in 1995. In order to meet that deadline, RI/FS investigations will be conducted for six OUs. Interim actions may be undertaken for one or more OUs to prevent or minimize a release of a hazardous substance or contaminant. Other actions may also be required if additional OUs are formed. 0 ~~~~~~~TheRI/FS investigations will be designed to identify and fill those data needs related to preparation of the basewvide risk assessment, evaluation of applicable or relevant and appropriate requirements (ARARs), confirmation of the site conceptual model, and completion of the feasibility studies. All field work, including sampling, surveying, and testing, will be geared to filling those needs. Additional site characterization is not an objective. Existing data from previous investigations will be used to the maximum extent technically feasible. B.2.1 August 1992 She Mangageen Ptan-aAPP Revision 2 EBaton Air Farm Se a . ~3.0 PROJECT ORGANIZATION AND RESPONSIBILITIES 3.1 TECHNICAL LEAD RESPONSIBILITIES Figure B.3.1 illustrates the overall project organization and key personnel that have been identified for the Eielson AFB RI/FS. Key personnel will be identified as project and field team leaders, and analytical laboratories and subcontractors will be identified with each OUMP. Primary responsibility for project quality will rest with the Battelle EMO and CH2M HILL's project managers. The Quality Assurance Manager (QAM) and the senior review coordinator will provide independent quality assurance review. The Battelle EMO Project Manager has overall responsibility for work performed for the Air Force under this contract. He is responsible for project coordination among the Air Force, regulatory agencies, and consultants. He also provides consultant overview and direction. The CH2M HILL Project Manager has the responsibility for accomplishing the scope of work specified in the contract. He reviews deliverables for quality, assigns resources, and monitors budgets and schedules. The CH2M HILL Project Manager is also the point of contact for liaison with the Air Force Project Manager and the Battelle EMO Project Manager. The CH2M HILL Project OU Manager is responsible for assigning CH2M HILL employees as project managers and field team lead- ers. OU project managers will be responsible for the production of project deliverables. Field Team Leaders will be responsible for sampling activities, field studies, data base management, field and laboratory testing, and data analysis. CH2M HILL's QAM has primary responsibility for developing task order QA Plans, ensuring that all staff are QA-trained, and that the QA program is fully implemented. He has authority to stop work on B.3.1 August 1992 =0 CO~~~~~~~~~~~uC C)~~~~~~~~~~~~~M* Ico 0~~0I 0 0~~)L 0)CM= z-C N Co 2' ~ r-0 'ii( L0 054)t o Itc cc 0~~~~~~~m0 2 (~~~0 c 0 0 cua 00C Sit. Msganaemn PlanQAPP Revision 2 Bsison Air Forc Baa. any task or activity if the requirements of the QA program are not being met. The Senior Review Coordinators assist the project manager by monitoring the technical execution of task orders, identifying experts to solve special technical problems, and coordinating reviews of project deliverables. Senior Review Coordinators are assisted by technical specialists chosen on the basis of specific work assignment requirements. They ensure that comprehensive reviews are conducted expediently and that all review comments are appropriately addressed. The CH-2M HILL Quality Control Coordinator (QCC) will assure that all work is performed according to the specifications of the QAPP. This responsibility includes performing field and laboratory audits, reporting to the CH-2M HILL Project Manager, and reviewing deliverables. QA/QO problems or deficiencies identified by the QAM, Senior Reviewer, or QCC during the review, monitoring, and auditing processes will be brought to the attention of the CH2M HILL Project Manager. If corrective action is required, the CH2M HILL Project Manager will inform the EMO Project Manager. 3.2 ANALYTICAL LABORATORIES For laboratory work contracted to CH-2M HILL, CH2M HILL's Laboratory in Redding, California, is identified as the primary analytical laboratory. Client services representative, Mary Pasche, is responsible for analytical and laboratory requirements for this project. 3.3 OTHER SUPPORT CONTRACTORS If other laboratories are required, they will be identified in the OUIMPs and must meet the QA/QC standards set forth in this QAPP. The laboratory QA plan for each laboratory will be reviewed and approved by CH2M HILL and will be included in OUMPs. Situations that might require the use of an alternative lab might include short holding times or fast turnaround times for particular projects. B.3.3 August 1992 Sit. Management Pt~anGAPP Revision 2 M9son Air Forc B. O ~4.0 QUALITY ASSURANCE OBJECTIVES FOR MEASUREMENTS 4.1 OBJECTIVES The overall program QA objectives (QAOs) for field and laboratory activities for the Eielson AFB SMP QAPP are to develop and implement the following: *project QC requirements or criteria for laboratory analyses that are appropriate for obtaining and evaluating data that can be used to achieve both program and specific project objectives *project QC procedures to provide analytical data of known quality in terms of precision, accuracy, completeness, representativeness, and comparability. 4.2 DATA QUALITY OBJECTIVES Data quality objectives (DQOs) are related to specific investigation activities planned for the Eielson AFB Site. DQOs are defined as the qualitative and quantitative statements that characterize the data needed to support a particular data usage. Therefore, DQOs for collection and analysis are based on the end use of the data. Specific DOOs include the proposed site investigation activities and objectives, data uses, and laboratory support requirements for the Eielson AFB. DOOs will be addressed in the data needs section for each OUMP and each OU QAPP. Analytical data can be obtained at several different levels, based on criteria provided by EPA's Data Quality Objectives document.1 Five analytical support levels are defined in the following paragraphs. Level I is field screening or analysis using portable instruments. Results are often not compound-specific and not quantitative but 'Data Quality Objectives for Remedial Response Activities, Volume 1--Development Process, EPA 540/G-87/003A (OSWER) (Directive 9335.O-7B), March 1987. B3.4.1 August 1992 Sit. Manageme~nt en-GA PP Revision 2 Liaksn Air Force Base results are available in real time. It is the least costly of the analytical options. Level 1I is field analysis using more sophisticated portable analytical instruments; in some cases, the instruments may be set up in a mobile laboratory on site. There is a wide range in the quality of data that can be generated. It depends on the use of suitable calibration standards, reference materials, and sample preparation equipment, and the training of the operator. Results are available in real time or several hours. Level Ill analyses are performed in an off-site analytical labora- tory. Level Ill analyses may or may not use CLIP procedures, but do not usually utilize the validation or documentation procedures required of CLIP Level IV analysis. The laboratory may or may not be a CLIP laboratory. Level IV is CLIP routine analytical services (RAS). All analyses are performed in an off-site CLIP analytical laboratory following CLIP protocols. Level IV is characterized by rigorous QA/QC protocols and documentation. Level V is analysis by nonstandard methods. All analyses are performed in an off-site analytical laboratory, which may or may not be a CLIP laboratory. Method development or method modification may be required for specific constituents or detection limits. CLIP special analytical services (SAS) are Level V. Where validation of critical data may be required, Level IV analyses will be requested. In cases where CLIP methods are not needed, but validation is still required, a CLIP-equivalent data package will be requested. Data validation procedures are discussed in Section 9.0. 4.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE OBJECTIVES QA procedures for field measurements are discussed in the FSP. The quality assurance objectives (QAOs) for analytical data gen- erated from sampling activities will be tracked by the use of field duplicates and field blanks. These duplicate and blank samples and their method of collection will be defined for each source- specific or site sampling event in the corresponding FSP. 13.4.2 August 1992 SMe ManagnaartMan-GA PP Revision 2 Edeon Air Forc B.. Specific QA~s are as follows: * establish sampling techniques in such a manner that the analytical results are representative of the media and conditions being measured • collect and analyze a sufficient number of duplicate field samples (two samples that are either temporally or spatially separated and are intended for measurement of station monitoring variably) to establish a sampling precision of an average ±20 relative percent difference for all media for all samples. Field duplicate sample results will help to establish precision among replicate samples collected from the same sample location * collect and analyze a sufficient number of travel blank, equipment blank, and container blank samples to evaluate the potential for contamination from ambient air, or from sampling equipment and sample collection techniques * analyze method blanks, laboratory duplicates, and spikes to evaluate results and compare to QA goals established * ~~~~~~~~forprecision and accuracy. Another important QAD of this project is to develop and implement procedures to provide analytical data of known quality. Data quality is assessed in terms of representativeness, comparability, precision, accuracy, and completeness. These criteria are discussed below for analytical support levels Ill, IV, and V. 4.3.1 Representativeness Representativeness is a measure of how closely the measured results reflect the actual concentration or distribution of the chemical constituent in the matrix sampled. Representativeness is accomplished by choosing sampling proce- dures that will produce results that depict as accurately and pre- cisely as possible the matrix and conditions being measured; by developing protocols for storage, preservation, and transportation that preserve the representativeness of the collected samples; and by using documentation methods that assure that protocols B.4.3 August 1992 Sit. MaemgmwNn Pfan-aQAP Revision 2 5*/son Air Fow Bee have been followed and that samples are properly identified so that their integrity is maintained. Laboratory sample handling, storage, and documentation procedures will follow U.S. EPA Contract Laboratory Program (CLP) protocols. Protocols are taken from the current statements of work for organic and inorganic analyses. Frequency for equipment blank collection will be based on the number of samples collected each day. Equipment blanks will be collected at a frequency of 5 percent or once per day when '10 or more samples are collected per day. When less than 10 samples are collected per day, this batch of samples will be submitted with the samples and equipment blank collected on the following day. Field duplicate samples will be collected at least once per day for each sample parameter (and for each media type, if more than one sampled per day) or at a 15 percent frequency, whichever is more frequent, to assess sampling variation. Travel blanks will be used to assess the potential for cross contamination by volatile organic compounds during sample transport. A travel blank will be included in each shipping container that contains one or more samples to be analyzed for volatile organic compounds. Laboratory method blanks, used to assess the level of laboratory background contamination, will be analyzed at a frequency specified by the analytical method. 4.3.2 Comparability Data developed during the investigation should be either directly comparable or comparable within defined limitations to literature, existing data, or any applicable criteria. Comparability of the data will be maintained by using EPA- defined procedures in both the sampling activities and the analytical methods used. The sampling methods are addressed in the SMVP, FSP (Appendix A), and the sampling activities will be described in each OUMP. The compounds, analytical methods, and target detection limits for this project are discussed in Section 8.0. Actual detection limits may vary during the analysis depending on the nature of the particular sample. 4.3.3 Precision B.4.4 August 1992 sit. M~mnagrnrm MfanAPP Revision 2 Ealon Air Force Om. Precision is a measure of the variability of the data when more than one measurement is made on the same sample. Variability is commonly attributable to sampling activities and/or chemical analysis. For duplicate measurements, precision can be expressed as the relative percent difference (RPD). Analysis of field duplicate samples measures the precision of sampling procedures. Analysis of laboratory duplicate samples will serve to measure the precision of laboratory procedures. Laboratory duplicates will be analyzed at a frequency recommended by the analytical method or 5 percent, whichever is more frequent. The objectives for laboratory precision for the parameters to be analyzed for in the Eielson AFB SMP are shown in Tables B.4.1 through 5.4.4. The frequency at which field duplicate samples should be collected is 10 percent. Field duplicate collection is addressed in the FSP. The frequency at which laboratory duplicate samples are analyzed is specified by the analytical method. 4.3.4 Accuracy Accuracy is a measure of the error between reported test results and the true sample concentration. Insomuch as true sample concentrations are not known, accuracy is usually inferred from recovery data as determined by sample spiking. For the metals and conventional parameter analyses, the laboratories will analyze samples spiked with a known concentration of a reference standard to assess laboratory accuracy. For the organic analyses, every sample will be spiked with surrogate compounds and selected samples will be spiked in duplicate with selected target compound list (TCL) compounds known as matrix spike/matrix spike duplicates (MS/MSDs). Perfect accuracy is 100 percent recovery; acceptable accuracies for the parameters of interest to this project are shown in Tables 5.4.1 through 6.4.5. Matrix spikes will be analyzed at a frequency recommended by the analytical method or 5 percent, whichever is more frequent. Table B.4.5 lists the QA~s for analyzing free product. These modified analytical methods are used to confirm the source of contamination. The qualitative results of these analyses will be used to evaluate treatment, disposal, or reuse options. B.4.5 August 1992 Site Management PfsanAPP Revision 2 BEfson Air Forc Base 4.3.5 Completeness Completeness is defined as the total number of samples taken for which acceptable analytical data are generated divided by the total number of samples analyzed and multiplied by 100. An overall completeness goal for this project has been set at 95 percent. B.4.6 August 1992 N N e 0~~~~~E o~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~U 0 in in in UO toiOi n U) C~C~CLN N NCY YCMN< 8 000 in i inNNNNN) N E3 CLE *1 ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~_M 0 ECL a C~ 0 0 0 RRR 000C 5w00 0 +1 +1 +1 r+i +i +i +i +i+14Ii' 5 E~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ Lp~~~~L 0)C *M -j 0 E'o1~O-c L)C; - "r ~ cE og cm :E ' rL~~%'E 40 r~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~a a D a O( (V w R C 0 C ~~~~~~~~~w~~~~w~~~o F~~ in 0 ~~~~~~~~~sX~. f- In I * co CDO o iF 0 40a 2 Ln C 2~~C o~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~c *5 ow~tc~ 0 ~~~~~~~~~§~~~~~~<2 ~~~~~~co0i F 0~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~0 Oh-WE~~~~~~~~~~~~~0- ~~0- vc c (U~ 0 ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ 0 wD w 0O V E > F- Cl) F- 0. C) F- aF-o~7 co'R iSi sn CL Eru C 0 I ~~~C 0)0)0 R)02890 0u)um) 'MO0'on 0 R)C E. 0 0 tm~~~~~~~~~~0i - ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~0 * Z O_ILOLIn O U)U U) fLO LO LO LID toLO LO fl)fIfLflf In0. a.E a. a. N N NCMNNC NIN NNCJ MNNNN 4NNNCMNNN a) Om (0a .4.4.4'7 '7 * .. , w W E...j ~ 0 U)LI ULbU)L OU)L6 L OUU))UtftfLfltflf InC)Dc * 0)~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ a. a W E E -c. Ca.C 0 00000000000000000 -C I *fl~~j~~ -j N\I N NNNNNNNNal ~~ Ou~~~oo~+1 +I + +I +1+I +I+I + +I +I+I + +I +I+I +I +I+I * C~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ C .2 C0 A-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~0 4tf ~~~ a. a. C IL 0 0000000 0 0 * K ~~C U1) .4 00000 Lb Ln V 0LfU)OCO Cg 0 - -~C - _o-0q -000 0:3 - m~~~~#0 cci a La 2 - - N3 r Eu a-E o ~C V~~~~~~~~~1'V CV0 N " - w coLnC.666C 0 L toff d'c'~~~~~~02 02~~2 l a. a. C w 0 ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~U~0L Cu 4 10 cur _~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ E _ c6~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~E0 = a C0 c toQWaO FE-- r_ a E~ EU' a)C - C)O~~~E~~u~~Z~~3rrE~~t~~t0r MG)o r w Ca i-i-C.)a. cz-i-I waa)Z 0, ste Maagmentm msan-APP Revision 2 Eton Air F amea TABLE B.4.3. Alternate Volatile Organic and Semivolatile Organic Compound Methods for Analyzing Soil and Sediment Samples ______Target Detection Precision b Accuracy? Umit (Relative % (% Spike Completeness Parameter Method (pg/kg) Difference) Recovery) (% Purgeable halogenated 8010 1.0 25 59-172 95 volatile organics ______Purgeable aromatic volatile 8020 1.0 25 59-142 95 organics Including ketones laos1 Phenols 8040 150 50 11-114 95 Polynuclear aromatic 8100 150 50 31-142 95 hydrocarbons ____ aDetection limit for ketones. bTarget values with no matrix effects and assuming levels spiked is significantly greater than the native sample constituents. B.4.9 August'1992 Site Manageent&Pfan-CIAPP Revision 2 Belson Air Forc Bas. T-ABLE ~B.4.4. Alternate Volatile Organic and Semlvolatile Organic Compound Methods for Analyzing Groundwater and Surface Water Samples ______ Target Precision b Accuracy" Detection (relative (percent Umit percent spike Completeness Parameter Method (pg/I) difference) recovery) (% Purgeable halogenated 8010 1.0 20 61 -145 95 volatile organics I ______Purgeable aromatic volatile 8020 1.0 20 75-130 95 organics Including ketones 1______a Phenols 8040 10.0 50 9-123 95 Polynuclear aromatic 8100 10.0 35 26-127 95 1hydrocarbons I I______8Detectlon limit for ketones. bTarget values with no matrix effects and assuming levels spiked is significantly greater than the native sample constituents. B.4. 1O August 1992 U S~ C4 . c~~~~~~~~~~ S cue~~~~~~~~~c U I~~~J i __~U 19.9Lo6 CD f ~~~~~~~Ej a 0I 'C a Cs 0 0 0 -- 0 1 - - X. -- ~0 0~~ E &2 00 0 4) LO ')E0. rtg L]6 rprsa _IL_ 6J g _ _ She. Managemen PkVaAPP Revisin 2 Ea4aon Ar Force Bat. . ~5.0 SAMPLING PROCEDURES Detailed sampling procedures for soils, sediment, surface water, groundwater, and biota to be followed at Eielson AFB are described in the SMPR FSP. Sample number, type, frequency, location, and other considerations shall be as defined in the FSP prepared for the specific OUMP. Sampling procedures are designed to ensure that (1) all samples collected at the site are consistent with project objectives, and (2) samples are identified, handled, and transported in a manner such that the data are representative of the actual site conditions and that information is not lost in sample transferral. The data collected will ultimately be used to determine the extent and nature of contamination at the site in support of subsequent site activities. If biota samples are required for a site specific QU, method of collection, types of samples, analytical methods, and DQOs will be discussed in the site specific OU QAPP. To meet project objectives, special consideration is given to sample procurement, sample containers, holding times and preservation, field duplicates, equipment decontamination, blanks (equipment and travel), sample documentation, transport, and storage. Trace contaminants from sources external to the sample must be minimized through the use of good sampling techniques and proper cleaning of sampling equipment that comes in contact with the material being sampled. The use of standard operating procedures detailed in the FSP minimizes collection errors including cross contamination and promotes the reproducibility of the data. Quality assurance objectives for sample collection will be accom- plished by a combination of the following items: Duplicate Samples. Duplicates will be submitted to evalu- ate the precision of sampling procedures. The number of field duplicates required for this project will be 5 percent of the total of each sample parameter for each media type (groundwater, surface water, sediment, and solids), and/ or one duplicate for each sample parameter for each media type per day, whichever is more frequent. B.5.1 August 1992 Site Managemtent Pa-APRevision 2 Eialon Air Force Base * Blank Samples. Frequency for equipment blank collection will be based on the number of samples collected each day. Equipment blanks will be collected at a frequency of 5 percent or once per day when 10 or more samples are collected per day. When less than 10 samples are collected per day, this batch of samples will be submitted with the samples and equipment blank collected on the following day. All equipment blanks collected for each sampling method will be analyzed. One travel blank consisting of organic-free water will be collected and carried through the sample handling and analysis procedures. A travel blank will be included in each shipping container containing one or more samples to be analyzed for volatile organic compounds (VOCs). All travel blanks submitted for analysis will be analyzed. One container blank will be submitted for analysis with each lot of containers used. * Chain-of-Custody. Described in Section 6.0. * Laboratory QA. Analytical procedures will be evaluated by analyzing preparation or method blanks, spiked, duplicate, and laboratory control samples. Other evaluation criteria are discussed in Sections 4.0, 7.0, 8.0, and 10.0. *Data Validation. The analytical data may undergo a data validation in order to assess the data quality (see Sec- tion 9.0). 5.1 SAMPLE CONTAINERS, PRESERVATION, AND HOLDING TIMES Container, preservative, and holding time requirements are listed in Tables 8.5.1 and B.5.2. Holding time starts at the date of sample collection in the field. All samples will be maintained at a sample temperature of 4 0 C or less. Immediately after collection, samples for dissolved metals analysis will be delivered to a close support laboratory where they will be filtered using a pressure filtration device. Following filtration, these samples will be preserved with nitric acid. Samples for other analytes will be preserved in the field as required by standard methods. B.5.2 August 1992 sit. Managunait Pmsn-aAPP Revislon 2 Mdason Air FamSeBn al ~~~~TABLE 9.5.1. Container, Preservative, and Holding Time Requirements for Soil and Sediment Samples ______Parameter Container Preservative Holding Time Volatile Organic Compounds 1 4-az glass Coal 40C 14 days (MethodCLP/8240) ______Aromatic Volatile Compounds 1 4-az glass Coal 40C 14 days (M ethod_8020) ______Nonhalogenated Volatile Compounds I 4-oz glass Cool 400 14 days (Method 8010) ______Semnivolatile Organic Compounds 1 16-az glass Cool 4CC 14 days until extraction (Method CLP/8270) ______40 days after extraction Phenols (Method 8040) 1 16-az glass Cool 40C 14 days until extraction 40 days after extraction Polynuclear Aromatic Hydrocarbons 1 16-oz glass Cool 4CC 14 days until extraction (Method 8100) ______40 days after extraction Pesticide/PO~s 1I8-az glass Cool 04C 14 days until extraction 40 days after extraction Total Petroleum Hydrocarbons 1I4-az glass Coal 40C 28 days (Method_3550/418.1) ______Metals (CLP) 1I8-or glassa Cool 40C 6 months . ~~~Mercury, Hg (CLP) I 8-az glass Cool 040 28 days pH (Method 9045) 1 8-az glassb Cool 40C Immediate Total Solids (CLP) 1 8-az glass Cool 040 7 days Chloride, Cl (Method 300) 1 8-az glass Cool 04C 28 days Fluoride, F (Method 340.1) 1 8-oz glass Cool 040 28 days Sulfate, $04 (Method 300) 1 8-az glass Coal 04C 28 days Sulfide, S (Method 376.1) 1 8-oz glass Coal 04C 7 days Nitrate, as N (Method 300) 1 8-oz glass Cool 04C 2 days Chmcal Oxgen Demand, COD 1I8-az glass Coal 040 28 days (M ethod_410.4) ______Total Organic Carbon, TOO 1I8-az glass Coal 040 28 days (Method 415.1) aMercury can be taken from metals container. b~ll conventional parameters can be taken from one 8-ounce glass jar. B. 5.3 August'1992 Sit Management flan-aAPP Revision 2 Eldeon Air For"e Base TABLE 9.5.2. Container, Preservative, and Holding Time Requirements for Groundwater and Surface Water Samples Sheet 1 of 2 Parameter Container Preservative Holding lime Volatile Organic Compounds 2 40-mi glass Cool 40C + HCL 14 days (Method CLP/8240) TLS pH <2 ______Aromatic Volatile Compounds 3 40-mi glass Cool 400 + HCL 14 days (Method 8020) TLS pH <2 Nonhalogenated Volatile 2 40-ml glass Cool 40C + HOL. 14 days Compounds (Method 8010) TLS pH <2 ______Semivolatile Organic 2 2.5 liter Cool 40C 7 days until extraction Compounds (Method CLP/8270) amberglass 40 days after extraction TLC ______Phenols (Method 8040) 1 2.5 liter Cool 40C 7 days until extraction amberglass 40 days after extraction TLC ______Polynuclear Aromatic 1 2.5 liter Cool 40C 7 days until extraction Hydrocarbons (Method 8100) arnberglass 40 days after extraction TLC ______Pesticide/PCBs 12.5 liter Cool 04C 7 days until extraction amberglass 40 days after extraction TLC ______ Total Petroleum Hydrocarbons 11I-liter glass Cool 400 + H2S04 7 days (Method 418.1) pH <2 Total Metals (CLP) 1 1-liter Cool 40C + 1-ml 6 months Mercury polyethylene' HN0 3 pH <2 28 days Alkalinity (Method 310.1) 1 1-ifter Cool 400 14 days ______polyethyleneb ______Hardness (Method 130.2) 28 days TDS (Method 160.1) ______7 days TSS (Method 160.2) ______7 days Chloride, Cl (Method 300) 28 days Fluoride, F (Method 340.1) ______28 days Sulfate, SO4 (M ethod 300) ______28 days Nitrate, as N (Method 300) ______48 hours Nitrite, as N (Method 300) ______48 hours 0 SOD5, Total (Method 405.1) 1 11-ifter Cool 4 C 48 hours ______po ly e th y en ______I______ B.5.4 August 1992 Sit. Management Pfan-APP Revision 2 Neoson Alr Forc. Base TAB3LE 8.5.2. Container, Preservative, and Holding Time Requirements for Groundwater and Surface Water Samples Sheet 2 of 2 Parameter Container Preservative Holding Time 0 Ammonia, as N (Method 350.2) 1 1-lfter Cool 4 C+ H2 804 28 days 0 ______polyethylene pH <2 Chemical Oxygen Demand, Cool 400+ H2S04 28 days COD (Method 410.4) ______pH <2 Total Organic Carbon, TOC I 250-mi glass Cool 400+ H2S04 28 days (Method 415.1) ______pH <2 Phosphorus, Ortho 1 250-mI glass Cool 40 filter 48 hours (Method 300) TLC Immediately ______Phosphorus, Total (Method 300) 1 250-ml glass Cool 40 + 1-mi 28 days ______TLC H 2 S 04 /l ______Sulfide, S (Method 376.1) 500 ml Cool 40 + Zn 7 days polyethylene Acetate and NaOH ______pH > 9 aMercury can be taken from metals container. bAil nonpreserved parameters can be taken from one container except SOD. 0 c ll H2S04 preserved parameters can be taken from one container except TOC. Notes: Additional containers will be required for collecting MS/MSD samples. TLS = Teflon-lined septum. TLC = Teflon-lined cap. B.5.5 August 1992 Site Mangagment Man-GA PP Revision 2 Ejeson Air Foace Base Surface water samples will be analyzed for acid-soluble metals as well as total metals. The samples for acid soluble metals are acidified in the field to a pH between 1 .5 and 2.0. Then they are filtered in the laboratory prior to analysis for TAL metals.lf air sample collection and analysis is required for this RU/FS, the method of collection and sample containers will be discussed in each OUMP FSP and QAPP, respectively. B.5.6 August 1992 She Msnaganwd Plan-QAPP Remnion 2 Belson Air Fam. Bee . ~6.0 SAMPLE CUSTODY AND DOCUMENT CONTROL PROCEDURES Sample custody and document control procedures function to identify and document the tracking and handling of samples and sample documents. Samples and documents must be under custody so that their possession is traceable from sample collection, transfer or transportation, analysis, disposal, archiving, and filing. Chain-of-custody and document control procedures track sample possession in the field and laboratory and document the requested analyses (see FSP, Figure A.3.8). Custody of a sample is defined by the following criteria: * The sample is in a person's possession or in view after being in their possession. * The sample is in a person's possession and is locked up or transferred to a designated secure area or sealed to prevent tampering by that person. 6.1 FIELD CUSTODY PROCEDURES To satisfy custody requirements, field custody procedures should provide as a minimum: * field sampler responsibility until the samples are transferred * unique field sample identification including sample number, location, and description * sample tags, sampling logs, and chain-of-custody forms with essential information and signatures of receivers and relinquishers * shipping in sealed and secured shipping containers to the offsite laboratory is an example of a sample custody seal (Figure B.6.1). The steps involved in sending samples to the laboratory and the routing of forms are shown in Figure B.6.2. B.6.1 August 1992 ~W CUSTODY SEAL ~X~l2ZJDate Signature 1 ~~~~~FIGURE 8.6.1 Sample Custody Seal Site Management Pian, Eieisan Air Force Base ii K ~~ ~ ~ She Management MS I G~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ft ~Revision 2 Heirfon Air Form Base . ~6.2 LABORATORY CUSTODY PROCEDURES The offsite laboratory shall use procedures essentially equivalent to thase listed below to meet the requirements of this section. Ta satisfy custody requirements, the laboratory custody procedures should provide as a minimum: * designation of laboratory sample and document custodian~s) * inspection of sample containers for conditions that would compromise sample integrity * sample logbook to acknowledge sample relinquishment and receipt (date, time, signatures), field identification, sample description (matrix, characteristics), sample type (grab, composite), analysis request, corresponding sequential laboratory identification number, and sample disposal information * security for sample storage by laboratory access con- straints, by accompanying visitors, by locking unattended laboratory facilities or sample storage facilities, or by sealing the samples with sample custody seals * sample tracking using sequential laboratory identification numbers on work and data sheets, instrument logbooks, analysis containers, instrument output, and data handling and reporting hard copy; tracking is sufficiently documented to enable others to reconstruct the analysis should the analyst be unable to do so * internal chain-of-custody procedures through analyst responsibility for sample dispersement and timely return to secure storage; through check-in/check-out procedures for any laboratory operation * external chain-of-custody procedures for transfer of samples to disposal location B.6.3 August 1992 t~ ~~ z~~~~ CC~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ oow~~w tLC~ < (L~~~~~~~~~~~~~ U) W I~ ~ ~ ~ ~~~~~~~~~ a.0~~~~~~~ 0 m S~~~~~~~~ o~~~~I- w «-Jo~~~~~~~~~~ ~~~~- c coz 0 Z~~~~~~~~~~-E 2w o00' cnw :pLM V)~~~~~~~ ow :Z~a O0o 0.0~~~ m u -CD- Z~m O~=)( 2 W zn- -0 - wz0 -J 2~~W Q.Z ~ O W 0 (n~~~~~~~ Sie Managemen Plan-OAPP Revison 2 Udeon Air Forc A&"e * sample archiving for purposes of reanalysis, more extensive or confirmatory analysis at outside laboratory, evidence retention, etc.; specifying storage procedures, duration, and disposal authorization * sample disposal procedures in accordance with authorized instructions and environmental regulations. 6.3 DOCUMENT CONTROL The offsite laboratory shall be expected to have a document control program that meets the requirements of this section. Document control assures that all documents for a specified project and group of samples are accounted for when the project is completed. Accountable documents include sample and instrument logbooks, chain-of-custody records, raw and final data (bench sheets, instrument output, computer hard copy), instrument calibration data, significant daily journal entries, calculation and data reduction forms, reports and QC summaries, reviews and review summaries, correspondence, and all other analytical information. To satisfy custody requirements, document control procedures should provide as a minimum: * recording in a clear, comprehensive manner using indelible ink * corrections to data and logbooks made by drawing a single line through the error and initialing and dating the correction * consistency before release of analytical results by assem- bling and cross checking the information on the sample tags, custody records, bench sheets, personal and instru- ment logs, and other relevant data to verify that data pertaining to each sample are consistent throughout the record * document archiving in project records in accordance with contract requirements for retention (storage location, mini- mum time, hard copy, photocopy, microfiche, etc.) B.6.5 August 1992 Sit. Management Ptan-aAPP Revision 2 Ekeson Air Fonw. Base * observations and results (data) identified with the project number, date, and analyst, and reviewer signatures on each line, page, or book as appropriate * data in bound books or sheaf of numbered pages, instru- ment tracings or hard copy, or microcomputer hard copy * data tracking through document consolidation and project inventory of accountable documents: sample logbook, analysis data book, daily journal, instrument logbook, narrative and numerical final reports, etc. B.6.6 August 1992 Sit. Management Pftn-APP Revision 2 Be/son Air Fre BAme . ~7.0 CALIBRATION PROCEDURES AND FREQUENCY Calibration procedures are essential for proper performance of field and laboratory instruments. Calibration procedures function as the process that ties the analytical system to a known reference material in order to identify and/or quantify the analyte and to determine how the analytical system is performing. All instruments and equipment used during this project will be operated, calibrated, and maintained according to the manufacturer's guidelines and recommendations. 7.1 INITIAL CALIBRATION Instruments used by the offsite laboratory will be operated and maintained in accordance with the manufacturer's guidelines and recommendations. This information is combined with the analytical method requirements to form specific calibration procedure. In general, an initial calibration consists of developing a one- to five-point calibration curve using reference standards for each parameter analyzed. The curve contains a zero point and other points resulting from a serial dilution of the standard. The calibration will be performed at multiple levels to establish the usable range. In any event, the curve is extended over the entire range of measurements encountered to ensure that the analyses are being performed in the linear portion of the curve. Calibration includes a lowlevel standard to verify detection limit sensitivity. The initial calibration is verified by comparing instrument output to manufacturer criteria or previous calibrations to help ensure optimal performance of the instrument. Initial calibration is performed on a frequency schedule required by the analytical method. In general, it is performed with each analytical batch of samples at a minimum of once per day. It may be performed more frequently depending on instrument stability. 6.7.1 August 1992 She* Management Ma.-a APP Revision 2 BEison Air Force Base 7.2 CONTINUING CALIBRATION Continuing calibration is performed during the analytical process to verify that the initial calibration is still applicable. Continuing calibration is performed using check standards), though a replication of the initial calibration may be required instead. The check standard is a specific concentration used repeatedly. Without perfect precision, calibration will change by some degree. Calibration criteria are applied to determine if the instrument is performing acceptably. The criteria are often expressed as a range of percent difference from the initial calibration value. When continuing calibration meets the criteria, the normal measurement process continues. When criteria are not met, the problem is investigated, corrected, and verified before recalibrating and reanalyzing the samples analyzed since the last in-control, initial, or continuing calibration. 7.3 CALIBRATION QC In addition to verifying optimal instrument operation, calibration procedures include other QC requirements to assure the integrity of the measurement process. Operation, calibration, and maintenance of the instruments will be performed by personnel who have been properly trained in these procedures. As noted previously, these persons will perform the calibration on an established, routine schedule throughout the duration of the project. Calibration will be documented in an instrument logbook that contains: * date of calibration * identification of standards used * acceptance criteria * personnel performing the calibration * results of the initial and continuing calibration * problems and corrective actions * preventive and remedial maintenance * hand-recorded digital or analog data. B.7.2 August 1992 Sit. Managemen flan--&PP Revision 2 Saigon Air Forc Bee Calibration standards will be procured from identified sources traceable to U.S. EPA or NIST standard reference materials. The purest grade of concentrated standard readily available will be used in preparing concentrated and diluted interim and working standards. Documentation of standards preparation will occur in the instrument logbook or a standards logbook containing most of the same essential information. B.7.3 August 1992 Shte Management Pftan-PP Revision 2 Eelson Mr Fore B... 8.0 ANALYTICAL PROCEDURES Criteria for appropriate method selection are discussed with the DOOs in Section 4.0. Specific DQOs are discussed in the data needs section and the QAPP for each OUMP. The selected methods for each OUMP must satisfy the objectives to produce data of suitable quality for its intended use. The various pollutant parameters that are anticipated to be encountered, their analytical methods, and target detection limits are listed in Tables B.4.1 through B.4.5. The groundwater and surface water parameters to be analyzed for are shown in Table 8.4.2. The sediment and soils parameters to be analyzed are shown in Table 6.4.1. The target detection limits shown are those to be expected when there are no matrix interferants. Tables B.4.3 and 8.4.4 list alternate volatile organic and semivolatile organic compound analytical methods and target detection limits. These methods may be requested by the project manager or field team leader for the OUMPs. Alternate methods may be used when an analysis list of volatile organic (Method 8240) or semnivolatile organic compounds (Method 8270) is not required or when definitive confirmation is S ~~~~~~not required. The methods listed on Tables 6.4.3 and B.4.4 are performed by gas chromatography and analyze for a specific group of target analytes. Table 8.4.5 lists modified EPA methods and target detection limits for the characterization of free product. 5 8~~~~~~~~~~~.8.1 August 1992 Site Management Pian-OAPP Revision 2 Elelson Air Force Base 9.0 DATA REDUCTION, VALIDATION, AND REPORTING The proper management of collected data is of equal importance to proper analysis and custody procedures in assuring that the data represent the environment from which the sample was taken. Data reduction, validation, and reporting procedures function to control data handling from field through lab and data processing to the point where data are turned over to the data user. Validity of anal- ytical data will be determined based on precision, accuracy, and completeness objectives, quality assurance objectives, and data assessment procedures. Each analyst is responsible for the recording and reduction of all raw data associated with the analyses. Equations and calculations for data reduction will be performed in accordance with the proce- dures detailed in the analytical methods. Computations and recorded resuhts will carry the common units of measurement from the methods. Data reduction will be performed using a programmable calculator or microcomputer as applicable to the analytical method. The com- putational algorithms will be periodically verified through cross cal- culation (identical and reordered hand calculations). The units of the results will be verified using valueless units and canceling them during the progression of the calculation to see if the resulting units match the normal reporting units of concentration. As part of the reduction process, the analyst will proofread all transcriptions in order to check the accuracy of data transfer, whether from handwritten form to handwritten form or to microcom- puter form. After reduction, analytical values and qualifiers will be manually entered by the analyst into a program data base on a microcomputer. The offsite laboratory will be required to provide copies of all raw laboratory data including, but not necessarily limited to: raw * ~~~~~~chromatograms, mass spectra, tuning performance, sample prep- aration logs, initial and continuing calibrations, blanks, surrogate spike, matrix spike recoveries, laboratory duplicates, matrix spike/ matrix spike duplicates, laboratory control samples, and a case narrative describing any difficulties or unusual occurrences related . ~~CVOR25904.51 B.9.1 August'1992 Site Management Plan-QAPP Revision 2 Ejelson Air Force Bas. to the samples. These QA/OC deliverables will be provided in accordance with CLIP Statements of Work requirements when CLP 0 analytical methods are used. For non-CLP methods, the above requirements will be provided. The project quality control coordinator (0CC) or designated per- sonnel will validate analytical data as necessary using applicable protocol from the current version of the Contract Laboratory Program (CLP) Functional Guidelines for Evaluating Organic and Inorganic Analyses. The data validation process will not be a CLP Level IV review evaluating 100 percent of the TAL and TCL dlata. A preliminary data validation will include an evaluation of the above QA'QC data provided by the laboratory. Tuning performance, initial and continuing calibration, blanks, surrogate spikes, matrix spike recoveries, laboratory duplicates, matrix spike/matrix spike duplicates, laboratory control samples, and approximately 10 percent of the raw data will be assessed using the current version of the CLP Functional Guidelines for Evaluating Organic and Inorganic Analyses. The level of data validation required will be determined by the project manager to match the data quality requirements of the project. Non-CLP methods will be evaluated using the CLP Functional Guidelines where applicable. Otherwise, non-CLP data will be eval- uated for the above QA/OC parameters using precision and accu- racy control limits set forth in Section 4 and evaluation procedures required by the relevant analytical method. Field QA/OC including field blanks and field duplicates will be evalu- ated applying laboratory acceptance criteria as provisional control limits. Field data will also be reviewed for internal consistency. Data that are questionable will be flagged with an "r." When critical data points are identified, a CLP Level IV review of 100 percent of the TAIL and TCL data will be performed. Upon completion of the review, the 0CC will be responsible for developing a QA/QC report describing the usability of the analytical data based on QA/QC criteria. All data will be stored and main- tained according to the standard procedures of CH2M HILL. Sub- contracted laboratories selected will be required to maintain and deliver data using similar procedures. CVOR2S9tO44 51 B.9.2 August 1992 Site Management Plan -OAPP Revision 2 Se/son Air Force Base As part of the data review and validation process, a statistician will review the data from the offsite laboratory. The statistician will select the appropriate techniques for data analysis at the time of the review. This review will assess the comparability of the data from the different sampling methods and different laboratories. Eval- uation may include an assessment of the differences between the two data sets, an overall assessment of precision and accuracy, and other characteristics the reviewer may deem significant to meet the project objectives. * ~~CVOR259iD44,51 B.9.3 August 1992 sit. Management Pan-APP Revision 2 EaWaon Air PanSe8. . ~1 0.0 INTERNAL QUALITY CONTROL Internal OC help monitor and document the performance of sam- pling and laboratory activities. QC checks function to ensure that the QC process is in place that establishes the quality of the data produced. The QC acceptance criteria for field sampling and laboratory analyses are method specific. The following QC checks will be performed for each OU. Their frequency are dependent upon the DQOs and the FSP written for each OUMVP. To ensure that data is of known quality, the following field and laboratory OC checks will be implemented. 10.1 FIELD SAMPLING QC CHECKS Sampling checks will be implemented through the following kinds of samples submitted to the laboratory as unknowns or blind samples: * At least one blind duplicate sample of each sample parameter (for each media if more than one sampled per day) will be collected each day, or a minimum of 5 percent, whichever is greater. * At least one blind equipment blank will be collected and analyzed for each type of sampling device used per day. Frequency for equipment blank collection will be based on the number of samples collected each day. Equipment blanks will be collected at a frequency of 5 percent or once per day when 10 or more samples are collected per day. When less than 10 samples are collected per day, this batch of samples will be submitted with the samples and equpiment blank collected on the following day. *One set of travel blanks will be prepared and analyzed for each container containing volatile organic compounds. *One container blank will be submitted for analysis for each lot of sample containers used. B.10.1 August 1992 Sie Menagemaut Pl&an-APP Revision 2 Eiakon Air Fow. Sne 10.2 LABORATORY ANALYSIS QC CHECKS * For the organic compounds analyses, CLP QA/QC require- ments will be followed for GC and GC/MS tuning, calibration curve generation, method blank analysis, surrogate spike analysis, and MS/MSD analysis. * For the metals analyses, CLP QA/QC requirements will be followed for calibration, calibration verification, blank analysis, spiked sample analysis, duplicate sample analysis, and laboratory control sample analysis. * For the conventional analyses, the following QA/QC requirements will be used. - A multipoint calibration curve will be generated for each parameter to be measured. As appropriate for each parameter, a new calibration curve will be generated daily or with each batch of samples analyzed, or a midrange calibration-curve sample will be analyzed daily or with each batch of samples analyzed. - Oneset ofmethod blanks will be analyzed daily at a 5 percent frequency or one per set of samples, which- ever is more frequent. - A duplicate sample will be analyzed at a 5 percent fre- quency or one per set of samples, whichever is more frequent. - Where applicable, a spiked sample will be analyzed at a 5 percent frequency or one per set of samples, whichever is more frequent. - An EPA QC sample or National Bureau of Standards (NBS) certified sample will be analyzed (if available) daily or with each batch of samples analyzed. B.10.2 August 1992 Site NMaonaemn ffp-aA PP Revision 2 Edkon AirFor Aweta . ~1 1.0 PERFORMANCE AND SYSTEMS AUDITS A system audit consists of an onsite review of a laboratory's quality assurance system and its physical facilities for sampling, calibration, measurement, and maintenance of supporting documentation. Performance audits are a systematic check of laboratory operations and measurement systems by comparing routinely obtained data with independently obtained data. CH2MV HILL Environmental Laboratory (at Redding, California) will perform the offsite laboratory analyses for toxic organic pollutants, metals, and general chemical parameters for analytical work contracted to CH2MV HILL. Performance audits are an integral part of CH2MV HILL's laboratory standard operating pro- cedures. Audit programs in which the laboratory routinely participates include the following: * U.S. EPA Contract Laboratory Blind Audit Program * U.S. EPA Safe Drinking Water Act Performance Evaluation Study * *~~~~~~~State of California Hazardous Waste Testing Laboratory Certification Details of CH2M HILL's audit results will be provided upon request. A systems audit was performed by Bob Viens at the CH2MV HILL Quality Analytical Laboratory in Redding, California, on April 22 and 23, 1992. The details of this audit are also available on request. Performance audits or systems audits will be performed as necessary throughout the RI/FS project by the QCC. These audits will be performed in the event a data quality problem arises or QA results require verification. These audits will also be performed at the request of the agencies involved in the FFA. 8.1 1.1 August 1992 Sit. MaOnaemNt No-aP Revision 2 Edson Air Force Base O ~12.0 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE Routine maintenance procedures and schedules for sampling equipment are described in the manufacturers' instruction manuals. All records of inspection and maintenance will be dated and documented in the field notebook. Maintenance procedures and schedules for all analytical instru- ments will be in strict accordance with the recommendations of the equipment manufacturers. Routine maintenance will be performed by laboratory personnel as needed. Specialized inspection and maintenance of major equipment items will be performed by trained service personnel from the manufacturer in accordance with instrument service contracts. All records of inspection and maintenance will be dated and documented in permanently bound (with consecutively numbered pages) laboratory record books. B.12.1 August 1992 Sit. Manaemente PWP,-aAPP Revision 2 Smfson Air Forc Ba. O ~13.0 DATA ASSESSMENT PROCEDURES Data will be assessed for their precision, accuracy, and completeness. For a more thorough presentation of this statistical approach, see EPA's Data Quality Objectives document. 13.1 PRECISION The relative percent difference (RPD) is used to assess the preci- sion of the sampling and the analytical method and is calculated using the following equation. RPD =XS - XD x 100 (XS + XD) 2 where: XSis the analytical result in mg/I or ppm obtained for the sample XD is the analytical result in mg/I or ppm obtained for the duplicate sample 13.2 ACCURACY The accuracy of the data set is determined from the analysis of spiked samples. The accuracy (or percent recovery) is calculated using the following equation: A = SS- X 0 T ~Data Quality Objectives for Remedial Response Activities, Volume 1-- Development Process, EPA 540/G-87/003A (OSWER) (Directive 9335.O-7B3), March 1987. B.13.1 August 1992 Site Management Plan-aAPP Revision 2 Edsotn Air Force Base where: $Sis the analytical result in mg/I or ppm obtained for the spiked sample XSis the analytical result in mg/I or ppm obtained for the sample T is the true value of the added spike in mg/I or ppm The overall accuracy is the arithmetic mean of all spiked samples. It is calculated using the following equation: n r AT n where: A is the mean percent recovery or overall accuracy A1 is the individual recovery for each spike n is the number of spiked samples 13.3 COMPLETENESS Completeness of the data is determined using the following equation: Completeness ()=Number of Samples Having Acceptable Data Number of Samples Analyzed x 100 B.13.2 August 1992 sit. Mangenemat PVn-aAPP Revision 2 &dson A& Foe. Baa. . ~14.0 CORRECTIVE ACTIONS If a quality control audit of laboratory or field procedures detects unacceptable conditions or data, the Contractor's Project Manager will be responsible for developing and initiating corrective action. The QAM will be notified if the nonconformance is significant or requires special expertise. Corrective action may include the following: * reanalyzing the samples, if holding-time criteria permit * resampling and analyzing * evaluating and amending sampling and analytical procedures * accepting data and acknowledging level of uncertainty or inaccuracy by flagging the data and providing an explana- tion for its qualification. Documentation of corrective action steps will include problem identification, investigation responsibility assignment, investigation, action taken to eliminate the problem, increased monitoring of the effectiveness of the corrective action, and verification of problem elimination. B.14.1 August 1992 Me. Managemen Pvln-aAPP Revision 2 Edson Air Fewe Ban . ~15.0 QUALITY ASSURANCE REPORTS TO MANAGEMENT Data validation results and other quality assurance issues are reported to the CH2M HILL Project Manager and appropriate members of the project team as they arise. The results of the quality assurance work will be summarized in QA reports. The purpose of a QA report is to document implementation of the QAPP. The QA report will be attached as an appendix to the operable unit or site report. It will include: * QA management (any changes) * all QA problems and recommended solutions * corrective actions taken for any problems previously identified * results of performance or systems audits if they were performed * assessment of analytical data in terms of precision, accu- racy, and completeness and assignment of data qualifiers, as necessary *OA-related training. Copies of this report will be submitted to CH2M HILL's Project Manager for their review. The QAM will discuss with the CH2M HILL Project Manager any corrective actions that need to be taken. B.15.1 August 1992 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROJECT PLAN ADDENDUM EJELSON AIR FORCE BASE QUALITY ASSURANCE PROJECT PLAN ADDENDUM EIELSON AIR FORCE BASE 1.0 INTRODUCTION This addendum documents variances from and additions to the Site-wide QAPP that apply when project activities at Elelson Air Force Base are conducted by Pacific Northwest Laboratory (PNL). Additional variations or project requirements will be documented in event-specific sampling and analysis plans (SAPs). The following comments reference the corresponding section in the preceding QAPP (Appendix B of the Site Management Plan). A. ITEMS AT VARIANCE WITH THE SMP-OAPP 2.0 PROJECT DESCRIPTION Descriptions of specific project activities are provided in Operable Unit Management Plans or event-specific SAPs. Project objectives include definition of the nature and extent of environmental contamination at Eielson Air Force Base, and identification and implementation of remedial actions that will result in the protection of human health and the environment. 3.0 PROJECT ORGANIZATION AND RESPONSIBILITIES The Battelle Environmental Management Operations (EMO) Project Manager is RM Smith. The PNL contact for analytical questions is JS Fruchter. The QA * ~Representative is Ron Burkey. Analytical services are provided by DataChem Laboratories of Salt Lake City, Utah. The analysis of petroleum product samples will be performed by PNL in Richland, Washington. 4.0 QUALITY ASSURANCE OBJECTIVES FOR MEASUREMENTS Contractually-required quantitation limits for inorganic and organic analyses are provided in Tables 8.4.1 through B.4.6. Quality control criteria for accuracy, precision, and completeness are provided in Table B.4.7. 5.0 SAMPLE COLLECTION Sample collection shall be performed in accordance with procedures identified in the Field Sampling Plan (Appendix A), Operable Unit Management Plans, or event-specific SAPs. Sample containers, preservation requirements, and holding times are listed in Tables 8.5.1 and B.5.2. 6.0 SAMPLE CHAIN-OF-CUSTODY Sample chain-of-custody from the field to the analytical laboratory shall be controlled in accordance with PNL-MA-567 AD-2, Ground-Water Sample Chain-of- Custody Procedure (provided in Appendix A, Field Sampling Plan). 1 7.0 FIELD INSTRUMENT CALIBRATION AND MEASUREMENT Field instruments shall be calibrated and measured in accordance with PNL-MA- 567 FA-1, Temperature Measurement Procedure, FA-2, Calibration of Conductivity Meter and Measurement of Field Conductivity, FA-3, Calibration of pH Meter and Measurement of Field pH, and WL-I, Water-Level Measurement Procedure. Calibration procedures are provided in Appendix A, Field Sampling Plan. 8.0 ANALYTICAL PROCEDURES Analytical procedures are specified in Table B.4.1 through B.4.6. These procedures are standard recognized EPA procedures. If additional analyses are required, methods will be identified in event-specific SAPs. 9.0 DATA REDUCTION. VALIDATION. AND REPORTING Reports from the analytical laboratory shall include the following information: * Results of sample analyses reported in micrograms per liter (ugg/l) for water samples and micrograms per kilogram (Mug/kg) for soil and sediment samples. Results of anion analyses in water samples will be reported in milligrams per liter (mg/l). * Results of procedural blank analyses. * Amounts expected and recovered, and percent recoveries, for matrix spike samples. * Results of replicate analyses reported as Relative Percent Difference. * Results of the analyses of Standard Reference Materials, certified values, and the percent difference between the results and the certified values. Data for selected samples and analytes will be validated and appropriate data qualifiers will be assigned. Data validation will be performed in accordance with the following methodology: U.S. Environmental Protection Agency Laboratory Data Validation Functional Guidelines for Evaluating Inorganics Analyses, 1988 U.S. Environmental Protection Agency Laboratory Data Functional Guidelines for Evaluating Organics Analyses, 1988 A data validation report will be completed and submitted to the client in a technical report. 2 10.0 INTERNAL OUALITY CONTROL CHECKS * ~Field and laboratory quality control checks are identified in event-specific SAPs. 11.0 PERFORMANCE AND SYSTEM AUDITS Audits or surveillances associated with specific project activities will be identified in individual management plans or event-specific SAPs. 12.0 DATA ASSESSMENT ACTIVITIES Analytical data shall be evaluated by PNL to determine if quality control criteria have been satisfied. Unplanned deviations from technical requirements must be documented by completing a Deficiency Report (DR) in accordance with PAP-70-1502, Controlling Deviations from QA Requirements and Established Procedures. Any staff member may initiate a DR. The DR must identify the requirements deviated from, the cause of the deviation, whether any results were impacted, and corrective action to remedy the immediate problem and prevent recurrence. Planned deviations documented in advance by a letter to the file or a notation on a project record do not require a DR. The documentation must include a justification and approval for the deviation. 13.0 CORRECTIVE ACTION * ~Any deviations from the identified field procedures shall be documented in the field notebook and reported to the Project Manager. Corrective action shall be implemented as necessary. If corrective action is required during the analysis of samples, the analytical laboratory shall obtain PNL approval prior to implementation for items other than routine analytical corrections. 14.0 OA REPORTS TO MANAGEMENT The results of data validation and any audits or surveillances shall be immediately reported to the Project Manager in writing. B. ADDITIONS TO THE SMP-OAPP 15.0 RECORDS Field records shall consist of a field notebook, chain-of-custody forms, and shipment records. The field and analytical laboratory records shall be stored in the field team leader's project files until they are submitted to Battelle EMO. The records shall be in ink, signed and dated by the author, complete, legible, understandable, organized, identified, and protected until turnover to EMO. All records shall be provided to EMO at the close of the project. 3 16.0 SPECIAL PROCUREMENT The analytical services of DataChem Laboratories have been established via Analytical Services Contract #121121-A-Mi. The analytical methods, detection limits, and details of the contract are acceptable for work performed at Elelson Air Force Base. 0 4 0 TABLES 0 5 Table 9.4.1 Test Methods and Detection Umrits for Metals Contractual Detection Umit Constituent Test Method CAB Number Uqulds Solids Antimony __ 01___O__a___(Total) 200 1.WLlb) 20000 pg/kg(c) Arsenic 7060w& (Total) S lpgIL 500 pg/kg Barium 8010(a) (Total) 20 lpg/L 20300 p~g/kg Beryllium 6010ws (Total) 3 pg/L 300 pg/kg Cadmium 01( (Total 10 pg/L 1000 pg/kg Calcium 61a (Total 100 pg/L 10000 p~g/kg Chromium Sol Ora (Total) 20 p~g/L 2000 p~g/kg Cobalt so1 o(a (Total) 20 pg/L 2000 psg/kg Copper 80i 0(a) (Total) 20 p~g/L 2000 p~g/kg Iron 61a (Total) 20 pg/L 2000 pg/kg Lead 7421 (T)(otal) S pg/L 500 pg/kg Magnesium 601ita (Total) 100 pg/L 10000 pg/kg Manganese 601Ola (Total) 10 p~g/L 1000 pg/kg Mercury 7470ta (Total) 0.2 pg/L 400 jig/kg Nickel 601lta (Total) 30 pg/L 3000 pg/kg Potassium 6O010a (Total) 300 pg/L 30000 pg/kg Silver 6010lt (Total) 20 pg/L 2000 jig/kg Sodium 6s10ia (Total) 300 pg/L 30000 pg/kg Tin witO~a (Total) 100 pg/L 10000 pg/kg Vanadium 601lta (Total) 30 pg/L 3000 pg/kg Zinc 601Ola (Total) 10 pg/L 1000 pg/kg (a) USEPA Test Methods for Evaluating Solid Waste, SW-846, Third Edition (b) pg/L Micrograms per liter (c) pg/kg Micrograms per kilogram Table 6.4.2 Test Methods and Detection Umifts for Anions Contraclual Detection Umit Constituent Teal Method CAS Number Uqulds, Solids 1 1 Bromide 300.0(s or D4327-Stb (Total) 500 pgjtY 500 p9/kgQd Chloride 300.0(a or D43274-8P (Total) 200 jsg/L 400 ptgtkg Fluoride 300.0(a) or D4327-88tb (Total) 100 p~g/L 200 pg/kg Posphate 300.0(a) or D4327-Stb (Total) 400 p~g/L S00 pg/kg Sulfate 300.0(8) or 13378()(Total) 500 pg/L 1000 p~g/kg Nitrite 300.0t4 or 104327-St(b (Total) 200 p~g/L 400 pg/kg Nitrate 300.0(8) or D4327-86(b) (Total) 200 pg/L 400 pg/kg (a) EPA-800/4-84-17, March 1984 (b) Annual Book of ASTMV Standards (Volume 11.01, 1990) (c) pug/L Micrograms per liter (d) pg/kg Micrograms per kilogram Table 9.4.3 Test Methods and Detection Umhis for Volatile Organic Compounds contractual Detection Umit Constituent Test Method CAS Number Uqulds Solids Benzene 801 0/8020(a 71-43-2 2 p~g/L~b) 2 p~g/kg(C) Carbon Tetrachloride 80lO/am20) 56-23-5 1 p~g/L 1 jig/kg Chloroform s010/8020(a) 67466-3 0.5 pg/L 0.5 p~g/kg p-Dichlorobenzene 801 0/8020(s) 106-467 2 pg/L 2 p~g/kg 1,1-Dichloroethane 801 0/8=20) 75-34-3 1 Pg/I. 1 pg/kg 1,2-Dichloroethane 80i 0/80201 a) 107-062 0.5 p~gIL 0.5 pg/kg cis-I1.2-Dichlorouthylens 8010/8020(4 156-59-2 1 pg/L 1 p~g/kg trans-I1.2-Dichloroethylene $010/8020a) 156-60-5 1 pg/L 1 p~g/kg Ethylbenzene 8010/8020(a) 100D41-4 2 lpg/L 2 pig/kg Methylene Chloride 8010/8020(a) 75-09-2 5 p~g/L 5 p~g/kg Tetrachloroathylene 8010/80201a) 127-18-4 0.5 p~g/L 0.5 pg/kg Toluene 801 0/8020(a) 108-88-3 2 p~g/L 2 pig/kg 1,I,1-Trichloroethane 80i 0/8020(a) 71-55-6 0.5 pig/l. 0.5 pg/kg 1,1,2-Trichloroethane 8010/8020a) 79-005 0.5 p~g/L. 0.5 pg/kg Trichioroethylene 801 0/8= (a) 79-0146 1 pg/L. 1 pg/kg FVinyl Chloride 8010/8020 (a 75-01-4 2 p~g/L. 2 p~g/kg Xylene (rotall 8010/8020(a) 1330-2G-7 5 pig/L 5 p~g/kg (a) USEPA Test Methods for Evaluating Solid Waste, SW-846, Third Edition (b) pg/L Microgranma per liter (c) pg/kg Micrograms per kilogram Table B.4.4 Test Methods and Detection Limits for Semi-Volatile Organic CompoundsI Contractual Detsctiont Unht Constituent Tent Method CAS Number Uqulds Solids o-Cresol 8270(a) 95-48-7 10 pig/IY0 N60 pg/kg(C) mn-Cresol 8270(a) 108-39-4 10 pg/I. 660 pg/kg p-Cresol 8270'a) 106-44-5 10 1sg/L. 660 pg/kg Kerosene (Kerosine) 8270O&) 8008-20-6 1000 pg/L 660 p~g/kg Naphtthalene 8270(a) 91-20- 10 1.g/L 660 pg/kg Pentachlorophenol 8270(a) 87-86- 50 1.g/L 3300 pg/kg Phenol 8270(a) 108S-952 10 pg/I. 660 pg/kg Tributyl Phosphate 82700) 126-73-8 10 pgq/L 860 p~g/kg Additional Targeted Constituents Tentatively Identified Compounds (rICs) (EPANNIH Data Base) ______ Additional Targeted Constituents for Method 8270 Analytical Tests Acenaphthene 8270(a) 83-32-9 10 pig/l. 660 pg/kg Acenaphthylene 8270(-) 208-96-8 10 pg/L 680 p~g/kg Acetophenone 8270(a) 98-86-2 10 ptg/L 660 pg/kg 2-Acetylaminofluorsne 827019) 53-93-6 10 pg/L 680 p~g/kg 4-aminobiphenyl 8270(s 97-07-1 10 pg/L. 680 pg/kg Aniline 8270(a) 62-53-3 10 pg/i. 660 pg/kg Anthracene 8270(a) 120-12-7 10 pg/L 660 p~g/kg Aramite 8270(m) 140-57-8 10 pg/L 660 pg/kg Benzola3Anthracene 8270(a) 56-55-3 10 pg/L 680 pg/kg Benzo~b] Fluoranthane 8270(s) 205-99-2 10 pg/L 680 pg/kg Benzolk]Flouranthane 8270(2) 2074-M9 10 pg/L 680 p~g/kg Benzo[ghi]Pwrylene W2ON) 191-24-2 10 lig/I. 660 pg/kg Benzo[a]Pyrens 8270(a) 50-32-8 10 psg/L 860 pg/kg Benzyl Alcohol 8270(a) 100-61-0 20 pg/L 1300 p~g/kg bia (2-Chloroethoxy-Methane 8270ta 111-91-1 10 pg/l. 660 pg/kg bis (2-Chloroethyl) Ether 8270(-) 111-44-4 10 p~g/L 660 p~g/kg bit (2-Chlro--Mthylethyl) ether 8270(4 108-60-1 10 pg/L. 660 pg/kg bis (2-EthylnexyA Phenyl Ether 8270(a 117-81-7 10 pg/L 660 pg/kg 4-Bromophenyl Phenyl Ether 8270(a) 101-55-3 10 pg/L 680 p~g/kg Butyl Benzyl Phtthalate 8270(s) 85-887 10 pg/L 660 p~g/kg Table B.4.4 Test Methods and Detection Umits for Semi-Volatile Organic Compounds Ja Contractual Delection UmftW Conslituent Tes Method CAS Number Uquids Solids p-Chloroaniiine 8270j* 106-47-8 20 pg/L 1300 jig/kg Chlorobenzilate 8270(a) 510-15-6 10 p~g/L 660 pg/kg p-Chloro-mr-cresol 8270* 59-50-7 20 pg/L 1300 pg/kg 2-Chloronaphthaiene 8270(a) 91-587 10 pgVL 880 pg/kg 2-Chiorophenol 8270(s) 9557-8 10 1.g/L 680 pg/kg 4-Chiorophenyl Phenyl Ether 8270(a) 7005-72-3 10 pig/I 660 p~g/kg Chrysene 8270OW 218-01-9 10 pig/L 680 pg/kg Diallete 82701a) 2302-16-4 10 pg/L 680 pg/kg Debenz~a~h] Anthacene 82701'0 53-70-3 10 pg/L 660 pg/kg Dibenzofuran 8270* ~ 132-64-9 10 p~g/L 680 pig/kg Di-n-butyl Phthalate 8270(0 84-74-2 10 pg/L 680 pLg/kg o-dichlorobenzen, 8270ia) 95-50-1 10 pg/L 880 pg/kg m-dichlorobenzene 8270(a) 541-73-1 10 pig/L 680 p~g/kg p-dichlorobenzene 8270(a) 108-48-7 10 pig/L 680 p~g/kg 33'-Dichlorobenzidine 8270(& 91-94-1 20 pig/L 1300 pg/kg 2,4-Dichiorophenjol 8270(s) 120-83-2 10 p~g/L 680 pg/kg 2,6-Dichlorophenol 8270(a) 87-65-0 10 pig/L 680 pg/kg Diethyl Phthalate 82701') 84-882 10 pg/L 660 pig/kg 0,G-Diethyl 8270(a' 297-97-2 10 p~g/L 880 p~g/kg 0-2-Pyrazinyl Phosphorothioate (Thionazin) ______ Dimethoate 8270(a) 60-51-5 10 pg/L 880 p~g/kg p-(dimethyiamino) Azobenzene 8270fa) 60-11-7 10 jpg/L 680 pxg/kg 7,12-Dimethylbenz~a] Anthracene 8270(a) 57-97-6 10 jig/L 680 pig/kg 3,3'-Dimethyibenzidine 8270(a) 119-93-7 10 pkg/L 660 pg/kg Alpha, Aipha-dimethyiphenithylamine 8270(W 122-0"- 10 pg/L 680 pg/kg 2,4-DimethyIphenol 8270* 105-67-9 10 pg/L 680 pg/kg Dimethyl Phthalate 8270(a) 131-11-3 10 pg/L 680 ptg/kg m-Dinftrobenzene 8270(a) 99-85-0 10 pig/L 880 pg/kg 46Dnlto- Ireo 8270(a) 534-52-1 50 pg/L 3300 pg/kg 2,4-Dinitrophenol 8270(aj 51 -28-5 50 pig/L 3300 pg/kg 2,4-Dinitrotoluene 8270(a) 121-14-2 10 pg/L 880 p~g/kg 2,6-Dinitrotoluene 8270(a) 606-20-2 10 pig/L 880 pg/kg Table B.4.4 Test Methods and Detection Limits for Semi-Volatile Organic CompoundsI Contractual Detection Umbt Constituent Test Method CAS Numbsr Uqulds Solids Di-n-octyl Phthaiate SZ70(f) 117-84- 10 pgQ/I 660 pg/kg Diphenylarniine 8 70w9 122-39-4 10 p~g/I 660 I9/kg Ethyl Methanesulfonate 8270(a) 62-50-0 10 pg/I. 660 p~gkg Famphur 8270(i) 52485-7 10 pxg/I. 860 lpa/kg Fluoranthene 8270(a) 208-44-0 10 pg/L 660 pig/kg Fluoren, 8270(a) 8673-7 10 pig/L 660 1 g/kg Hexachloroben~zene 8270* 118-74-1 10 pg/I. 660 pg/kg Hexachlorobutadiene 8270(w 87-68-3 10 pg/I. 660 lpa/kg Hexachlorocyclopentadione 8270(a) T7-47-4 10 pg/I 860 p~g/kg H-exachloroethane 8270(f) 67-72-1 10 p~g/L 660 p~g/kg Hexachlorophene 8270(o) 70-30-4 10 pg/I 680 p~g/kg Hexachloropropenie 8270(a) 1888-71-7 10 pg9/L 660 lpa/kg lndeno[1,2,3-cd] Pyrene 8270(a) 193-39-5 10 p~g/L 680 pg/kg Isodrin 8270(a) 465-73-6 10 pg/L 660 lia/kg Isophorone 8270(a 78-59-1 10 pg/I 660 lja/kg Isosaf role 8270(t 120-58-1 10 pig/I 660 jia/kg Kepone 8270(&) 143-50-0 10 p~g/L 660 lpa/kg Methapyrilene 8270(a) 91-80-5 10 pg/I 860 pg/kg 3-Mothylcholarnthrnen 8270(a) 56-49-5 10 p~g/L 660 pa/kg Methyl Methanesuffonate 8270* ~ 66-27-3 10 pg/I 680 p~g/kg 2-Methyinaphthalsne 8270(a) 91-5746 10 pg/I. 680 p~g/kg 1,4-Naphthoquinone 82702) 130-15-4 10 p~g/L 660 p~g/kg 1-Naphthylamine 8270oa) 134-32-7 10 pg/I 660 pg/kg 2-Naphtthylamine 8270(4) 91-59-8 10 pa/~l 660 p.9/kg o-nltroarnillne 8270(') 8874-4 50 p~g/I 3300 p~g/kg m-nhtroaniline 8270(s 99-092 50 pg/I. 3300 lia/kg p-nitroaniline 8270wm 100-01-6 50 pg/L 330 pg/kg Nitrobenzene 8270(a) 9895-3 10 pa/I 660 pa/kg o-rnltrophenol 8270(i) 8875-5 10 pg/I 880 pg/kg p-nftrophenol 8270(a) 100-02-7 50 p~g/L 3300 pa/kg 4-Nitroquinoline-1 -oxide 8270(a) 5857-5 10 p~g/L 660 1.g/kg N-nitrosodl-n-butylarnine 8270(a) 924-18-3 10 pg/I. 660 pag/kg Table 9.4.4 Test Methods and Detection Limits for Semi-Volatile Organic Compounds a Contractual Detection UmhV ConstItuent Teat Method CAS Number Uquids Solids N-nitrosocliethylamlne 87 55-18-5 10 p~g/L 660 p~g/kg N-nitrosocilmethylamine SZ70(a) 62-75-9 10 p~g/I- 660 pg/kg N-nitrosodiphenylamine 8270(li 6830-6 10 p~g/i 660 p~g/kg N-niitrosodipropylamine; 8270(s) 821-64-7 10 pg/L 660 pg/kg cli-n-propylnitrosamine N-nftrosomethylethylamine 8270(a) 10595-95-6 10 p~g/I 660 p~g/kg N-nitrosomorpholine 8270(a) 59-69-2 10 pig/L 660 pg/kg N-nitrosopiperadine 8270(a 100-75.4 10 pg/L 680 p~g/kg N-nitrosopyrrolidine 8270(a 930-55-2 10 pig/L 660 pg/kg 5-Nitro-o-toluicline 8270(a) 99-55-8 10 pxg/L 680 p~g/kg Parathion 8270(a) 56-38-2 10 pg/l. 680 p~g/kg Pentachlorobernzene 8270(a) 608-93-5 10 pig/I 680 pg/kg Pentachloronitrobenzone B270(a 82-68-8 10 pg/L 680 pg/kg Phenacetin 8270to 62-44-2 10 pg/L 880 p~g/kg Phenanthrone 8270(8 85-01-8 10 pg/L 680 p~g/Mg p-phenylenediamine 8270(4) 106-50-3 10 pig/L 660 p~g/kg Pronamidle 8270Oa 23950-58-5 10 pg/L 660 pg/kg Pyrene 8270* 129-00-0 10 pg/L 660 pg/kg Safrole 8270(s 94-59-7 10 pg/L 680 pg/kg 1,2,4,5-Tatrachlorobenzene 8270(m 95-94-3 10 pg/L 660 pg/kg 2,3,4,8-Tetrachlorophenol 87a 58-9D-2 10 pg/L 660 pig/kg Teftasthyl Dithiopyrophosphate 8270Oa 3689-24-5 10 pg/L 660 pg/kg o-Toiuidine 8270 (a) 95-53-4 10 pig/L 680 pg/kg 1,2,4-Trichlorobenzerne 8270(* 120-82-1 10 pg/L 660 pg/kg 2,4,5-richirophenol 8270(a 95-95-4 10 pig/L 660 jig/kg 2,4,6-Trichiorophenol 8270(m) 88-06-2 10 pig/l. 660 pg/kg 0,0,0-Triethyl Phosphorothioate 8270(a) 126-68-1 10 pg/k 680 pg/kg Sym-ftinitrobenzene 8270O* 9935-4 10 pg/k 680 pg/kg (a) USEPA Test Methods for Evaluating Solid Waste, SW-MO6, Third Edition (b) pg/I. Micrograms per liter (c) pg/kg Micrograms per kilogram Table B.4. Test Methods and Detection Limits for Pesticides and PCBs Contractual Detection Umft Constituent Test Method CAS Number Uqulds Solids Aldrin sm80w 309-002 0.05 ipg/LIb' 10 ipgfg(C Alpha-BHC BMW0 319-84-6 0.05 pg/L 10 p~g/kg BetaBHC Sm(A) 319-857 0.05 pg/L 10 pxg/kg Delta-BHC SM60w 319-88- 0.1 p~g/L 20 pig/kg Gamma-BHC (Undane) SM60) 58-899 0.05 pg/l. 10 p~g/kg Chiordane 8080&) 57-74-9 0.1 lpg/L 50 p~g/kg 4,4'-DDD ao0o0a 72-54-8 0.1 pg/L 20 p~g/kg 4,4'-DDE 8=08 72-55-9 0.05 pg/L 10 pg/kg 4,4'-DDT BMW0 50-29-3 0.1 pgS/L 20 p~g/kg Dieldrin W8080a) 60-57-1 0.05 p~g/I. 10 pg/kg Endosulfan I 8080a) 958-98- 0.1 pg/I 10 pxg/kg Endosuffan 11IIa 33213-65-9 0.05 lpg/L 10 p~g/kg Endosulfan Sulfate 8w80) 1031407-8 0.5 pg/IL 20 pg/kg Endrin SMA0 72-20-8 0.1 pg/I. 10 pig/kg Endrin Aldehyde BMW0 7421-93-4 0.2 pg/I. 50 pg/kg Heptachlor B W76-44- 0.05 pig/I 10 pig/kg Heptachlor Epoxide BM8W 1024-57-3 1 pg/I 60 pig/kg Methoxychlor SM80) 72-43-5 2 pg/I 100 pg/kg Toxaphenie 8=8a) 8001-35-2 2 pg/I 400 pg/kg Polychlorinated Biphenyls (POse) ______ Aroclor 1016 8080N 12674-11-2 1 pg/I 100 p~g/kg Arocior 1221 BMW0~ 11104-28-2 1 pg/I 200 pg/kg Aroclor 1232 BM8W 11141-16-5 1 Pg/I 200 p~g/kg Arocior 1242 Sm80) 53469-21-9 1pg/IL 100 pg/kg Aroclor 1248 SM8a) 12672-29-6 1 pg/I 100 p~g/kg Aroclor 1254 BM80) 11097-69-1 1WpgI. 100 pg/kg Aroclor 1260 SMIS) 11096-82-5 1 pg/L 100 p~g/kg (a) USEPA Test Methods for Evaluating Solid Waste, SW-846, Third Edition (b) Mig/I. Micrograms per lifter (c) Mig/kg Micrograms per kilogram Table B.4.6 Test Methods and Detection Umits for Total Petroleum 10 Hydrocarbons and Nonaqueous-Phase Petroleum Product Contractual Detection Unit Constituent Test Method Uqulds Solids Total Petroleum 801 5/8O2Oa) 50 pxg/LYb 1500 pg/kg(c) Hydrocarbons Hydrocarbon PNL Procedure NA(* NA Fingerpin (free VOA.3 (d) petolu product) (a) USEPA Test Methods for Evaluating Solid Waste, SW-846, Third Edition (b) pg/L Micrograms per liter (c) pig/kg Micrograms per kilogram (d) Follows EPA Method 502.2 (e) NA Not Available Table 6.4.7 Data Quaity Objectives for Analytical Parameters Accuracy Precision Analyt. Method (Percent Recovery) (Relative Percent Difference) Completeness mewis 8010 75 -125% ± 20%* 95% Arsenic 7060 75 -125% ± 20%(a 95% Lead 7421 75 - 125% ± 2O%* 95% Major Anions 300.0 or ASTMD 4327-88 75- 125% ± 2D%(a 95% Volatile Organics 801 0/802 Ib) (b) 95% Semivolatile Organics 8270 Ib b) 95% Pesticideu/PCBe 8080b)(b 95% TPH-4 8015/8020 75-125% ± 20% 95% Hydrocarbon Fingerprint IPNL Procedure VOA-3 I NA(CNA 95% (a) Concentrations greater than ten times the detection limit. (b) Methods for determining accuracy end precision criteria for each analyte are described in SW-4M6. (c) Not applicable TABLEB.5.1 ~~~~~~~Container, TABE95.1Ground-water Preservative, and Surface-Water and Holding Samples Time Requirements______for Parameter Container Preservative Holding Time Metals, Lead, Arsenic 1 1-l1ter polyethylene Coal 4PC + HN0 3 6 monyths ______pH < 2 Anions 1 125-mI Polythylene Cool4'C per procedure Volatile Organics 3 40-mI glass with Coal 40C + HCI 14 days ______teflon-lined septum pH <2 Semnivolatile Organics I 2-liter amber glass Cool 40C 7 days until extraction, with teflon-lined cap 40 days to analysis after extraction PCB/Pesticides 1 2-liter amber glass Cool 40C 7 days until extraction, with teflon-lined cap 40 days to analysis after extraction Total Petroleum 1 1-ifter amber glass Coal 40C + HCI 14 days Hydrocarbons with teflon-lined cap pH <2 Hydrocarbon Fingerprint 3 40-ml glass Cool 40C 14 days Additional containers will be required for collecting MS/MSD samples c mi ~~~TABLE 9.5.2 Container, Preservative, and Holding Time Requirements for Soil and SedimentSamples ______ Metals, Lead, Arsenic I 250-mi glass Cool 4(C 6 months Volatile Organic. 1 40-mI glass Cool 4(C 14 days Semnivolatile Organics 1 125-mI glass Cool 4C 14 days until extraction 40 days to analysis after extraction Poeticides/PCBs I 125-ml glass Cool 4(C 14 days to extraction, 40 days I I ~~~~~~toanalysis Total Petroleum 1 125-mI glass Cool 4C 28 days Hydrocarbons For equipment blanks, use container, preservative, and holding time requirements for water. Mte Managemnt Plan-HSP Revision 5 Se/son Air Porn Base Appendix C SITE MANAGEMENT PLAN (SMP) HEALTH AND SAFETY PLAN (HSP) FOR EIELSON AIR FORCE BASE site Maagm entmpvn--NsP Revision 5 Emleaun Air Forc Base CONTENTS--HSP Page 1.0 Introduction...... 0C.1 2.0 Project Description...... 0C.2 3.0 General Information...... 0C.2 4.0 Site Description and Characteristics...... 0C.3 4.1 Site Description...... 0C.3 4.2 Site History...... C.5 4.2.1 Industrial Wastes...... C.6 4.2.2 Polychlorinated Biphenyls (PCBs)...... C.6 4.2.3 Pesticides...... C.6 4.2.4 Wastewater Treatment...... C.7 4.3 Status of Site...... C.7 4.4 Utilities...... C.15 5.0 Overview of Planned Activities...... CA1 5 6.0 Project Organization and Tasks to be Performed Under This Plan . 0.1A5 6.1 Project Organization...... 1CA5 6.2 Description of Subcontractors...... 0C.16 6.3 Recordkeeping...... 0C.16 7.0 Waste Characteristics...... 0C.17 7.1 Waste Types...... 0C. 17 7.2 Characteristics...... 0C. 17 8.0 Hazard Evaluation and Control...... 0C.1 8 8.1 Physical Hazards...... 0C.18 8.1.1 Cold Stress...... 0C.18 8.1.1.1 Frostbite...... 0C. 19 8.1.1.2 Hypothermia...... 0C.20 8.1.2 Heat Stress...... C.20 8.1.3 Slipping or Falling...... C.21 8.1.4 Back Injury...... 0C.21 8.1.5 Falling or Flying Objects...... 0C.21 8.1.6 Noise...... 0C.21 8.1.7 Moving Vehicles...... C.21 C.iii 19 April 1992 Met Management Plan-HSP Revision 5 EM/son Air Forc Base CONTENTS--HSP Page 8.2 Chemical Hazards...... C.22 8.2.1 Spills and Releases...... C.22 8.2.2 Land Disposal Operations...... C.22 8.2.3 Road Oiling...... 0C.23 8.2.4 Pest Control...... 0C.23 8.2.5 General Site Activities...... C.23 8.2.6 Potential Chemical Hazards...... 0C.24 8.2.7 Potential Routes of Exposure...... 0C.24 8.2.7.1 Dermal...... C.24 8.2.7.2 Inhalation...... 0C.24 8.2.7.3 Other...... C.24 8.3 Radiologic Hazards...... C.24 8.4 Biologic Hazards...... C.38 8.4.1 Moose and Bear...... 0C.38 8.4.2 Mosquitos...... 0C.39 8.5 Hazards Posed by Chemical Substance Provided by CH2M HILIC.39 8.6 Procedures to Locate Buried Utilities...... 0C.39 9.0 Personnel...... C.39 9.1 CH-2M HILL Site Personnel...... C.39 9.1.1 General Site Workers...... C.40 9.1.2 Site Safety Coordinator (SSCs)...... 0C.41 9.1.3 Project Manager...... 0C.43 9.2 Subcontractor Personnel...... 0C.44 9.3 Health and Safety Field and Team Chain of Command and Procedures...... 0C.45 9.3.1 Client...... 0C.45 9.3.2 EMO...... 0C.45 9.3.3 CH2M HILL...... 0C.45 9.3.4 Subcontractors...... 0C.45 10.0 Training...... 0C.46 10.1 General Training...... 0C.46 10.2 Additional Training...... 0C.48 11.0 Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) Specification ...... 48 12.0 Air Monitoring Program...... 0C.48 CJiv 19 April 1992 Site Magem enwt Plan-HSP Revision S Beison Air Fo~c ase& . ~CONTENTS--HSP Page 13.0 Site Procedures and Work Limitations...... 0C.54 13.1 Site Entry Procedures...... C.54 13.2 Decontamination Procedures...... C.55 13.2.1 Personnel...... C.55 13.2.2 Monitoring Equipment...... 0C.56 13.2.3 Sampling Equipment...... 0C.56 13.2.4 Samples...... C.56 13.2.5 Cars and Heavy Equipment...... 0C.56 13.3 Disposal Procedures of Materials Generated by CH2M HILL 0C.57 13.4 Spill Contaminant Procedures...... 0C.57 13.5 Confined Space Entry Procedures...... 0C.58 13.6 Work Procedures and Limitations...... 0C.58 14.0 Emergency Response Plan...... 0C.59 14.1 Pre-emergency Planning...... 0C.59 14.2 Emergency Recognition and Prevention...... 0C.61 14.3 Emergency Equipment...... 0C.61 14.4 Contingency Plan...... 0C.61 14.4.1 Emergency Medical Treatment...... 0C.62 14.4.2 Evacuation...... C.63 14.4.2.1 Evacuation Routes...... 0C.64 14.4.2.2 Evacuation Signals...... 0C.64 14.5 Onsite Local Emergency Response Numbers...... 0C.65 14.6 Offsite Local Emergency Response Numbers...... 0C.65 14.7 Emergency Route to Hospital...... C.65 14.8 Hospitals...... 0C.66 14.9 CH2M HILL and Client Emergency Contacts...... 0.67 14.10 Local Utilities...... 0C.70 15.0 Plan Approval...... 0C.70 Attachment 1 Employee Signoff Attachment 2 Form 533 Record of Hazardous Waste Field Activity Attachment 3 EMO Health & Safety Plan Requirements Attachment 4 Material Safety Data Sheets C.v 19 April 1992 Site Man.agement Plan-HSP Revision 5 Selson Air For"e Base CONTENTS--HSP Page TABLES 1 Source Area Descriptions...... C.8 2 Common Chemical Contaminants at Eieison AFB...... 0C.25 3 Levels of Protection...... 0C.50 4 Required Monitoring Equipment and Action Levels of Upgrading Personnel Protective Equipment (PPE)...... 0C.52 5 Emergency Phone Numbers...... C.65 FIGURES 1 Regional Location Map...... C.4 2 Hospital Route Map...... C.71 C.vi 19 April 1992 sfte Managwna'u Plan-lISP Revision 5 Meason Air Aw. .. * ~~~~~~~CH2M HILL HEALTH AND SAFETY PLAN (lISP) EIELSON AIR FORCE BASE (AFB) BASE PLAN (JUNE 1991) 1.0 Introduction The health and safety program for subcontractor personnel working at Elelson Air Force Base (AFB3) consists of a base health and safety plan (HSP) and task specific addendums. The HSP contains general information which applies to all or most areas of the site. The HSP also contains the project description, personnel respon- sibilities, site hazards, personal protective equipment (PPE), air monitoring guide- lines, site control, decontamination procedures, and an emergency response plan. S ~~The task specific addendlums are written to add additional information regarding the specific source areas and field activities. The addendums not only define the speci- fic field activities and team members, but they contain changes or clarifications of: the potential hazards, air monitoring requirements, PPE, decontamination proce- dures, and emergency contacts. The addendlums can be more or less restrictive than the base HSP, depending on the type of field activities being conducted. As more information becomes available, this HSP will be modified by the District Health and Safety Manager (DHSM). Neither the base HSP or the addendums are stand alone documents; both documents contain Important Information and they must by used In conjunction with each other. This HSP will be kept onsite during field activities and will be reviewed and updated as necessary by the DHSM. This plan adopts, by reference, the standards of * 0~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~.1 Mie Management Pman -lISP Revision 5 Efseon Air Farc RAe practice (SOPs) contained in the CH2M HILL's Waste Management and Industrial Processes, Discipline Health and Safety Manual, Volumes 1 and 2, and other ap- plicable CH2M HILL's SOPs as appropriate. These SOPs are available for periodic audit at CH2M HILL's Richiand, Washington office, and a copy will be available onsite for use by project personnel. The HSP also adopts procedures contained in the work plan for this project. This health and safety program is intended to comply with federal and state hazard- ous waste regulations, standards, and Eielson AFB3 safety requirements. If there are inconsistencies between the regulations and Eielson AFB procedures, the most restrictive requirements will be followed. If inconsistencies exist between the SMP HSP and the addendums, the addendum has precedence over the base plan. 2.0 Project Description The work being conducted at Elelson AFB that is covered under this document is the field investigation associated with the CERCIA remedial investigation and feasibil- ity study (RI/FS). 3.0 General Information CLIENT: United States Air Force JOB NO: TO BE IDENTIFIED IN THE SPECIFIC ADDENDUMS PROJECT MANAGER: TO BE IDENTIFIED IN THE SPECIFIC ADDENDUMS SITE NAME: Eielson Air Force Base (AFB) C.2 site Manogrnet plan -/SP Revision 5 Meson Air Fame Base . ~~SITE LOCATION: Alaska PURPOSE OF FIELD VISIT: TO BE IDENTIFIED IN THE SPECIFIC ADDENDUMS DATE HEALTH AND SAFETY PLAN PREPARED: APRIL 1992, revised April 1993. DATE OF VISIT: TO BE IDENTIFIED IN THE SPECIFIC ADDENDUMS BACKGROUND INFORMATION: TO BE IDENTIFIED IN THE SPECIFIC ADDENDUMS 4.0 Site Description and Characteristics 4.1 Site Description The Eielson AFB is approximately 26 miles southeast of Fairbanks, Alaska and encompasses approximately 19,270 acres (see Figure 1). It is isolated from any major urban areas, however there are two nearby off-base com- munities. Historically, most of the land was originally wetlands and flood plain areas. Eielson AFB currently contains 13 lakes totaling 313 acres, 54 ponds totaling 265 acres, and 10 designated wetlands totaling approximately 252 acres. One of the lakes and 6 of the ponds are old borrow pits. Eielson AFB is built primarily around its north/south runway. This runway is 14,500 feet long with aircraft aprons, hangars, maintenance facilities, and taxi- ways to the east. A taxiway loop at the southeast of the runway houses the A-10s from 343rd Tactical Fighter Wing, hangars, the hush house, and other maintenance and operation facilities. The 6th Strategic Reconnaissance Wing and the 168th Air Refueling Squadron are located along the flightline. East of * ~~~~~~~~~~~C.3 - ~~~i-..rI> ~ SI~~TE A A~~~~~~~~L~ASKAICINITY "0~~~~~~~~~ FIELSON 44~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ -N- Ak A C~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~T PT- W AINWRIGHT Cabins -~~~~~~s lc - 4~~~~~~~~~~ 0 ~~~~~~~5 FIGURE 1ei--L : Scale an Males Sit Managnemen Nan-lISP Revision 5 DAlton Al, Foc B"at the runway, there are industrial areas, administrative offices, housing, and community/recreation facilities. There are munitions storage areas on Quarry Hill which is further east. The land surrounding the base is used primarily for military training. There are four major highways which serve the area. They are: State High- way 2 (Richardson Highway), State Highway 4, Highway 3, and Alcan (trans- Alaska-Canada) Highway. The climate of the area is characterized by extreme diurnal and annual temperature variations, low precipitation, and low humidity. Summer temper- atures range between 450F and 61 0F, and the average temperatures during the winter range between -14 0F and 80F. Extreme temperatures recorded at Eielson AFB were 930F in July and -64PF in January. Annual precipitation in this area averages 14 inches which includes 72 inches of snow. THE SPECIFIC INFORMATION REGARDING EACH SOURCE AREA WILL BE INCLUDED IN AN ADDENDUM. 4.2 Site History Eielson AFB was originally called Mile 26 and was a satellite of Fort Wain- wright. Mile 26 was constructed between 1943 and 1944. The field was de- activated at the end of World War 1Ibut was reopened in 1947 as a future strategic base. From 1947 to 1954 many of the base's facilities were con- structed. The base was renamed in 1948. During the 1950s the base was jointly used by the U.S. Air Force and U.S. Army. Historically Eielson's * ~~~~~~~~~~~C.5 Mie Managemen Ptan-HSP Revision 5 E~ason Air Forc it"e primary mission has been tactical air support for the Alaskan Air Command. Today, the host unit at Eielson AFB3 is the 343rd Tactical Fighter Wing. The waste management practices in the past have consisted of disposal of in- dustrial wastes, solid wastes, polychlorinated biphenyls (POBs), pesticides, and wastewater treatment. 4.2.1 Industrial Wastes: Eielson AFB3 has generated and continues to gener- ate RCRA hazardous wastes. The industrial operations which generated wastes include propulsion shops, pneudralics shops, aerospace ground equipment, maintenance shops, nondestructive inspection labs, and vehicle maintenance shops. The operations generate waste oils, fuels, solvents, and cleansers. Prior to 1972 the disposal of industrial wastes included road oiling, burning, and landfilling. Some solvents and cleansers were discharged into the sanitary sewer system. Since 1982 wastes oils and spent solvent have been salvaged offsite. Contaminated JP-4 fuel continues to be burned during fire department training activities, and cleansers continue to be discharged into the sanitary sewer. Currently, hazardous wastes are handled, stored, transported, disposed, treated, and recycled in accordance with RORA. 4.2.2 Polychlorinated Biphenyls (POBs): In the past, transformers, capaci- tors, and PCB contaminated soils and liquids were stored in Buildings 2339 and 3424, however, currently there are no PCB materials stored at the base. 4.2.3 Pesticides: Until DOT was banned Eielson AFB used up to 40-50 drums of DDT per year. Two hundred unused drums of DOT were hauled from the site when its use was discontinued. Major pesticides which are C.6 Site Menegnwit Nan-HISP Revision S EeWso Air Farc Base currently in use are: Baygon, D-Tox-4E, Diazinon, Durbsan, Malathion, Pyrethrins, and Resmethrin. 4.2.4 Wastewater Treatment: The base sewage treatment plant was built in 1953 and was expanded to include secondary treatment in 1973. Prior to 1979 the effluent was discharged into Garrison Slough. Since 1979 the treated effluent has been diverted to an infiltration pond. SPECIFIC INFORMATION OF CONTAMINATION SOURCES AREA WILL BE IDENTIFIED IN AN ADDENDUM. 4.3 Status of Site Elelson AFB is on the National Priority List (NPL). Prior to this listing the base conducted several remedial investigations under the Air Force Installation * ~~~~Restoration Program (IRP). The 64 contaminant source areas identified in previous investigations have been grouped into six operable units (OUs) and three site evaluation report (SER) groups. Each OU is composed of contaminant source areas with simi- lar characteristics, and the SER groups are grouped by level of available information. Table 1 shows the source areas, years of activity/status, and waste received and released. * ~~~~~~~~~~~C.7 I- U) LLI ~~ ~~~~~~ww LU W rLz a co 0 0 0) V) v0(1) 0 0 U~~~~~~~~~~~ 2 2 12 ~~~~~~Ez C a,~~~m EEEo 0 C I0 IL 0 Ea. a 0 Mc a ~ M ~ I ~~& .cE :E 1 ~ v! M:. .c I a'r 0 Ro -mm ..j a a me 0 Ej1 00 0 X * E~~~i igku *o S * C~~~ I 5 I 9 C a I E 0x* a ~~~Sa~~titj~~~ E 7Ec -4 CO~~~~-~ 20 ro 0c 0,v '0 00 0.~~~~~~~~~~~0 '2 cc C2 - - - 3 0 0 0 wit M La 0 0 ) V) 0 0 0 t - -~ ~ I _ _ - _ _ C~~~~~ 0 - N~~~~~a - c~~a'00~~ .- i j2 'U 1U .O" **W £ re- = wE = 22,0 S9 a0 6 50 - ~ 0E = 0 -o 0 El a *-~~~~0- I~~~~~~~~~~~~~~I * ii I c~~~~~~~~~~~~.ii~~~c I~~~~L ~ z. CE ~ C 0C 0 w LUc 0 0 0 U CC -- ~~~~~~~~~c 0 C-i 2 o0 * E o~~~ W 0 0 ~ Oo =2£V C C I!E !9~C I £g E E C. I p Ž 0 mm -, C 0a 0~~~~~~ 00 ~~0*V0 0 8- ' CO0 eec 0 Wo~~~~_ 0 10 al o tA~~~0 iji x0 *g0j a i ii~~~~~~~~~i 0 0 0 0~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~- I b Ž~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~I to 0 0a a z Ft w w t[~~~~~~~~~~~~ (f 0 z zU _ E _ ~~~~~~!& E!~~~~" 2~~P. I f: 0 0 a gui-! 5. 0 0~~~~~~2 B' a n_ v~ i&j!i. 0 0~~- 00 * I LM o C~~~~~2 * 0~~~~~~~~~~~> - ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~0 E ~~E 5 a~~~~~~ co' 4~~E -i~~I' zS cc I- 80 w w 0 11 z 2 ~~ z z z 0~~~~~~~~~~ 7S M S a = 2 MD 0 * -- T E - .~~~~ ~~i*. tO flŽ;i 0E- .a I ..E M E d t~o *1 aE jU~~~- 2- Ec o j 2~~~~2 j.E ~~A 205 2c * m C d~~:315 g! 5 .k~~~2 21 co 0 ~ ~ co ~I v *2eM i* :2 i1 - &~~S *1.~s c5 ~0 D~ -1 aZ "7 ; - ' 000~~~~~~~~~~~~u Z0 Z 2 2ZZ C aE j - c.2 * £0 0 -~~ to Oa U ~0 0 . 2II - C CC~~~gac C 3~~~ * g _ ~~~ *a _a*C * j J rflre 2. r * -~I - E0 1..*; ~ 0 0 R - C E C 32£*=.~~~~ ~e 0£m '' M SI:_~~~~~~~~~~~~!.2 .1 2 turn p 1c~~~ .~~i *~ *o -W1 I z z 2 2 CL cc _ C CD , SSE * t 0~~~~~t - .3 - Si Sit. MaMn~agmnt Plan-H SP Revision 5 Eskon Air Foc Bswe . ~~~4.4 Utilities The site contains underground electrical powerlines, buried natural gaslines, buried stormwater and sanitary sewer system, buried water mains, and a septic system. There are also overhead powerlines in some areas of the site. 5.0 Overview of Planned Activities The investigations which will be completed at Eielson AFB3 will encompass a variety of field activities including: soil gas surveys; installation of ground- water monitoring wells, vapor extraction wells, and piezometers; soil borings; and soil, groundwater, surface water, sediment, and biota sampling. THE SPECIFIC FIELD ACTIVITIES EACH INVESTIGATION WILL INVOLVE WILL BE IDENTIFIED IN THE SPECIFIC ADDENDUMS. 6.0 Project Organization and Tasks to be Performed Under This Plan 6.1 Project Organization CH2M HILL is working under a subcontract to Pacific Northwest Laboratories (PNL), a division of Environmental Management Organization (EMO). The ultimate client is the United States Air Force. C.1 5 SMe Managemen Plan -HSP Revision 5 Edson Air F 0or. 6.2 Description of Subcontractors Various subcontractors including drillers, laboratory, backhoe operators, and surveyors may be used on this site. SPECIFIC SUBCONTRACTORS WILL BE IDENTIFIED IN THE SPECIFIC ADDENDUMS. Additional information regarding the health and safety qualifications of subcontractors is discussed in section 9.2 of this document. 6.3 Recordlkeepirig A copy of the records required by 20 CFR 191 0.120 and Chapter 10 of the Alaska Occupational Safety and Health Standard will be maintained by the lead S50 for all personnel, including subcontractor personnel, involved in the field investigation activities identified in the task-specific addendums. Recordkeeping activities include: * Medical surveillance records * Cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR) and first aid training certificates * Site health and safety briefing records * Accident reporting forms * 40-hour training and current 8-hour annual refresher training certificates * 8-hour supervisory training certificates for supervisory personnel Addftional records of field activities will be maintained in the following log- books: * SSCs logbook C.16 Met Managernan Plan- HSP Revision 5 fije.., Air Fa~8oreBs * ~ ~~0 Site logbook * Individual logbooks maintained by sampling team personnel * Form 533 (see Attachment 2) * Instrument calibration and maintenance logs * Close support laboratory logs These logbooks are used to record site conditions, the results of monitoring and sampling, the time spent onsite by individuals, and the events that oc- curred during field activities. 7.0 Waste Characteristics 7.1 Waste Types Uiquid X Solid X Sludge X Sediment X VaporaX ALL WASTE TYPES MAY NOT BE PRESENT AT EACH SOURCE AREA. THE SPECIFIC ADDENDUMS WILL IDENTIFY WHICH WASTE TYPES ARE OF CONCERN FOR THAT SPECIFIC AREA AND TASK. 7.2 Characteristics Corrosive X Ignitable X Radioactive X Carcinogenic X Volatile X Toxic X Reactive X Unknown X C.17 Sit. Mensga&wt Plan-HISP Revision S Easaon Air Forc Base ALL WASTE CHARACTERISTICS MAY NOT BE PRESENT IN EACH SOURCE AREA. THE SPECIFIC ADDENDUM WILL IDENTIFY WHICH CHARACTERISTICS ARE APPLICABLE FOR THAT SPECIFIC AREA AND TASK. 8.0 Hazard Evaluation and Control 8.1. Physical Hazards THE PHYSICAL HAZARDS ARE DEPENDANT ON FIELD ACTIVITIES AND ADDITIONAL HAZARDS WILL BE IDENTIFIED IN THE SPECIFIC ADDENDUMS. However, there are some physical hazards which are com- mon to many of the field activities. These hazards and control measures are summarized below: 8.1.1 Cold Stress: The potential for cold stress, frostbite and hypothermia, is relatively high all year at Eielson AFB3. The highest potential is during the winter months when the average temperatures range from -140F to 80F. Ex- treme cold for a short period of time can cause severe injury to the surface of the body (frostbite) or result in profound generalized cooling of the body core (hypothermia) which can result in death. Areas such as fingers, toes and ears have a high surface area to volume ratio and are therefore more susceptible to the effects of cold. The two factors that influence the development of a cold injury are: ambient air temperature and wind velocity. Windchill is used to describe the chilling effect of moving C.1 8 Me ManMganwt Mian-/ISP Revision 5 fictio Al Fame Des. air in combination with low temperature, and as a general rule the greatest incremental increase in chill occurs when a 5 mph wind increases to 10 mph. 8.1.1.1 Frostbite: Local injury due to cold is known as frostbite. The onset of frostbite is painless and gradual, and the injury can occur before the victim is aware that it has occurred. There are several degrees of frostbite: * Frost nip or incipient frostbite: Characterized by sudden blanching or whitening of the skin. * Superficial frostbite: The skin has a waxy or white appearance and is firm to the touch, but the tissue beneath is resilient. * Deep frostbite: Tissues are cold, pale, and solid. This is a serious injury which requires first aid. To help prevent frostbite from occurring personnel will: keep extremities warm, wear warm clothing, take rest breaks in a warm area, reduce wind by construction of a wind shield, and check for symptoms. If frostbite occurs, the victim should be moved to a warm area if moving the victim will not cause serious harm. The affected areas should be warmed with water (102OF - 105 0F) or the areas covered with warm cloths for 30 minutes, and the victim should drink a warm liquid (not coffee, tea, or alcohol). If possible elevate the injury. Extreme care should be take to avoid breaking the blisters, and injured areas should be covered with sterile, soft, dry material. Keep the victim warm and seek medical attention immediately. Further injury can be caused if the affected area is rubbed, if anything cold is placed on the C.19 Site Manmgern>w Roan-HSP Revision S Eivson Air Forc~e . frostbitten area, if the victim is placed near a hot stove, or if the victim is moved after the affected area has thawed. 8.1.1.2 Hypothermia: Systemic hypothermia can be caused by exposure to freezing or rapidly dropping temperatures. Its symptoms are exhibited in five stages: * Shivering * Apathy, listlessness, sleepiness, and (sometimes) rapid cooling of the body to less than 950F * Unconsciousness, glassy stare, slow pulse, and slow respiration * Freezing of the extremities (frostbite) * Death To treat hypothermia, remove the victim from the cold and get them into a warm area. Remove wet clothing and cover the victim with dry clothing or blankets. The body should be warmed up slowly. 8.1.2 Heat Stress: Heat stress is not anticipated to be a significant problem because the average summer temperatures range between 450F and 610F. However, depending on the necessary PPE and the weather, heat stress could present a problem. IF IT IS ANTICIPATED FOR A SPECIFIC TASK THAT HEAT STRESS MAY BE A CONCERN, THE SPECIFIC ADDENDUMS WILL IDENTIFY THE HAZARDS AND THE CONTROL MEASURES. C.20 sit. Managment Plan-/Isp Revision 5 Baleen Air Forc Baa 8.1.3 Sliooina or Falling: Especially during the freezing and thawing sea- sons, there will be a potential of personnel slipping and/or falling. To help prevent this from occurring, personnel will use extreme caution around frozen or wet areas and will wear boots that have good traction. In areas of extreme mud, wood pallets or similar devices will be used. 8.1.4 Back Iniury: Lifting or pulling heavy objects can cause back injury if not done properly. The use of proper lifting techniques will be used to prevent such injuries. If necessary, mechanical lifting aids will be made available. 8.1.5 Falling or Flying ObiMects: Falling or flying objects can occur when working underneath something or around heavy equipment. Hard hats and safety glasses will be worn to help prevent injuries from falling or flying ob- jects from occurring. 8.1.6 Noise: Because the field activities are being conducted on an Air Force Base, there will be noise from aircraft taking off and landing. The use of heavy equipment and other vehicular traffic will add additional noise. Per- sonnel will wear hearing protection and monitor for noise to help prevent injuries from occurring. 8.1.7 Movingi Vehicles: Because the field work is being conducted on an active Air Force Base, there will be vehicular traffic. Barricades, cones, flag- ging, and signs will be used to divert traffic from the work area. Personnel who work near areas with heavy vehicular traffic will wear safety vests to in- crease their visibility to passing drivers. C.21 Sit. MaMOnagms Pen-Hsp Revision 5 z., kForce Bas. 8.2 Chemical Hazards Based on the current information of the past and present waste disposal practices, five contaminant sources have been identified. They are: spills and releases, land disposal operations, road oiling, pest control, and general ongoing site activities. 8.2.1 Spills and Releases: The most common source of chemical contami- nation is from leaks in tanks and piping or from incidental release and spills of petroleum, oil, or lubricants (POL). At a third of the 64 contaminated areas involve POL contamination, primarily in the form of diesel, motor gasoline or JP-4 Incidental low volume spills and releases of solvents have also oc- curred. In the past trichloroethene (TOE) was used at the site, and it and its degradation product, 1,2-dichloroethene (1,2-DOE), have been detected in the groundwater at several locations. Currently, 1,1,1 -trichloroethane (1,1,1 -TCA), methyl ethyl ketone (MEK), methylisobutyl ketone (MIBK), acetone, and PD-680 Stoddard solvent are being used. When solvents are used for clean- ing metal, heavy metals are often associated with the spent solvent. 8.2.2 Land Disposal Operations: There are seven landfill areas on the base that receive or have received a wide variety of materials. Primarily they re- ceived general base refuse, but disposal of paints, thinners, and solvents has also been reported. Some disposal areas have received sludge which con- tains lead from tank cleaning operations; power plant ash which contains heavy metals; and waste grit which contains lead, cadmium, and chromium. Sandblasting wastes may have been disposed of in other areas of the site as well. There is an area which contains several hundred barrels of asphalt emulsion (tar). The drums have leaked some of there contents and have C.22 MOtManagaent Pan-HSP Revision 5 Eafnon Air Few Bac form what is known as Asphalt Lake. There are other areas which contained buried or partially buried drums of unknown contents. Furthermore, five or six drums of radioactive photographic chemicals were reportedly placed in the current landfill. There are reports that small amount of munitions and spent cartridges were placed in an older landfill. Munitions and cartridge disposal present a potential explosion hazard, as well as a heavy metals contamination. 8.2.3 Road Oiling: Waste oil, contaminated fuels, and spent solvents were previously used to oil the roads on the base. It is possible that P06 contami- nated oils were also used for this purpose. As mention previously, heavy metals are frequently associated with spent solvents. 8.2.4 Pest Control: DOT was used extensively until 1966. DDT application at the base included aerial spraying. As mentioned above, pesticides which are currently in use are: Baygon, D-Tox-4E, Diazinon, Dursban, Malathion, Pyrethrins, and Resmethrin. 8.2.5 General Site Activities: Due to normal base activities there will be ex- haust particles from vehicle and aircraft traffic. These particulates may con- tain polyaromatic hydrocarbons (PAH) such as benzene, toluene, xylenes, and ethylbenzene (BTXE). In the past ethylene glycol was used to deice the planes, and currently, isopropyl alcohol and methanol are used. Sandblasting operations which are currently conducted at the base produce waste which contains high concentrations of lead, cadmium, and chromium. In addition to the waste materials, hazardous substances such as fuel, solvents, and cleaners are also stored in various areas of the site. 0.23 Site Managent Plan-HISP Revision S Eeson Air Forc Base 8.2.6 -PotentialChemical Hazards: Table 2 shows the base-wide potential chemicals hazards, the exposure limits, and the symptoms of overexposure. IN SOME AREAS OF THE BASE SOME OF THE LISTED CHEMICAL HAZ- ARDS MAY NOT BE PRESENT, WHILE IN OTHER AREAS THERE WILL BE ADDITIONAL CHEMICAL HAZARDS. LOCATION AND TASK SPECIFIC CHEMICAL HAZARDS WILL BE IDENTIFIED IN THE SPECIFIC ADDENDUMS. 8.2.7 Potential Routes of Exposure: 8.2.7.1 Dermal: If contamination is encountered, dermal contact with con- taminated media is possible. Protective clothing will help eliminate this route of exposure. 8.2.7.2 Inhalation: Inhalation is a potential route of exposure if contamination is present. Air monitoring will help identify when contamination is present and will be used as a basis for implementing engineering and work practice con- trols and for upgrading protective equipment. 8.2.7.3 Other: If contamination is encountered, incidental ingestion is a po- tential route which will be controlled with the use of good work practices and protective equipment. 8.3 Radialoglc Hazards Although radiologic hazards are not anticipated in most areas of the site, they have reportedly been disposed in particular areas. THE SPECIFIC 0.24 C N- .2 2~~~~A C -faa0 @0 8 t~~~ ~ ~~g .~~~~~~~~ ~~~g d2 - 0a U,00 MC~~~~~~~~~~~~~ , go =w E. - C ai az o sO g -~~~, m.jE r=U : z~~~~- 7i 20 i~ r 1 ___~~~= E E !~~~z Sa Nn * 0 ~~~~~~~~N a Z - z ~~aZN~ZEez I -S rE2 d C5~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~C C. d C 6 ~~J~El a 0 c..Ea~~~~~~~r cc ~~~~ -~~~~~AZ'a N ~~~~~4 0 0) - CAs V 00M.- V 9~~~~~~~~~~~ a=- - .' Z u ~ ~ * ~~ E~~ ~~ '~ E Z k.J . e6 In ~ j ' - = -- = = - U, = - - 0 - C NC . C C 0 4) - C ' ' - - -a o I- - to - - CO 0 0..' CU - C. 0 0.. 0 - '- U.- O Ctal a C'.' *E 5'- 0 a s- d 2 o 5 *Z 0 - ma U a o ' a nO -c 0 5 * '-' U uto u a 0 0. 0 o .2 C 0 I Vo Ii,' 04 0 -v 0 *. U - ! r js -. Go * - 'a...g : ; *2 4 Aj. 4) p 0 O L.a r 0 CU 0 £ - -o ra. C O Sv Cu 0 CU -C 3 00. COZ C ZCv C 'Ob.a 4) 4 N Od5 N 0- ¾ C -- -- fld) 0 * * CC t'd a * AU rn r a 0 a a 5 2. t .dd r C 0 U4) 0 Eotn20a .2 o SC E.C 05C .2 .o- 4C0 0 U SC a '-a %U - at Q. Co - __ U r a a - a a b U zz 4- a ZE S * - U N v o 6 6 6 U Z .0 - a E C, b 2 a zz 1 C - a. a C t a I C a . C a 2.2 ao -. '- 9 it a r5 ______a ____ uU ______41 ____ U,- . -' ------_ _ c Nq 42 .2 -A "- - a... AC~~~~~~~~C ~~0- 00 .g~~Ci S £~~Oin ±20 ~~~~~~ ~~< I ~~~ Z 8 ~~~~~~~~~~> c =-Z- -t ~~~~~~~o C'. ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ -~~~c t..0 .~~~~~~2a ~~~~- 4) 5 1. S~w v 0 -jib.- O Z Z z. .Z -E Ul)~~~~U to~~~~~~~~t @0~~~~~~~~~~- a a~~~~~~~ 0~~~~ CLZz Z Z E Z4 ci0C 0 CZ c~~~~~ 0 a CZ 0 ILO a ~~C4 bO ~ 0 .- 1 ~ M S8~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~c S a... -a -c Zc 214 .4 0 :o '- .. ! a o r -a~~~~~~~~ u .14 0 0 .10 : E ~~~r- (E0 A q. 0 1 CN~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~C .2 1 Z,a~~~~~~~~~~~~~0 I I.- 0 -~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~r @0 - .2~~~~~~c0 a 0 a. 0 - d VW.2 A- CUo '5 tse -4 aZ -MO-r E S -c =22 - I- a ~~~~~~~~~~2 bo .6 t .~~ ~~~~z2- A 00 -2 or EJ2u~ .2 ~~ ~~~ o8~~~' co0 - (,a IL-L I Ii I ~ c C 4 .1u4 .. ) 01 a> 10. VC~a ~r sE~o * ~~~~ ~~~~V 2u~ ~8Cuu: -~ *i e4 ~~~CL a ~~~~ ccoo c U .0~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~0. 0 o -z ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~o U 6~~~~0 (2~~~~~~ C5~~~~~~~~~~~C Oh~~~~~~~Ez E CU 4SC C 0 - C s-s~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ u r~~~ - r. .saC - 0 0.. bOO C'- t Soto c ao 0 'E -5~~~ C-C Al_ _ _ _ O .2 2 C5C$ C4~ C C5N 5 N 5 N 6 6~~~l N 6 L L~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~'- ; 0C N 0 - -u rn 0~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~1 a v u v a ci~~~0 - 0 -~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~0 ri 5 5 4.' -A 4- -~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~1 cc ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ $0 0 z E~~~~~~~ C) u rm2 ~~~~~~~~ a CE~~4 'o~ ~ ~ ~ -'C F ~*~~~~~ ~ ~ daiaC05~~~~~~~~~~o~~~~~ ~k a C~~~~~~~a ~~~~~jE .2~~~~~~e 0 -0 - o a~~~~~~~~~~~~~~g - ~ ~~4 -0 z z ~ ~ t a na~~F t~~~~~~~t a....- E 0 x L -JL ~ m I3 Mz~~- ILO C N 0~~~~ N CL~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~- Ga~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~-a * 3~ ~~~~AF g~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~as~ ~~ ~ ~ ~~~~ SW~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~W ao site Manesgewit mon-lisp Revision 5 Udueon Air Fome Des. ADDENDUMS WILL IDENTIFY AREAS WITH POTENTIAL RADIOLOGICAL HAZARDS. Radiologic hazards may be classified as having the potential for either exter- nal and/or internal exposure. The magnitude of the hazard is based on the location of the source radioactive material in relation to the exposed individ- ual. External radiation hazards are posed by high-energy beta and gamnma- ray emitting radioactive materials outside the body. Internal radiation hazards are posed by any radioactive materials that gain access into the body through inhalation, ingestion, or dermal absorption. In addition to beta and gamma radiation, alpha particles represent an exposure hazard when depos- ited internally. External radiation exposures may or may not involve physical contact with radioactive material. External exposure ceases when one leaves the radiation area or when the source material is removed or adequately shielded. Internal radiation exposures resulting through contamination of the body with radioactive materials and inadvertent ingestion. Absorption of radioactive materials may occur through the intact skin. Exposed skin that has dermatitis, abrasions, or cuts will absorb radioactive material more easily than will intact skin. Internal radiation exposures continue until the radioactive material is eliminated by the body's normal metabolic process or the activity decays to negligible levels. Those radionuclides that are systematically fixed within specific organs of the body (e.g., bone, lung, thyroid, etc.) are greater internal radiation hazards because of their longer residence time within the body before elimination. These long lived radionuclides are potentially pres- ent as contaminants at most facilities which process radioactive materials. Worker protection in the United States is controlled under federal regulations which establish exposure limits. However, regardless of quantitative limits C.37 Me. Manag~v& nan-nap Revision 5 Eakon Air Fan. Bee incorporated into standards, pertinent regulations require that no radiation dose be permitted which is practical and reasonably feasible to avoid. The principle, called the ALARA concept, is the keystone of contemporary radia- tion exposure reduction efforts. ALARA involves both a philosophical approach to radiation protection and a defined set of technologies which minimize exposure at acceptable cost. ALARA is a moving target; as improved methods emerge or as radiation pro- tection practices are developed further, lower exposures may be attained. It is CH2M HILL's policy to control radiation exposures of personnel engaged in field activities at DOE and other facilities to ALARA levels. This policy is accomplished by controlling external and internal radiation hazards through implementing feasible engineering, work practice, and administrative control measures. 8.4 Biologic Hazards 8.4.1 Moose and Bear: Moose and bear are present on Elelson AFB and should not be approached. Before entering a work area, personnel should observe the surroundings for moose and bear. If moose or bear are present, do not enter the work location, and observe wildlife from a safe distance (>200 feet) until the animal(s) leaves. If the work area requires traversing thick brush, workers should observe the area first, and proceed with caution, making noise, such as talking, whistling, or singing, to make their presence known to animals that may be in the area. C.38 i Sit. Managemet Plan-HISP Revision 5 Eawnn Air fame Base 8.4.2 Mospuitos: If work occurs during spring/summer, mosquitos may pose a hazard. Corrective actions include wearing full-length clothing to minimize exposed flesh, using headnets, and using mosquito repellent. 8.5 Hazards Posed by Chemical Substances Provided by CH2M HILL In accordance with state and federal regulations, Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDSs) are provided for the following chemicals: trisodium phosphate (TSP), Uiqui-nox, methanol, nitric acid, hydrochloric acid, MSA respirator sani- tizer, hydrogen, methane, and isobutylene. Depending on the required moni- toring equipment, all of these chemicals may or may not be present for a particular task. 8.6 Procedures to Locate Buried Utilities The Civil Engineering office and/or other appropriate Air Force offices will be 0 ~ ~~~contacted to identify buried utilities prior to drilling or excavating. Clearance from the Air Force must be obtained prior to drilling or excavation. 9.0 Personnel 9.1 CH2M HILL Site Personnel THE TEAM MEMBERS WILL BE IDENTIFIED IN THE SPECIFIC ADDENDUM. C.39 Sit. ManagennPio -ManSP Revision 5 Ase/on Air Fomo. Baa. 9.1.1 General Site Workers i In the contaminated areas (i.e., exclusion zone), the decontamination areas (i.e., contamination reduction zone), and areas where there is a possibility for exposure, all personnel must be under a medical surveillance program and trained in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.120 and Chapter 10 of the Alaska Occupational Safety and Health Standards. In addition, at least two person- nel in each source area must be currently certified in first aid and CPR. Personnel who are not trained in hazardous waste work as required by the federal and state standards will not be allowed in the exclusion zones or the contamination reduction zones. The responsibilities of all employees include: * Each employee working in areas of the site where there is a potential for exposure is responsible for verifying that their medical status and training are current prior to working in those areas. * All personnel who work on the site must sign in at the CH2M HILL field office indicating the date and time of visit and project number. * All employees will read and agree to follow the Eielson AFB's safety program prior to working on the sfte. * All employees will read and agree to follow the OH2M HILL HSP and the addendums. C.40 SMe Managa'nst nan-nap Revision 5 Ma~son Air For. 8.a. All employees who have been issued TLD badges will wear them when working at the site. * All employees will conduct their work in a safe manner. * Employees are responsible for correcting an unsafe work conditions. If they are unable to correct the unsafe condition and feel that the condition could cause serious harm, they may halt the work. If work is halted the employee must contact the SSC or the project manager. * Employees are responsible for reporting faulty equipment to the SSC or the project manager and for shutting down the field work until the equipment is operational and reliable. * All personnel who work in areas of the site that have potential expo- sures are responsible for submitting their 533 Forms to Uz Veach/WDC on a monthly basis. 9.1.2 Site Safety Coordinators (SSCs) Because each OU consists of multiple source areas, there will be more than one Site Safety Coordinator (SS0) present onsite. Employees designated as Site Safety Coordinator (SS0) have received 8 hours of supervisory training and 8 hours of instrument training. S50 are designated as Level A, B, C. or 0 based on their level of experience. The S50 must have a designation at lease equal to the level of protection in which the tasks are being performed. A lead 550 will function as the overall OU SSC and have the responsibility over the source area SSCs. In some cases, a SSC will not be at a source C.41 Mie Management Plan-HISP Revision 5 Edson Air Force Baet area during all field activities. However, with the use of a two way radio the Lead SSC will be in constant communication with such a field team. Addi- tionally, if a SSC is not present at a source area, one must be wfthin a 5-minute drive at all times. In addition to the responsibilities listed in Section 9.1.i, the SSC is responsi- ble for: * Documenting that all personnel entering areas where there is a poten- tial for exposure meet federal and state hazardous waste regulations. * Holding a pre-entry safety meeting on the source area's specific hazards. * Completing site entry procedures. * Conducting (or assigning a qualified person to conduct) the air moni- toring in their area as outlined in the HSP and the addendums. * Emergency planning. * Taking the lead in all emergency situations in their source area until a professional emergency response team arrives. * Establishing the work zones for their source area. * Setting up and maintaining an effective decontamination process for their source area. C.42 she UMa~naewmetPan-HSP Revision S Eafro Air Forc Base * ~~~~0 Documenting that all personnel and equipment leaving the contami- nated areas have been effectively decontaminated. Furthermore, in addition to the above, the lead SSO is responsible for: * Coordinating the source area SSCs. * Verifying that the source area SSCs are following the above guidelines. * Taking the lead in all emergency situations which occur within the OU until a professional emergency response team arrives. * Holding a pre-entry safety meeting. 9.1.3 Project Manager The project manager is responsible for: * Ensuring that the project is being conducted in a safe manner. * Informing all personnel of the safety precautions required at the site. Controlling the movement of all onsite personnel (i.e., keeping un- trained personnel in areas where no exposure potential is present). C.43 Sheo Menawgmnt Pion - NSP Revision 5 EAtion Air Forc Base 9.2 Subcontractor Personnel The subcontractors will be identified in an addendum before fieldwork begins. All subcontractor personnel must present certification that they are trained in accordance with hazardous waste laws, have been approved by a physician for hazardous waste work, and are fit to wear a respirator. This can be ac- complished by signing a contractual form that states that the contractor's personnel have been fit-tested, trained, and are currently in a medical moni- toring program. CH2M HILL will require subcontractors to provide a single point of contact for safety related matters, this person will be identified in an addendum. This person will be responsible for monitoring compliance with the HSP for sub- contractor personnel. If CH2M HILL notes safety violations, these will be brought to the attention of the contact, who will be responsible for corrective action. If corrective actions are not taken or are inadequate, the lead CH2M HILL SS0 will take action to force the subcontractor to take appropriate cor- rective action up to and including barring subcontractor personnel from fur- ther shte access and terminating the subcontract. The task manager and project manager will be notified if subcontractors are not taking appropriate corrective actions. In cases where the subcontractor is the safety expert (e.g., drilling safety), CH2M HILL may delegate responsibility to that subcontractor. A health and safety plan specific for each subcontractor's type of equipment and operation will be required from each subcontractor. Subcontractors' safety procedures that are used in this manner will be attached to this HSP as an addendum prior to conducting the work. 0.44 Site Managnemen Plan-HtSP Revision 5 Meson Air Fam Base 9.3 Health and Safety Field and Team Chain of Command and Procedures 9.3.1 Client U.S. Air Force, Elelson AFB Project Manager: Julie Stringer 9.3.2 EMO EMO Project Manager: TO BE IDENTIFIED IN THE SPECIFIC ADDENDUM PNL Project Manger: TO BE IDENTIFIED IN THE SPECIFIC ADDENDUM EMO Health and Safety Manager: TO BE IDENTIFIED IN THE SPECIFIC ADDENDUM 9.3.3 CH2MV HILL CH2M HILL Project Manager: TO BE IDENTIFIED IN THE SPECIFIC ADDENDUM CH2M HILL OU Task Manager: TO BE IDENTIFIED IN THE SPECIFIC ADDENDUM. CH-2M HILL Lead Site Safety Coordinator (SSC): TO BE IDENTIFIED IN THE SPECIFIC ADDENDUM. CH-2M HILL District Health and Safety Manager (DHSM): Mollie Netherland 9.3.4 Subcontractors TO BE IDENTIFIED IN THE SPECIFIC ADDENDUM. C.45 Sheit.Managw.~ Plan-lisp Revision S Nelson Aif Foo Base 10.0 Training 10.1 General Training The general training requirements are discussed in Section 9.1.1. In addition to these requirements, personnel working on the site must complete a pre- entry briefing which contains shte-specific information. The lead SSC will con- duct a pre-entry safety meeting for all new employees on the site and periodi- cally thereafter. At a minimum the training must cover the information listed below. The SSC will keep records of training in the logbook or field note- book. FOR SOME FIELD ACTIVITIES OTHER TOPICS MAY NEED TO BE DISCUSSED DURING THE PRE-ENTRY SAFETY MEETING. IF REQUIRED THESE TOPICS WILL BE IDENTIFIED IN THE SPECIFIC ADDENDUMS. * Emergency procedures for personnel injury, suspected overexposures, fires, explosions, chemical, and vapor releases. * Location of onsite emergency equipment and supplies of clean water. * Local emergency contacts, hospital routes, evacuation routes, and assembly points. * Site communication including the location of the nearest phone to each source area and location of the mobile phone. * The purpose of the two-way radios and what channel to use in the event of an emergency. C.46 Site MangMW&Mt Plan-#ISP Revision 5 Bevkon Aw Fam Ba. * Names of personnel trained in first aid and CPR in each source area. * Work zones as they have been established. * Decontamination procedures. * Notification procedures for contacting CH2M HILL's medical consultant and the injured team member's occupational physician. * Identify emergency evacuation routes and on site assembly points. * New workers on the site will be briefed on the emergency response plan before entering the exclusion zone. * The "buddy system" will be enforced for field activities involving poten- tial exposure to hazardous materials and during any work within the exclusion zone. Each person will observe his/her partner for symp- toms of chemical overexposure, cold stress, and provide emergency assistance when warranted. Personnel working in the exclusion zone will maintain line of sight contact or maintain communications (i.e., two- way radios) with the site support facilities. Emergency Signals: The following emergency signals shall be used: Grasping throat with hand Emergency-help me Thumbs up OK-understood Grasping buddy's wrist Leave site now 2 short blasts or sounds, repeated All clear C.47 Site Msnagwnw( Nan-MS P Revision 5 Eison AitFrce Base Continual sounding of horn Emergency-leave site 10.2 Additional Training Some tasks and/or equipment may require specific training. If such conditions arise, training will be conducted by a knowledgeable person, who is approved by the DHSM, prior to conducting such work. 11.0 Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) Specification The basic requirements for the level of protection expected to be used at the site are shown in Table 3. HOWEVER, THE TYPE OF PPE IS DEPENDANT ON THE FIELD ACTIVITIES AND WILL BE IDENTIFIED IN THE SPECIFIC ADDENDUMS. 12.0 Air Monitoring Program Periodic monitoring of the site is required to determine the effectiveness of engineering and work practice controls, to re-evaluate levels of protection, and to determine if site conditions have changed. All instruments will be calibrated in a clean environment per the manufacturer's instructions at the beginning of each day. At the end of each day, all of the instruments will be checked against the calibration gas and then will be charged so they are ready for use C.48 sit. MaMnageme Plan-lISP Revision 5 sa.on Air Fe,. Base when necessary. The instruments will be visually inspected on a routine basis 0 ~~~~(at least weekly) to help verify that the equipment is operating correctly. 0 C~~~~~~~~~~.49 Site Managemet Plan-HSP Revision 5 Edscn Ak Fcwc BSme Table 3 Levels of Protection Level of Protection' Required Equipment Level D (modified) Rubber steel toed/shank boots. Leather steel toes/shank boots with boot covers may be substituted. Outer and inner gloves. Safety glasses. Safety goggles are required when a splash potential is present. Cotton or tyvek coveralls. Polycoated tyvek are re- quired when a splash potential is present. Hard hats when overhead hazards are present. Level C The equipment required in Level D as well as a full face respirator. ______Polycoated tyvek taped to boots and gloves. 'Levels D and C are the only levels of protection expected to be used at the site. If higher levels of protection are necessary for a particular task, the equipment required will be identified in an addendum. 2Sorne areas and/or tasks may require Level C protection initially. Such areas and tasks will be identified in an addendum. Site Mfg~nagmt mlan-lisp Revision 5 BEaeon Air Force Bee Calibration and monitoring results will be recorded in a logbook as results are obtained. Any information such as monitoring and sample results that could provide exposure information will be communicated to the subcontractors as it is obtained. Since the monitoring equipment is the basis for the levels of protection, it is very important that the equipment be working properly. Each piece of moni- toring equipment will be inspected to determine if it is working correctly. If the equipment is not working or is not calibrated correctly, the work must be halted until the equipment is operational and reliable. The lead SSC will be contacted whenever equipment is nonoperational. Because the equipment does not function in low temperatures, to the extent possible the monitoring equipment must be kept in a warm, dry environment in between tests. All monitoring equipment must be kept in a heated work area and must be sealed in a zip-lock bag or 'baggie" except when in use. These procedures will prolong the effectiveness and prevent damage by condensation. The HNu is nonfunctionable in atmospheres of 95 percent or greater humidity, and therefore should not be used in such conditions. If such conditions exist, an organic vapor analyzer (OVA) will be used or work will be halted until the humidity is less than 95 percent. General monitoring locations and frequencies are given in Table 4. Some field activities will require all of the equipment mentioned, while other activities may require only some of the equipment listed. SPECIFIC MONITORING REQUIREMENTS ARE DEPENDENT ON THE FIELD ACTIVITIES AND C.51 8.MenAamgerot Plan-HSP Revision 5 Begun Air Forc Base Table 4 Required Monitoring Equipment and Action Levels of Upgrading Personnel Protective Equipment (PPE) Page 1 of 2 Equipment Reading2 Action Explosimeter < 10% LEO! Continue with caution. 10-20% LEL Continue with caution while implementing con- trol measures such as mechanical ventilation. > 20% LEL Halt operations and evac- uate the area until the readings are below 10% LEL. 02 19.5-21% 02 Continue operations in Level D PPE. Needle detects upward and Halt operations and evac- then drops to zero uate the area until the readings are approxi- mately 20% 02. .c 15% 02 Halt operations and evac- uate the area until read- ings are approximately 20% 02. * 19.5% 02 Level B PPE required. *>21% 02 Halt operations and evac- uate the area until read- ings are approximately 20% 02. HNu (with 10.2eV lamp); < 5 ppmn Continue operations in OVA; OVM; ______Level D PPE. 5 - 10 ppm Continue operations in Level C PPE. > 10 ppm Level B PPE required. Wet Magemewnt nan-HSP Revision 5 Sdsn Alt Fame Baa * ~~~~~~~~~~~~Table4 Required Monitoring Equipment and Action Levels of Upgrading Personnel Protective Equipment (PPE) ______P age 2 o f 2 Equipment Reading"e Action Mini-Ram <1i mg/rnl Continue operation in Level D PPE. 1 to 5 mg/rn 3 Continue operations in Level D PPE. Implement measures such as covering contaminated soils or wetting soils to control airborne dust. 5 to 10 mg/rn 3 Continue operations in Level C PPE. >10 mg/rn 3 Halt operations. Sound Level Meter (SLM) <85 dBA Continue operations. 85 to 120 dBA Continue operations with hearing protection, audio- metric monitoring, and ______training. > 120 dBA Halt operation. 'Readings are above background. bjjower explosive limit. Sit. Managemet Plan-/ISP Revision 5 EWson Air Forc Base WILL BE IDENTIFIED IN THE SPECIFIC ADDENDUMS. CHANGES IN THE AIR MONITORING PROGRAM SUCH AS: THE ADDITION OR DELETION OF MONITORING EQUIPMENT, A DIFFERENCE IN ACTION LEVELS, OR A CHANGE IN MONITORING FREQUENCY WILL BE IDENTIFIED IN THE SPECIFIC ADDENDUMS. At a minimum, monitoring will be conducted at the beginning of each shift and on a routine basis (e.g., every 30 minutes) throughout the field activities, whenever work begins at a new area onsite, when different contaminants are encountered, or when a different work activity begins. After acquiring the approval of the lead SSC, the source area SSC can reduce the frequency of monitoring for a specific activity at a given location if the readings are contin- ually low. Any changes in air monitoring requirements will be documented in the SSC logbook. 13.0 Shte Procedures and Work Limitations 13.1 Site Entry Procedures * Attend safety briefing before starting field activities. * Read and agree to follow the base's safety program and the CH2M HILL HSP and addendums. * Locate the telephone which is closest to the field activities to be used in the event of an emergency. C.54 site Menwwgwnm Mnwnsp Revision 5 Edson Air Pew Bee * At least one source area will have a mobile phone at all times. Identify which area has the mobile phone and the procedures for radioing for help in the event of an emergency. * Confirm and post the emergency telephone numbers at each source area. * Determine wind direction, install wind flags, and establish work zones at each source area. * Set up decontamination facilities at each source area. * Conduct site entry monitoring at each source area. 13.2 Decontamination Procedures The decontamination stations will be established on the upwind edge of the exclusion zone to help prevent contaminated materials from being transported to the "clean" areas of the site and samples from being cross contaminated. 13.2.1 Personnel If disposable boot covers are worn, wash with TSP (or Liqui-nox) and water, rinse with water, and remove. Wash and rinse outer gloves and boots as de- scribed above, and remove outer gloves. If tyvek are worn, remove. If a respi- rator is worn, remove and decontaminate as required by the manufacturer. Remove inner gloves. Employees will wash their hands and face with soap and water. Shower will be taken as soon as possible. 0.55 Met Msnaa'W~t Plan-HiSP Revision 5 EWson Air Fame.Ba.. 13.2.2 Monitoring Equipment Monitoring equipment will be wiped with methanol and then water. If it is antici- pated that the equipment will become contaminated, it will be wrapped in plastic to help prevent the instruments from becoming contaminated. If plastic is used to protect the equipment, it will be discarded prior to the equipment leaving the contamination reduction zone. 13.2.3 Sampling Equipment Sampling equipment will be washed with TSP (or Liqui-nox) and rinsed with water, distilled water, and methanol. The equipment will be allowed to air dry and then it will be rinsed with again with distilled water. 13.2.4 Samples Contaminated sample containers will be wiped with a towel and distilled water. 13.2.5 Cars and Heavy Equipment All vehicles taken into the contaminated areas of the site must be steam cleaned prior to leaving the site. To reduce contamination inside of vehicles, plastic sheeting will be used to cover the floor, seats, and any other areas which may come into contact with contaminated materials. C.56 Site ManagemoMent Ma-HSP Revision 5 Be/son Air Force Base * ~~13.3 Disposal Procedures of Materials Generated by CH2M HILL * All soils and liquids generated during the field activities and disposal PPE will be placed in drums. * Ultimate responsibility for disposal of the material rests with the Elelson AFB. CH2M HILL may coordinate analysis, packaging, storage, transport and disposal of waste material, but will not assume responsibility for the waste (i.e., sign manifests as generator, etc.). Prior to beginning field work, the waste handling procedures will be agreed to with the client, site owner, and/or responsible party. * Laboratory samples will be returned to the site, client, site owner, or re- sponsible party for disposal following analysis unless otherwise specified. 13.4 Spill Containment Procedures Large-scale spill containment procedures are not necessary because CH2M HILL and their subcontractors will not be handling large amounts of liquid materials. However, to contain spills during decontamination activities, will take place over plastic sheet or plastic buckets. In the event that oil or hydraulic fluids spills or leaks from the heavy equipment, the effected soil will be excavated until visually stained material is removed. This material would be placed in drums and disposed of in accordance with applicable regulations. 0.57 Site Managnw~t Plan-HISP Revision S SEiaon Air Forc Ane 13.5 Confined Space Entry Procedures Confined space entry requires an additional health and safety plan and a permit. Refer to CH2M HILL SOP HS-1 7, contained in the Waste Management and Industrial Processes Discipline Health and Safety Manual, Volume 1. 13.6 Work Procedures and Uimitatlons * Avoid visibly contaminated areas. * No eating, drinking, chewing tobacco or gum, or smoking in the source area. Personnel will wash their hands and face prior to eating, drinking, or smoking. * No contact lenses. * When respirators are required, personnel can have no facial hair that would interfere with respirator fit. Personnel working in Level D can have facial hair if they are prepared to shave or leave work area if respiratory upgrade is required. * Buddy system is effect at all times in exclusion zone. * Sfte work will be performed during daylight hours whenever possible. Any work conducted during hours of darkness will require an addendum which specifies the lighting requirements. * Fuel supplies will be properly stored and grounded. C.58 Site Mangmpenwt Plan-HSP Revision 5 Edson Air Force Ba.s 14.0 Emergency Response Plan 14.1 Pre-Emergency Planning The SSC is to perform the following pre-emergency planning tasks before start- ing field activities and will coordinate emergency response with the operating facility when appropriate: * Confirm that each field team is in contact with the lead SSC or another field team. * Review emergency procedures for personnel injury, exposures, fires, explosions, and chemical vapor releases. * Confirm that a mobile phone or two-way radios are available for emer- gency calls. * Confirm and post emergency telephone numbers (Form 31 1) and route to hospital in the field trailer. At each source area, the emergency telephone numbers and hospital maps will be easily accessible to all employees. * Review names of personnel trained in first aid and CPR who are in each sampling area. * Review notification procedures for contacting CH2M HILL's medical consultant and team member's occupational physician. 0.59 shte Management Man -/SP Revision 5 Edeson Air Flwe Bas. Post site map marked with locations of emergency equipment and sup- plies at the field trailer. * Locate emergency supplies and clean water at source area. * Review contingency plan for applicability to any changed site conditions, alterations in onsite operations, or personnel availability. * Designate one vehicle as the emergency vehicle at each source area; place hospital directions and map inside; keep keys in ignition during field activities. * Drive route to hospital. * Inventory and check-out site emergency equipment and supplies in each source area. * Setup personnel decontamination stations at each source area. * Brief new workers of emergency response plan. The lead SSC is to verify that all source areas have completed the pre- emergency planning. C.60 site Menegeainat Mlan-liSP Revision S Edaen Air Fom. Base 14.2 Emergency Recognition and Prevention Prevention of emergencies will be aided by the effective implementation of the health and safety procedures specified in this HSP. The initial site safety briefing will emphasize recognition of the types of emergencies anticipated onsite. Periodic safety briefings will be conducted by the SSC as field activities proceed. Hazards that warrant specific emergency recognition and prevention techniques will be discussed. 14.3 Emergency Equipment The following emergency equipment and supplies will be available and the locations known to all personnel: * Mobile telephones and two-way radios * ABC fire extinguishers * Industrial first-aid kits (for each field team) * Stretcher or blanket (at field trailer) * Supplies of clean water (for each field team) * Eye wash (for each field team) * Facility emergency equipment 14.4 Contingency Plan The 8S0 will assume charge in the event of an emergency in their source area and the lead SS0 will assume overall responsibility. C.61 Sie Mnamgane plan-/ISP Revision 5 5,/son Al, Foic Bs. 14.4.1 Emergency Medical Treatment The SSC will assume charge during a medical emergency until the ambulance arrives, or until the injured person is admitted to the emergency room. The SSC will also perform the following duties: * Prevent further injury. * Initiate first aid and/or CPR. * Verify that the ambulance and/or hospital has been called. * Determine if decontamination will make the injury worse. If it will, seek medical treatment immediately. * Make certain that the injured person is accompanied to the emergency room. * Notify the CH2M HILL project manager of the injury. * Notify the USAF or subcontractor's project manager if their employee ha been injured. * Notify the CH2M HILL DHSM. * Notify the injured person's human resources department. C.62 sit. ManeOf Plen.-nsp Revision 5 Eefeon Air Force Base Prepare an incident report. Submit this to the Corporate Director Health and Safety (Washington D.C. office) and CH2M HILL Corporate Human Resources Department (Denver office) within 48 hours. * Contact EMO within 24 hours and submit an incident report within 15 working days for all injuries involving lost work days or occupational illnesses. 14.4.2 Evacuation * Evacuation routes will be designated by the SSC in each sampling loca- tion before work begins. * Assembly points at each sampling area and away from it will be desig- nated before work begins. 0 .~~~~~Personnelwill exit theexclusion zone and assemble at the assembly point at the sampling area upon hearing the emergency signal for evacuation of the exclusion zone. • Personnel will assemble at the assembly point away from the sampling area upon hearing the emergency signal for a sampling area evacuation. * The SS0 and a buddy will remain at the sampling area after the area has been evacuated to assist (if possible) local responders and advise them of the nature and location of the incident. C.63 Met Mafnagemwnt Plan -HSP Revision 5 iEsoan Aif Fac. Base • The SS0 accounts for all personnel in the assembly zone at the sampling area. * A person designated by the SS0 (before work begins) will account for personnel at the assembly area away from the sampling area. * The SS0 writes up the incident as soon as possible after it occurs, and submits a report to the CH-2M HILL Corporate Director of Health and Safety and the CH-2M HILL Human Resources Department within 48 hours. 14.4.2.1 Evacuation Routes Evacuation routes will be designated by the SSC in each sampling location before work begins. 14.4.2.2 Evacuation Signals * Grasping throat with hand-EMERGENCY-HELP ME * Grasping buddy's wrist-LEAVE AREA NOW * Thumbs up-OK, UNDERSTOOD * Continuous air horn-EMERGENCY-EVACUATE * Two short blasts on air horn-ALL CLEAR C.64 Site Managenent NPm-NSP Revision 5 Eduon Air Forc BOse 14.5 Onslte Local Emergency Response Numbers The local emergency response numbers list below must be posted onsite. Table 5 is a summary of the emergency telephone numbers which must be posted onsite. * Ambulance: 911 or 377-2296 * Base Clinic: 911 or 377-2296 * Poison Control Center: 456-7182 * Base Security: 911 or 377-5130 * Fire: 911 or 377-4266 * Explosive Unit: 911 or 377-1654 14.6 Offslte Local Emergency Response Numbers * Fairbanks Memorial Hospital: 451-81 81 14.7 Emergency Route to Hospital Figure 2, which shows the route to the hospital is attached to this plan and will also be in all emergency vehicles identified during the pre-entry safety briefing. DIRECTIONS TO THE BASE HOSPITAL WILL BE IDENTIFIED FOR EACH SOURCE AREA IN THE SPECIFIC ADDENDUMVS. 0 ~~~~~~~~~~C.65 Sit. Msmanaeet Man-HiSP Revision 5 fiElson Air For Base Table 5 EMERGENCY PHONE NUMBERS DEPARTMENT PHONE ______(ADDRESS IF APPLICABLE) BASE SECURITY 911 or 377-5130 FIRE 911 or 377-4266 EXPLOSIVES UNIT 911 or 377-1654 AMBULANCE 911 or 377-2296 EIELSON MEDICAL AND DENTAL CENTER 911 or 377-2296 FAIRBANKS MEMORIAL HOSPITAL 451-8181 EIELSON UTILITIES 377-1856 14.8 Hospitals * Elelson Medical and Dental Center 3349 Central Avenue 377-2296 * Fairbanks Memorial Hospital 1650 Koweles Fairbanks, Alaska 907/452-8181 C.66 site Mangawnet pian- USP Revision 5 Evkon Air Fom. Base 14.9 CH2M HILL and Client Emergency Contacts CH-2M HILL Medical Consultant Dr. Kenneth Chase, Washington Occupational Health Associates, Inc. 202/463-6698 (8-5 EST) 202/463-6440 (after hours answering service; physician will return call within 30 minutes) * CH-2M HILL Regional Health and Safety Manager Mollie Netherland/SEA 206/453-5000 (X 5342) * Occupational Physician for ANC Dr. Bruce Kiessling Primary Care Associates 907/562-1234 Team members under his care: ANO team members identified in the specific addendum. C.67 Site Manegemomn Plan-lISP Revision 5 Eiason Air Forc Base Occupation Physician for CVO Corvallis Clinic 503/754-1150 Team members under his care: OVO team members identified in the specific addendlums * Occupation Physician for PDX Dr. Kirby Griffin Northwest Occupational Health Associates 503/246-7030 Team members under his care: PDX team members identified in the specific addendlums * CH-2M HILL Project Manager TO BE IDENTIFIED IN THE SPECIFIC ADDENDUM * CH-2M HILL District Health & Safety Manager Mollie Netherland/SEA 206/453-5000 0.68 Met Managemet Plan-HiSP Revision 5 Eansn Air Forc Baess * *~~~~Client Contact Air Force Julie Stringer 907/377-1164 * EMO Ron Smith 509/376-5831 * Pacific Northwest Laboratory CONTACTS WILL BE IDENTIFIED IN THE SPECIFIC ADDENDUM. * ANC Regional Personnel Office Joanne Baker 907/278-2551 * CVO Regional Personnel Office Lynn Robertson 503/758-0235 C.69 Sit. NMganagnt Plan-HlSP Revision 5 Ee/son Air Forc BSe& * PDX Regional Personnel Office Jon Varney 503/224-8125 * CH-2M HILL Corporate Health and Safety Director Marty Mathamel/WOC 703/471-1441 * CH-2M HILL Corporate Personnel Office Beth Brown/DEN 303/771-0900 14.10 Local Utilities * Elelson Utilities 377-1856 15.0 Plan Approval This site safety plan has been written for the use of CH2M HILL's employees and subcontractors. CH2M HILL claims no responsibility for its use by others. The plan is written for the specific site conditions, purposes, dates, and personnel specified and must be amended if these conditions change. C.70 n I 1 1 ½' - I a; RftIIA&flaa :;a a L E Ii 1.. 4 unnuauuuunubni In L1 .1 ½ * :it a Lag fl I fl 'n- - I U 13 tEL. - Ella I I. - Sm 7/ *q y .J 0< * ana *'* * hj fv II liii * g,; I;J*IiIaa;itItatfld;t2 F. 144 lID 0 A A- 4 * I) 9: % 1\OjMt iA ( ,7'Q- N., I' ½ %UI.)f * - 0 ,* it 2 ?4 '' i% '' -tC5 /YQ -, / •& Ž.1 '2 4 i,*, ' I jr ' / I 0Q * ii * A 4 1 * I / i A I Ar" i 4 ii 4.1) ¼ * I I I. - ,*, * * - p II I 4r 3 I *'bd ft to * j ¼ hi. * r(JAt\K.f.>I\$. * I p I' I I I I AK 3 ti 7 K II 4C\ ' 'I' .. * ' 'h' 1 I > > jr * * , I - -. .* * I AVMOVOU U I * * - * N *; ' a< '-l. t½V '* __ K. I. -,4 ijt. (\j K4 uY4.-.k bl VZ ; U b * - jtjAD' Ys' 9 ' 'i jI*I It ______* ,t$Q%) "<>U -¾--- ;: > r¶---r *N 4 - V I * 3Y Q ?. K \ b WA A * * J* '4 S. * v-i C ,{ - I 1 4 * , -I.), * 1,-I,.' A ' / .*.* .1> C yK2 QV- S-- 2' Sie Memongmet Plan-HSP Revision S Eiuon Airc B...8" 0 Appendix C, Attachment 1 EMPLOYEE SIGN OFF 0 0 ATITACHMENT 1 S EMPLOYEE SIGNOFF Teemployees listed below have been provided a copy of this health and safety1 Iplan, have read and understood it, and agree to abide by its provisions.J EMPLOYEE NAME EMPLOYEE SIGNATURE / DATE S~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ S _____ site Mamsnagwn Pla~N-SP Revision 5 BWattn Air Forc Base Appendix C, Attachment 2 FORM 533 RECORD OF HAZARDOUS WASTE FIELD ACTIVITY 0~~~~~~~~0L Site Managm ent PierMS p Revision 5 Meson Air F Bae&. S Appendix C. Attachment 3 EMO HEALTH & SAFETY PLAN REQUIREMENTS S S ATTACHMENT 3 February 14, 1991 HEALTH AND SAF-ETY PLAN REQUIREj4ENTS PREFACE Health and Safety Plans prepared for Battelle, Environmental Management Operations (STl) must demonstrate that the contractor has thoroughly thought through the task(s) to be completed and has developed a compliant and realistic plan that fits the potential risks of the job. Through careful pre- job planning, appropriate protective systems and controls will be in place to protect against the identified risks. Employee exposure to any chemical biological or physical agent will also be maintained to a level which is as low as reasonably achievable (ALARA). Any array of engineering controls, sound compliance with site rules, prudent use of personal protective equipment, and proactive utilization of onsite analytical techniques which can be used to safely accomplish the task will be a positive step toward achieving ALARA. Unless otherwise directed through individual task orders, the Contractor * ~shall adhere to the following health and safety requirements for work performed under this Master Agreement. The requirements herein shall be in effect for all work task ordered after the release date of this document. It is not retroactive. .Throughout this document, the word 'ensure' is used. In an effort to clarify the intent, the following is the EMIO definition of ensure: To apply the best management practices to mitigate significant and credible risks associated with hazardous waste operations activities. The best management practice shall be based upon the application of applicable and appropriate J ~health and safety regulations, as well as an ongoing program of work practice and equipment inspections, technical reviews, audits, et cetera. Best management practice would also include the ability to change site procedure to reflect new protective requirements for unanticipated risks. GENERAL REQUIREMIENTS All EMOa contractors conducting hazardous waste operations (activities which include, but are not limited to, characterization and remediation), within a hazardous waste site must provide sufficient detailed information ATTACHMENT 3 February 14, 1991 ,within their health and safety plans (HASPs) to substantiate that assigned jobs or tasks will be accomplished in the safest manner achievable. The contractor's plan must demonstrate that worker protection will not be compromised, that the intent of all, applicable regulatory health and safety regulations are followed, and that the task(s) will be accomplished in a manner that will minimize the risk of employee exposure to any acute or chronic injury, irritation, or trauma. ENO0 reserves the right to require additional safeguards if we determine that additional control elements are needed. All HASPs must be clear, concise, and user friendly. In preparing the HASP, the contractor must consider the audience for which the plan is being written. Recognition of the audience (e.g., drillers, technicians, equipment operators, samplers) is critical to ensuring that the document will be read, understood, and followed. The specific requirements listed below do not replace the requirements mandated under 29 CFR 1910.120, which all HASPs are expected to incorporate. Rather, the following specific requirements are additional areas of emphasis that require special attention. SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS The following elements must be addressed in every HASP: *project or task sunnary *applicable health and safety regulations - federal, state, and local *corporate policies and procedures - health and safety related *risk identification and mitigation * engineering controls and support systems * protection levels *tools and equipment *personnel monitoring, sampling and record keeping *adequacy of site controls *health and safety personnel *health and safety training 2 ATTACHMENT3 February 14, 1991 *sub-contractor and associate contractor controls incident reporting. Project or Task Summarv The HASP must contain a short summary of the task(s) to be conducted. The specific boundaries of activity shall be established within the plan. It is important that the limits or components of the project for which the HASP is written are clearly spelled out within the plan. The summary shall be extensive enough that a reviewer who is neither familiar with the site nor the activity required can understand what will be done under the requirements of the plan. The contractor should write one HASP if the job is short or easily defined, but if the project is a large and long-term one, a master, higher tier plan may be prepared. Higher tier plans must be supplemented with job or site-specific sub-tier plans as the project develops. Health and Safety Reaulations - Federal, State, and Local All contractors shall comply with applicable federal, state, and local * ~health and safety rules and regulations; in cases where requirements vary, the more protective shall be invoked. Where no existing regulation governs a certain activity that requires control, e.g., the technical inspection of a drilling rig, the contractor shall invoke selected industry-based standards or guidelines such as American Petroleum Institute (API) or International * ~Association of Drilling Contractors (IADC). HASPs do not need to itemize every conceivably applicable regulation, however, we do require that regulatory controls which are of unique risk to the assigned job be used in - ~developing the plan. For example, we would not expect the contractor to specify code requirements for the width of a stairway. However, we will expect that specific standards will be referenced in instances where unique and high risk operations are anticipated. Examples of such unique high risk operations would include the need to utilize a man-lift at varying elevations; or the need to enter an explosive atmosphere and conduct sampling, etc. * Corporate Policies and Procedures - Health and Safety 3 ATTACHMENT 3 February 14, 1991 AllI co rpo rate healIth and safety stan dards that are appl icablIe to the task(s) must either be included or referenced within the HASP; if incorporated by reference, a copy of the specific language must be sent to EMO or available for periodic, audit. Referenced policies or standards must be available for review by all project employees. For example, if a corporate policy dealing with the use of respirators is referenced within the HASP, a copy must be available to all project employees; such policies and standards must be discussed during routine safety and health orientations. Risk Identification and MitiQation Thorough pre-job planning should successfully mitigate the risks associated with any task. Contractors are expected to conduct the necessary scoping, physical reconnaissance, investigatory discussions, and historical data review to provide a preliminary list of credible risks. The contractor must analyze the job at hand, segment the job into manageable elements, and systematically evaluate and assess all credible risk categories associated with the job. Workers must be aware and understand the risks associated with each task, the potential consequences, and how the risks will be mitigated. The HASP must list all credible risks in such a manner that any worker can understand the relative risk of the task being undertaken. A risk assessment must be included which contains, as a minimum, a suimmary of the worker health and safety risks and the toxicological properties (inthe case of chemical risks, the mandated or permissible exposure limits coupled with the described methods for monitoring exposure action and warning levels); risk mitigation actions must also be provided. Again, the contractor is requested to utilize their experience and expertise in identifying and mitigating the credible and unique risks and challenges associated with the operation. Routine standardized requirements, as mentioned in the examples above, are presumed to be compliant with the applicable rules and regulations and thus should not be addressed. Engineering Controls and Support Systems The contractor must describe in the HASP any engineering controls that will be utilized in the conduct of the work; an example of the kind of control 4 ATTACHMENT 3 February 14, 1991 that should be included would be the utilization of a remote filling system 'for collecting purgewater in tanker trucks or the use of portable exhausters in potentially hazardous excavations. In addition, all support systems that are an integral part of worker health and safety must be described. For example, when the contractor specifies that a breathing air system or a decontamination trailer is going to be utilized, B'1C expects to be able to determine where the systems will be located, how the systems will be maintained, and how the employees will be instructed to use the systems. Protection Levels All personal protective equipment and clothing required to provide adequate worker protection must be listed in the HASP. The onsite project manager must use the action/warning levels for the credible risks listed in the Risk Identification and Mitigation section of the HASP to identify areas where certain concise steps must be followed to ensure that adequate protection is provided. Although many regulatory guidance documents depict a suite of protective clothing and respiratory protection from level 0 through level A, EMO expects that prudent planning will result in modifications of this categorical description of apparel that are commensurate with the * ~potential hazards. In addition, the contractor is expected to evaluate the risks, the personal protective equipment, and the ambient work environment and make technically protective trade-off decisions by instituting such other activities as onsite analytical screening capabilities in order to make prompt upgrade/downgrade decisions based upon 'real-time' analysis. The contractor is expected to weigh the risk of wearing extensive personal protective equipment in an environment which may be life threatening (e.g., heat stress) - ~against the perceived risk of personal exposure to an agent and develop a * ~smarter, innovative method of accomplishing the job without exceeding any personnel exposure levels. Tools and Eouipment - ~~The contractor must describe in the HASP a fitness for safe use protocol for all tools and equipment used on the job. Further, the contractor must ATTACHMENT 3 February 14, 1991 demonstrate that adequate tools will be available to safely perform the task(s). Every tool that will be utilized on the job does not have to be listed in the plan, however, the contractor must demonstrate that a system is in place to ensure that they and their sub-contractors will be utilizing the appropriate tools and equipment and that the tools and equipment will be inspected routinely and for safe condition and operability. Inspection of tools and equipment must comply with all applicable rules and regulations; in instances where no regulatory standard applies (such as a cable tool drilling rig), the contractor must use appropriate industry standards. Personnel Monitoring and Samoling Protocols If a potential exists that job site personnel may be exposed to a chemical~s) which exceeds the established action level(s), the contractor must specify the kinds of onsite personnel sampling that will be conducted; such sampling will be in addition to area monitoring with direct reading instruments. For example, if the contractor expects to encounter carbon tetrachloride levels which may exceed the OSHA action levels, then the HASP must address not only the type of instrument that will be used for area monitoring @ but the industrial hygiene personnel sampling that will take place as well. When sampling pumps and tubes are anticipated to be used, the HASP must describe where the tubes will be analyzed. Likewise, if the contractor states that sound level or heat stress surveys will be conducted, a brief procedure description and frequency of such surveys must be included in the HASP. All monitoring methods will be described in enough detail that the worker will know how the risk will be monitored, by what method, and with what frequency. The contractor should also describe the dosimetry/exposure data that will be generated, how that data will be recorded and transmitted to the employees, and how the records will be maintained. The contractor will be expected to provide the appropriate direct reading instrument(s), which are rated for safe use in the atmospheres to be monitored, for the specific risks identified. All other ancillary warning devices such as wind socks, smoke tubes etc., must also be described. Likewise, if a new or modified drilling rig is planned to be used, the 6 ATTACHMENT 3 February 14, 1991 * ~contractor is expected to point out the unique hazards associated with this equipment and th e steps site employees must take in order to safely work around this equipment. All environmental instrumentation that will be required to be used on the job will be listed in the HASP along with an appropriate description of the proper calibration gases, standards, regulators and current operating manuals. Adecuacv of Site Controls EM0 expects the contractor to provide site controls that are realistic; these must be described in the HASP. Site control requirements must fit the unique geographical and environmental characteristics of the work sites(s). For example, the controls that are imposed upon a work site in terms of zoning, barricading, corridor establishment, etc., must realistically reflect the work site and the associated risks. Health and Safety Personnel a ~~The HASP must provide a detailed description of the criteria by which Whealth and safety personnel will be selected for providing onsite day-to-day support on a particular job. The plan must describe the methods by which health and safety personnel are chosen. The criteria for qualification should include experience, education, technical training, and licenses. EM0 recognizes that on some jobs, the site safety officer will be wearing dual M "hats' ; that is, he or she may also be serving as a geologist or engineer. When this occurs, it is important that the contractor specify in the HASP the technical preparation that such an individual must have prior to his/her assignment as the site safety officer. Health and Safety Training All corporate health and safety training requirements required by 29 CFR 1910 and 1926 or applicable requirements must be referenced in the HASP. The contractor shall describe the training that will be provided for all project - ~employees and the procedures for managing and updating training records at the job site. Additional and unique training and documentation th at goes beyond 7 ATTACHMENT 3 February 14, 1991 'he specific requirements of 29 CFR 1910.120 may be required for such areas as asbestos removal, fork lift operators training, hearing conservation, and the use of direct reading instruments. Such additional training will be discussed in the HASP. Sub-contractor and Associate Contractor Controls 29 CFR 1910.120 specifically addresses the need to establish clear relationships betweerr all companies working within the site. This is necessary to provide clear lines of authority and responsibility as well as maintaining the necessary coimmunication links. The contractor must address in the HASP how the lines of authority are established when sub-tier or associate contractors are working on the same site. The contractor also must address how they will ensure that their sub-contractors are following the HASP, e.g., through inspections, audits, etc. Incident Reoorting All significant injuries (injuries or illnesses which require medical attention) and environmental incidents will be reported immnediately to the B'10 project manager. The HASP shall specify the incident reporting sequence and time constraints for providing the information to EJMG. For example, any lost work day injury or occupational illness will be reported to the EMO project manager within 24 hours; the contractor's investigation report will be sent to the EM0 project manager within 15 working days of the date of the incident or injury. Mte Me~nagat Mn.,-nSP Revision 5 Eafron Air Forc B... Appendix C, Attachment 4 MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEETS FOR EIELSON AIR FORCE BASE MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET U.S. DEPARTMENT OF LABOR MlAY BE USED TO COMPLY WITH OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH OSHA'S HAZARD COMMUNICATION STANDARD, ADMINISTRATION 29 CFR 1910.1200. STANDARD MUST BE (NON-MANDATORY FORM) CONSULTED------FOR- -SPECIFIC- - - - REQUIREMENTS.------FORM- - APPROVED------OMB- -NO.- -12ia-0072- - - - - IDENTITY (AS USED ON LABEL AND LIST) LIQUI-NOX SECTION I MANUFACTURER'S NAME: EMERGENCY TELEPHONE NUMBER: ALCONOX, INC. (2i2)-473-i300 ADDRESS: TELEPHONE NUMBER FOR INFORMATION: 2iS PARK AVENUE SOUTH (2i2)-473-1309 NEW YORK, NEW YORK 10t003 DATE P'REPARED: JULY 1, 198? SECTION 1I - HAZARDOUS INGREDIENTS/IDENTITY INFORMATION THERE ARE NO INGREDIENTS IN LIQUI-NOX WHICH APPEARED ON THE OSHA STANDARD. 29 CFR 1910 SUBPART Z. SECTION III - PHYSICAL/CHEMICAL CHARACTERISTICS BOILING POINT: 214 F SPECIFIC GRAVITY CH2Ozi): 1.075 VAPOR PRESSURE (MHHQ): NO DATA MELTING POINT: N.A. VAPOR DENSITY (AIR~i): NO DATA EVAPORATION RATE: NO DATA (DUTYL ACETATE=1) SOLUBILITY IN WATER; COMPLETELY SOLUBLE IN ALL PROPORTIONS APPEARANCE AND ODOR. YELLOW LIQUID - PRACTICALLY ODORLESS SECTION IV - FIRE AND EXPLOSION HAZARD DATA FLASH POINT (METHOD USED): NONE FLAMMADLE LIMITS. (CLEVELAND OPEN CUP) LEL: N.A. UEL: N.A. * EXTINGUISHING MEDIA: WATER, DRY CHEMICAL, FOAM, C02, SAND/EARTH SPECIAL FIRE FIGHTING PROCEDUREL: FOR FIRES INVOLVING THIS MATERIAL DO NOT ENTER WITHOUT PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT AND SELF CONTAINED BREATHING APPARATUS. - UNUSUAL FIRE AND EXPLOSION HAZA&DS. NONE SECTION V - REACTIVITY DATA STABILITY. STABLE CONDITIONS TO AVOID: NONE INCtJMPATIIILITY (M'ATERIALX rU AVOID): NONE HAZARDOUS DECOMPOSITION OR tCYPROflUCTX: 502 MAY BE RELEASED ON BURNING HAZARDOUS POLYMERIZATION WILL NOT OCCUR CONDITIONS TO AVOID: NONE SECTION VI - HEALTH HAZARD DATA ROUTES OF ENTRY: rNHALATION-NO SKIN-YES INGESTION-YEE HEALTH HAZARDS (ACUTE AND CHRONIC); SKIN CONTACT MAY PROVE LOCALLY IRRITATING. INGESTION MAY CAUSE DISCOMFORT AND/OR DIARRHEA. CARCINOGENICITY: NTP; Nn IARC MONOGRAPHS: NO OSHA REGULATED. NO SIGNS AND SYMPTOMS OF EXPOSURE: PROLONGED SKIN CONTACT MIAY CAUSE DRYING AND/OR CHAPPING. MEDICAL CONDITIONS GENERALLY AGGRAVATED BY EXPOSURE: N ONE EMERGENCY AND FIRST AID PROCEDURES: EYES-FLUSH WITH PLENTY OF WATER FOR 15 MINUTES SKIN-FLUSH WITH WATER INGESTION-DRINK LARGE QUANTITIES OF WATER, GET MEDICAL ATTENTION FOR DISCOMFORT SECTION VII - PRECAUTIONS FOR SAFE HANDLING AND USE STEPS TO BE TAKEN IN CASE MATERIAL IS RELEASED OR SPILLED: MIATERIAL FOAMS PROFUSELY.. RECOVER AS MUCH AS POSSIBLE WITH ABSORBENT MATERIAL AND RINSE REMAINDER TO SEWER. MATERIAL IS COMPLETELY BIODEGRADABLE. WASTE DISPOSAL METHOD: SMALL QUANTITIES MAY BE DISPOSED OF IN SEWER. LARGE QUANTITIES SHCULD BE SOAKED UP WITH ABSORBENT MATERIAL AND DISPOSED OF ACCORDING TO LOCAL ORDINANCES.- .PRECAUTIONS TO BE TAKEN IN HANDLING AND STORING: NONE REQUIRED - VISCOSITY OF MATERIAL INCREASES AT VERY LOW TEMPERATURES. OTHER PRECAUTIONS: NO SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS OTHER THAN THE GOOD INDUSTRIAL HYGIENE AND SAFETY PRACTICES EMPLOYED WITH ANY INDUSTRIAL CHEMICAL. SECTION VIII - CONTROL MEASURES RESPIRATORY PROTECTION (SPECIFY TYPE): , IC ~I ilDtdo Vt4H SCIENTIFIC P. 5 VENTILATION: LOCAL EXHAUST: NORMAL SPECIAL: N.A. MECHANICAL (GENERAL): N~.A. OTHER' N.A. . ~~PROTECTIVE CLOVES: RECOMMENDED EYE PROTECTION: RECOMMENDED OTHER PROTECTIVE CLOTHING OR EQUIPMENT: NOT REQUIRED WORK/HYGIENIC PRACTICES: NO SPECIAL PRACTICES REQUIRED - - . - - 0 o C F C a.' b.0 * SW - E f - DC a 0 S - L0 - a -. 0 *. c Cv CE C c cS -t a - EEC - o a. o - cLI -r * c Cu: -t *00 p ' iii '- n :' -: & 0 v.j bOA Z1 L aa a U c FE C 000 - a :.i a ¼ CL -. &s s : -- - U - S 0 &E.f zc U'.' CC- Los CC S - 0 a I ...u U , -- a >> >> Jace a .. C - * 0 -, Ilaiii z - -- F U j I - -I-- I a.0 I 7 UT - XE -t - S - SC S - - -i C = * P k - .5 - *L Er t I Is S.- j 'V 1 . K S., I J 5 E I S 5'' I. ' j. I if I - - [f* L C 7 "CFL o. I I £j £%0 'Sb - 0 C I, I = - - b I '? - 0-', aL; ; r.v. F = , t0 , *.. , L - C CE r 1< * a - - -- 'S '0 ! ej. .' - a S O...... je.s Is&" 'iV .. =- I a 1' * V 5'', j -- C & v - a - .ir 88 II P-p X - '' :1 S ?X Z 2 - - z. - Pb ''E * £0 tOO 3 o V CO - 'A 12 -, Ot *-O ± - £ a - Ea 0@L a EE >0 0 LA -o - C £c-, - C a - - a 0 a .0 a a a E ka ..o i a Li a ;:> iL< C Wa a a C. I U 0 - CjOa - "E Ij p .- £ - 3 C Li a - -J Li L* ; g-Li c.; -a;-g; 0.. a c -- C - i fl ! E4 ji a S S..E ..S 0 o 0 ± a: 3 eLi AiD Ez a - a.. ;a a. a ? Ej i a-= .. 0. OaaLi -J tJ o 0. * c 20 S ) - C.' at a.=.. - .. -- at..,. *. -* C-c 0. - C -' 'a ,O s .. ££ . a., -k-- 1k; .- v-a EEc * > W S - *0. s.t . Li Ct 1 aC - - - -a-e &; x C .).. C, -t £C C a C- or 2C *= aoj uc a ill Li> C- 0 -a. C - 0 -;i±- Ca, - Cfi: E; 'I;; -- Ego "a? s *r = C -CC 0 ' - ;& 'Li . . -= - Cat ii - Ei CC E * u trrs -. .C a .a 0. -b >' a a cOO o -:.ag Ec . E ij t. 2 - -U' a£' .22Ž E & -''8; - a ,... 0 £.va,. ' & E ±. .o >*-o .2 a- ,.og,. LiE a' j!?f jE; .±J ..2 *EE £t .... E :. C >.* 0. .za...-.C 0 a2 0 . 0 E' E -. S aLi* ''i& Ž 'o si-- 2 0 EE:E . o Fe c ' oc.a - ; j "' - * 2 . - I - W I I~~- U. a '0~~~~1CaN W W I..ICi o I C IC,.~40U4 - .nUX- I N WI L I tONN 0I~W=-01 I 0' W - 0 Q~~fl) WOO l~~~ I NDe: o - flees w I fl WI I~~~~~~~~~~~o-Ilc 0 I 024 ZW4'~ ~~~~~~~~~I -I I - 6 4 I I-4fl~~~~~~~~r)-= I U - I * a - - U I N C I OC I U -o U~~~=Wfl ~~1 ~~~~ ~~~-=W CYCY UI I U a ZI W 3)4b4 I U '- IW WI -V0W W> n iW' IJo =I .40 1542 *0 I N III 0 0 =-,O uo CU - I 2c W-I w- IC a 0.WWU- a~~~~~~. - I..i U N. 0 ~~~-aE~~~~~Za "Io I 0 0=1-l ce I IUN 0 IIof VI -K . I c UP,c 43o 0 -1 1 c=- I" a02 Wt ~~jW Z=~~~:wwoo 2-* w Io a1 UW . not>XI I r4N W.0v 2 W I- jU 7 LU ; W I.. tf -I...U I U W -=i L W W WI -- taJ~~~~~~gn~~t z -c ax-1 -Z W O 4 M.. WI (OU UOm U I, - 014) 4 L.U I LU I 40 WW>-W I - 11112~~I lic II.U II £< U..~ Efl Z)->4 I 0IW - 2 41 Oh.4r CX...J=Cfl I0 0U 1 U U 0' 1 00.,- Wa~~-,.=3 I.- Ito I 1- -W-LU U C I -IW SOw IL U4712 2 I -10 L =SIX ~~~I W==al> =0 Iii- -0 lU C =w W = OCOO >-I UmMWS0 JU."I W IIAZ CU I 1. 0 2 4 O 000 WI 00-..~ ~ 0400. &IC ox W1 0) -r~ 10f iL 4) W~~~lOLU U I'-U a -- ~~~~N 0 4U 1 = I r Wit) LU S 0 4) 24N000 v~~~~a>W4W44 'LU a-U~~~~VP WA th m m1 I - 4 U U UUU.41 rmp~~~~~I w IS 00 IS - - 0-, Il 0 W0 0 b.I- 41... a4Uufl-0 4 U-N fl IW 2 2~~~~ wil I ~~~~1- ~~~~~~~~~~~~~ 2 222 ml -,IV 0-424W = 44I I .I22LU 0 =0 -I< XII o~~~~~~~~~~ow4~~ 0 O.U I IW0. C 0 441l I f ) 3)-0 f I0 4 WIU U W C LI U) 0 U 0...I~~~~n34I uii WC - ..Ja= W WI U = U- .41- I 40W U 24 41~~zW W - = I WJ a SLUOU).U~~~ - I U 4 1111~~~U-l I -L W 0 I 0 a- C ) n C Nt 9 9 I~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~"C ..1 d M I0 -C W 0 Uji~~-- n e - 00~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~c0050 I WC I I - * I )-~~~Cow I U.3 -ii- 4 -4 3. s M6aC 0.- I .0W o I ~~~~~~~=-h l- I n30 0 W I I -C'UP-11, WM If)WI- I I 0-= 01.OW -a M*.4 N I 0M-Zl I -PW..J a Wn I C4WX~~~-Pa 1,00w =40=11 C o - SW4 I wa Cu - I UJNO~A-lc- 20 I. of WI-S MW I W I- fuJzW .1-U. I I1 W M n WE1- WcP 4ME I 0~~~~~11.MO 2- 1161. *2 tILE I C fl4I-~~~~O -I. 1.4- I 21 -JE- - S LWWI- I- ~~~~~~~~~~~~1-I 0fl04~~~~~~1 04 ISc UD-in~~~~~~~~~~0N a c I *in -w 01=11 .2 0 43 1164 C.,JM.J i-nO9 0 .0 I -1 I 4 4 OE0W I a I4 Wm). LI&- - .I l.C017.a = 0- M-n 1--c0 I I 2010c to Wag = 3 MXC 21 04 .0 WI- 4144 C!I =W-W3 WE-Jo = cW I -ta-I. - W -C 1.1 OW o 0. wo X Ifi I C-1c-d I C W -C 2==--24 = v I -C WWOJ. .-IN IL.0CD ~I 1.1=.0 0.=. I I NC-40( -C W -. I1 WOE I C NMII-I 0 ==C 4 0. I O~~~~~ a I. Z) IntC ~~W(31-MO-= 00I 4*11 ~.00CI-aI. 0=1r 4014 0 I 10.4~ ~ 0-U I 2 80~~~~~~~~~~0.4 .- uMi4 = * I~~~~~~~~~~~~0 4CM I 4= C -WO C= .0=0-0 1- - IAI O~~~~~IL" CI.1.W 0"W 141=4 =W-. 0 1 in V 14. MWWI 011 t0 =WCc I = C I I- II II..14 0 44 WI. WC cc I - 05a 00=2v I022 01" I PU le I L)IE. W20 - 4 CM ~~~~~~~~~~~~01-00 041.0 UJ =WC - 0 ICflOC EL~~~~~~~~~~I~0U4 I3 " Nm I Cal 001W- .cc I W 02W ME0-3. )-Uz CI- Oi.. 32 WU-142 WMW MU- 4 3 = I 04 -0 0~ot nW~ mU-1 .4-M I - WI W=0 Wu LI L 0 o )~= I W W31 CW 4* z..a -2...~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~U to -t5-oW mi z c L man ic I-au~~w~,- .nwu U>-P2 II- 04O I0 W I 012Z4W~ 024 4144 - - ~~~~IL I1-111 WcW i..CEM MCI~~~~~~1-0MW- O IX* ~~~. 0.11.00 .11.1-C II-. \ Olin 1I- >- LL L'4 W U IW tZ-M21.1 4U 0~ XC ccO -001MU 4 5 I COC~~~~~~~~~W.ZoM ILW W= C IC -P I 1-O of - C OW o.-W2OC 10 .-...jWS I-CU '1- 1W W~~~~~~~~~OWO I 0 .114: 1-0)- C M o Ir , .-J.44 1-inw 4 W04)M--0 N.00I.0 VIW0= ").W 016I -,= W~l Ma 14~~~ I>- (35 002 0.- W4 I 2.=.2 1Wfl 40.i I -o-wl -- 3 WOIMZ 1-0I0 Wz; 214 IS .~~~~~m-0 404 CJ C..JC 10.4 I a .W. -.~ In I C ~IW C 010W< 4C=I * 24 M 11- 0I~~~~~=.-LM -5I I4)LI W5I EM LU ILL. 545flin . - =wI-'- W*WI)o 4 ~~ W2 .flM00~ I =CWI4 00 C.44 C2 I ~~~~.C..OC1WL I- 5CC W 1M -h 0,W Cc in0 Ez. I-WML I I.&1- I LE - I NI.4 = = C SAz- oi V) MEO50 - W I CC~~~~.10 C f I& 0. I 2>.IOm. 402 0 Z4In~~~~~~~~~ZXI ~~~w I 550.)-_3 W--h * 2** I 5.~~~~~~-,W405 -WS 0 ~034 I 4,- 4o I I5-41 0024 W42. I>01 - ~~~~~~~~~I254)- C 4 W1WCE5) 0 4 U =>.2 504W EW I-41 UPI -P I I =0 I LIL=E1O 3 S.- W I W.4ZWW0 = 0 U- -0 =>Wo o)-n O OL1.WOO- 0 I- 51-11 0-ic I IP-.I OWMS- OIJ -P -s I ..JCW I 0fl) f=l= C1-,= * 4 - I 0~~~~~~~O-==W0 2 =5 .. MO U- In O~ 0. -= LU C C.. iW4ZU-MI W~~~~~~~-mc =0I I 41=I* =.,Cn I Z.. I -c I' ,XCI 1= 0 W I O 5.J1- *. of W21. . I 241 Z.XUJZI 3 -- - 0 I LU ~~~~~~~~W302=I -.t l..M ~01 -f PxC-a2W ±.W 221-w 0 -0 I C0 . ~ 0 C 2IZ ~~~~~~~~N-0- -~~~~W -. 0304 1, 2C I4 025 I II.2 .,C..U UL M '11,10I40- I U-lU -M 1lI a I I I a~~~~~~~~~~~~~ PL o 0 >. -~~~0 =,- 0-~ L WWW. W U... - - - 2-c S = 0 1 0 U. ILOOWU~~ OW - 4 - Wan -4 I W o -LL ZI - =c Coe 1.0. I 0Z 01- W~ 3=Z4W O1..h u00 UO U. Oaaad2 flD - tn 0 Iw~ u-. Cw LULW I 44 0-54 o 4 - 5.094WIU - 1flto -- W04 6I 02 Oh-W 00= (0 44 EL 4h4,u I U4 -E 00 LU C 1-45- Wo 5v UEU )- C~ 2.. I OK~ C5Z- 4 flr LtoU UWUJ OW-o tUC I t. Z Z1 4a4 o.0 -o -o -, "O." (0 inWI- ZI I 400 ~ o ~ tW ~ 0 LS S ( nu40) OW I W.U LU WLWI 4)- (LA >LLJ.0 10 0 -, * ro-m==c-s 0-. W -=W too 1-W~-ZU =ot.=Of - I= I =1..0 4).'- 0 * 1 fl h4L * W3 4 0 0O.4w I.C=h I oflh O>4WW_ 340020 4 000)4 SW~~o 0)-o. 4-SI I SLW=Sh=X- ~W 0 -ZO Z.. -c U.U a 4Wf6 LU c ZC I &f-. W ohqh. 00 E =NW )-ow E . 4a -I 05 04 WI-U W=WOO Z= 001W 45 W~4 000W W~ I 22 =0Z= 0- W WrIAC E== L U u( W0-iC)- 0 a I Con0 02 M Ot = O=IL-. =WlmhS fxWt I Z U) 50.0 o - Z cmna. 0 5L000 1-L40 I -Wa *o~u t i tfW)-.W - tO 4W 0020 .40h. I -=W 0 Ow)-a Cl 0402 D~WS00 WbLE 00W O= I 00= - h4J2 ' .OWW 0 al QC LU>U =SX .003 EW I Wh4h W- 01 0 )< Z41 -- W0 )( Oc iZI h-4.a0.0 .4 I K- = 4 -- U 4.SWh a LWa =t =a Z I 02=2WW20 no E.S 0 000 0 1-WUJJ - I tff 000 1-W 050 O0--.W LLo¶ 0 .=W EIL4O C wow I 040 a WmoC LU =ZXwI- =W IC CaLCUI >=O I U ada -ONZoa. - -COW1- -O 0 rats LU - I >. won 0 UWhS44S S 4 Z W.4 Z4 2 -- 0 =4>.owLU 00 * I. - L.. WA COW h.. Z LU - ILWi =ot o h.415h .- 0 I- ac h-.woo 0 1-0 0.Oh-C a .4 a 311.1. =W1-L * - I> 04 0 Oh- 2.O - -r ~w .. i4=4 h40C4-~ 2-)-c Z01h LU W.W Z U 3h-. W ULwh.. 34 De >. *u 0oo 4W now 11- 42 -2 WNO.~ 4 - ~~0 -- Wh- 0.a anWE. O.= I 0 00 & W.flWo - 0=030 1-=U WaooC =.Oom L -U0 14 oW-i S OWLUOC 0 (a ~0 WWIJ W U(0UJ OWWL SI=-0 044 1W W>...J"4.O - 41. 45 4.42~~ 0 41W. W. 1 5 W.L )( 0 ..001i. ~ -w a w4WW 1.04 1-.0 00.414.S o>. LU h-.04 -=Z W =05h. 2 E 0 0 21ZIESOI .. -OW C0 - LU411 Oaw a wa-n UJ4M 2 U0.- I 4W4 -WOS=-=r 2 00. Z row 0 (04W - WEC - WI~h 0 I M uoCLuSO 0 .. Wa. 4 5 Z 4 >~OOW oWu4 I W>)-0 LU a.- r -o a-.~.aLU * h a afOO a..OW 4(0 -- I O..JL u -..J -=W QZ0 =54>)- om= a. N. 0=0<444 0- I 51.> Z LLJ-.W,. W4 W (001-W~ w ii3 Wh. E-Eu 5Xit I UWh. 4 .JSUS L a. U u0 =). W Woo* E1. -( Ol.... I .- CS hb.)-Oili or5 -ZZ- 5-Coat-C 1-01 I M 40 MWU=0 0CZm= 0 o W4 J .EhWCOZ U C I avoL 0 h-E 4X - U.J LU >.0. a 0 ).W cm = -Z "O4 *M 0 -- e XOLU >0 W 42- I5 = =-to I ,os-o >.- w= cnn z=ww=o WW =M EC5 LWW 0 oWWLU WU =I&"M2 ~ - . LU Oh-ZL.4 wow wonL=a 00 0 40.o. W)-4'04U) U)-E I 04 a-a h-Oh-Oom M I 0 MCan OWan 0 3L~a Mml IW - 44 I Z a s-L W.-Oaoi OWo 0. = - an - I -0 0 - 1=O- WI (02 I-IN 0 >-4Q O )(W- '-W - 0 -- )( g i--- 004 0 =- I~ I X.WC a 4 )-t -X -3- 'ii Oh uoh- - 0=0 LU oX 0.UJIwrncdd 0W- I *Q.ow -M. 0- 1.UWOO 0 WA.d2 4WWh.W (0 4-4= ZWWO=D)-fl 401 I h-Xw h-b) Z< >.0f 0a5 0>S 0U)40W 0 044< a,0~0<0W 050 I .WQX 0.>oLw41-I 0 W4 CUMf (0 .- W a., OOLCO WO.~ =h-C I h--t o4 5-i 01-t =WZ0 U Z Wwu W="U ~ W~ S - C -ilL~~~~~~~~~~~~~~.4I -C S C C S b-~~~~~~~~~~~D=00 I LU W g I tC WC )-W W-0-W SULUC CC-C me - S at - S 4 I. =i 0.43. , I = UJWI. uLJu L - o so - w* * .n- L O a Cl muj0 U U I * LU~CC (0I CC. S 0.ZMO I L 0I I =-LU0 0W9 u I " USI o a CCC tO S SC N~~~~~~~b-* LUw WA tO E LUZ~ LU- I9> 0.05W tin 2 h4-~~LUC. WWC0 LUW -LWI 0. C~tI - W..j'0O 5)-- I .. L LU S ~' M=-- USUI)-C US LW C. 0 S = 000 S COI-.CS=UCWW 0 CLO-CI CI LUcc C .15W* Ut...S C0C~~~~~~.S)-~~S3LU ILW Ioxl US1. C. -- 01.-C 5 3 .05~~~~~~~~~~~oW0I W I L.AW S U C 2 UWS -- WL* nw=U4Ut~ -I .41L -s LA. a .ci-.COCX g .j.~~-ioWWC0Zi- a - La 1-UJcNZW 1-JI tOc41 L U* 1-IL- j - 5.4C5 S CW ..u...~~~~~~~WAnC Lai t VI rn C I *C *UJ a ..C. *50~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~-Ww I--C I= La II IJb - S ~~Z..atOI C1.fltW~~~~~t.0CWa I OW COUJn I C WC 0. 0 a *UCUCOS fli- ~~~~~~~~~OS 3=- cc - UU'-ai-~~~Sa x~m-.CWZZZ Cw I SW W 0000 0n0 31 5 .4tX-~~~C5 .. 0 -,OtC N I b-USe PWl-U (n Ut - 00 1\ S Cfl...LJ-096 Z I '. at Of LU SW i-~3wW LCWWMLIL1 I U S: i-C -0OW~~~~.. -Coc OCOC0 CC 5 St-- C 55 5~~~0 -o-.,a"N" I 11. ta 0.5W Ec6=1- be - WOLUI.r S WMI-C1. CC Ib O.. IS -6 LC ix cC -CO Z sOSCUS a. XC S0.~~~~~ -LUj - t-I CCO.= -Cts IL= IIC0 MEOW sw =c., SCofCi Ii wooa~ WIf W" clC (0 SO LL UO. U .Jb..tX NOOC CC C COI.CC 0S. IC 'AWOI fl. C .154~ IC LUS ZISUJ 510 at -'a" 15 OnO .0 I A ~ Cie II UW 00 0 I S~~~~~ 50acc ~tCZ Oa-S CLUOC0 *ZW1 =550. _J=SS =r *~~~0 00Cr-I C0nC0OOWO-J4-" 0c Wo 5 IWU 0.0 i-="I W. LUW IC X 3WCd d.CWLC = M U SC ..LU C COIW I C. COCw ~C~O" - S 3050-ZO~h.Q -JUwO b- - L ..0.W0.L=CW1W ) wwI~ U SO .'LUCZC SW~~~~~ 440 0 O>. WJ *= I I. W m WC1. Jw-W C at~~: C- as =0.4 114III wU U)- Ut~jLU L- I - C SL.W- 50 0 IL- -s C.1 _ -S LC S.W Uc - U a .5LaC0 SO C UCCUW~~~~~wwi.0*..aw 550 OEM IW CC WZ.0 OW="- II. S 5- -m i-b- C ~~~~~~~W3- IllIC.l.Z. M =450-"o I. ft)WWCOLU I -oC - SO~~~~ b.U1- W= C LUZ~~WIw..= * SI C a-O-0 IC - St W I cc I-in XCOofl W-cowJ 1. 5 50~~z i-C3-d -J -5. sa..i.vIC"U I WC EOCU- =)-=I- hW cc Z. Z IL0 W0j La *6 05 OCOM 0U5o Zi- W 0041.4 1 OI&JO. 0.=.OOCOL I WI ms.Cu LU CI La- OUI L II S WJ b.C'0 , Z OwOU.I-ILZC t CI&OUJ .... 0. US 00~~5...LU , Ut C-W LU WU=U Dx t-0 00..sa CC )l- - S C 00- W W Z'A- 55 - SCSCU.L= UWo =, ~ Z 0 IO I - C i I LU * -u (04 W0.11.WU *X 40 WSZ (WI. . S W .Wu- A DC- U 0 COu X Lu I =0=.h0 0 r S NV 1 1-W = S S OCSCZLao. I UWCC~~~ ~~ONI S 0 AL-S LX W= X S O2IWWJOCWIUSQJ Z. 5~w IIcC -Pu nuO~" E .- a MOO X W 0- uw I~" wx I- W O- I =.-;= - - US~X - 'nwl 0U=~- 4.06.W = >4~ = C I- I CCu C0 E =J4Wu 4 GEJ .0 WmXUW. 0W.i -. 0 0 4 4s..-J= '- .5>."C .. .. j0wU >- IU XW US Ew. CUSN0 N UZW'.4 W tW= W 0 US Z'n USM <14 U0 < S C NOCZ4.~ U .J= ~ )-4. 0 r >- Q4USL -. U W0 tL- )E0~U W wx= 0>"~W > 1 u- - de.; W=.OS ~ 0.W=O US i-W S ZL *N -J-= 01.4X ~ W 0.-JU * ~=SO- n. o U-0 0 WO07 UJU.OZ =) * M.Wo- .W..J-wo>SC Z . U Q* W I ~CUS- 50. U. UJ 0 W S 0CU US = .UJS u 40=00 CE A-O4 44W -0 4 .. iW- nz s .5.. fl0U..Jm IWW.4.. LM UU * - ->WUS4 004 4- = .0.) fltlC..JoOUI- >5 E -ix 0..U =zc -I US, =WllC O 40 =Q.- 4=O u0 U S - -W00.-.:S oo u - =40 >W-~ W- Wa... WOO"U> z JfS ->-4.40 US *ico - 54 C 0-. o0.0-EU0W W w c - = 0 0 - C 'n .0 U 1 0 5)- .E=. I-> .4015> W .C =ZW-0U40 4O~ - .. QO..EE U-JUSS - >OU~flSC>)CWm QCEX=040-W =0.j X =0u4 -V 4 S COOUSU )c,-=,ISU =i.W00 0 to .44->( o 4 fl4 *0 USU).tU C .iZ I -OLLEO .4W= UJCO~ Z ou. - COOU USS tw mCS- 4uc.4 ..~ >-tC= . 4J CC-C..,.4 1t =* w S.C -w US~=Q US)-0= =rS0-QWo US= Q.C-0tUJ4)0-a =u =- US .NC- IX W >-o 4~ 0.01* .4Z->- U.5 W=.=i==C & - f4 14OC 41. .4 o O c WOWW =.02 Z-WWW< 4.=0 USO W WL04.00CIS=.dIL ... 4 QS4U.04USU00..j~s- 10 -fl)-4IflUJ Of- ~XU) .Jo C sO)- UZIW>O US CUSC)4 - *)-* 0 ni- 1 -SI-l - .OEwC W WWUW-C 0=.= UJ I 05-Cfl-U tLLJWUW l S)- =0LJ0S0UI 4W OU..4 Cl. = -=a~Z E.ZWW-I inN) CLOX'4 4UUSI~oXI-wS iI 00.,-04 ..IW U:.' - in-UoU -o W-j .. Uu4U0 4.~I--.I. - 0>-OW0O- 04 - ,-USO= otflt=lO~in in 04I 0 =&in U U5.. UV >-WC40..iS S,..n-.W0 - > US-SC-US ..JE >4 -muS flcl 0I-0S. St.OWS w -m~M On -0 flUS =&WS 45 41 )C-- 0 in - 4 -USU)4.C--W -m 0.-S CWi i-s-I flS..Z I n S0n. U 0 05 O~in ~h- SO i.4OWWUS *s.C4C&01SWIOC-li ... S CU. -Uw 54fl~in--at ZU ~inOW.fl 00 O C- US C.0 .J Q0 00 U C 0 0 4 c.4 >.U -US - CC= >4 Z SI0 CE 0 4W 0ntC i 044 .. C ht40 .. f0J)-C O kSiU>- U.Cs * I 0 - 1- ow * 4 4 ~ =WOO o - W~~ so L=> C, U. -den I 1- 0 N 'ft ta0r-ct- V -J -J Lu OAIJWIL2 'ft 0 0 £L ZWcl., o -z icwUwo c- g~0- -0 &=WJ > I-- W I=..I-&aW 4 on - E> 0011.10 U.UCLadI 1- b tmC >- in ..I-S- 01-4$ 4 0 W;oIN I.-0I...= in -Ng -c -w U= U uoz C~44u A ot 00 --0 0~ =3 Lu ow 11CW AQ Om0 1 0 MWO Sl Wu 3 W4S - C OWWL Wu U$--L - -* rW romwro U Lww WW..-'0 CO tt wua~ u5o cthemists helping chemists in research & industry Telephone (414) 273-3850 TWX. (910) 262-3052 Aldr,chern Ml aldrich chem ical c .FAX (414) 273-4979 P.O Box=35 Mllweukne Wisconsin 5321 USAconTlx2683Adihl ATTN: SAFETY DIRECTOR DATE: 04/22/880 CHZM HILL INC CUST 0 924t476 P.O. 0 W9 026 P0 BOX 4400 RESTON VA 22090 DEAN CH-ARPENTIER M A T E R I A L S A F E T Y 0 A T A S H E E T PAGE: ------ ------IDENTIFICATION ------PRODUCT S 25814-S NAME: xHY0ROCHL0RLG--AlCIq. 37%, A.C.S. REAGENT CAS 0 1647-01-0 -. ------TOXICITY HAZARDS ------ RTECS S MW4025000 HYDROCHLORIC ACID IRRITATION DATA EYE-RST 5 MG/30S RINSE MILD TXCYAC 23,281,82 TOXICITY DATA IHL-HMN LCLO:1300 PPM/30M 29ZWAE -,207,68 IHL-HMN LCLO:3000 PPM/SM TABIA2 3,231,33 UNR-MAN LDLD:81. MG/KG 850CAI 2,73970 IHL-RAT LC5O:3124 PPM/1H AMRL-= TR-74-78,74 IHL-MUS LC50:1108 PPM/1H JCTODH 3,61,76 IPR-MUS LD50:1449 MG/KG COREAF 256,1043963 ORL-RBT LD50:900 MG/KG BIZEA2 134,437,23 REVIEWS, STANDARDS, AND REGULATIONS ACGIH TLV-CL 5 PPM 851NA8 5,313,86 OSHA STANDARD-AIR:CL 5 PPM FEREAC 39,23540,74 EPA GENETOX PROGRAM 1986, NEGATIVE: CELL TRANSFORM.-SA7/SHE EPA TSCA CHEMICAL INVENTORY. 1986 EPA TSCA SECTION 8(E) STATUS REPORT 8EHQ-0578-01.46 EPA TSCA TEST SUBMISSION (TSCATS) DATA BASE, JUNE 1987 NIOSH ANALYTICAL METHODS: SEE ACIDS, INORGANIC, 1903 MEETS CRITERIA FOR PROPOSED 6SH-A MEDICAL RECORDS RULE FEREAC 47,30420, 82 ONLY SELECTED REGISTRY OF TOXIC EFFECTS OF CHEMICAL SUBSTANCES (RTECS) DATA IS PRESENTED HERE. SEE ACTUAL ENTRY IN RTECS FOR COMPLETE INFORMATI ------HEALTH HAZARD DATA ------ACUTE EFFECTS MAY BE FATAL IF INHALED, SWALLOWED, OR ABSORBED THROUGH SKIN. CAUSES BURNS. MATERIAL IS EXTREMELY DESTRUCTIVE TO TISSUE OF THE MUCOUS MEMBRANES AND UPPER RESPIRATORY TRACT. EYES AND SKIN. INHALATION MAY BE FATAL AS A RESULT OF SPASM, INFLAMMATION AND EDEMA OF THE LARYNX AND BRONCHI, CHEMICAL PNEUMONITIS ANO PULMONARY EDEMA. SYMPTOMS OF EXPOSURE MAY INCLUDE BURNING SENSATION, COUGHING. WHEEZING, LARYNGITIS. SHORTNESS OF BREATH, HEADACHE, NAUSEA AND VOMITING. FIRST AID IN CASE OF CONTACT, IMMFDIATELY FLUSH EYES OR SKIN WITH COPIOUS AMOUNTS OF WATER FOR AT LEAST 15 MINUTES WHILE REMOVING CONTAMINATED CLOTHING AND SHOES. ASSURE ADEQUATE FLUSHING OF THE EYES BY SEPARATING THE EYELIDS WITH FINGERS. IF INHALED. REMOVE TO FRESH AIR. IF NOT SREATHING GIVE ARTIFICIAL RESPIRATION. [F RPEATHING IS DIFFICULT, GIVE OXYGEN. IN CASE OF EXP'JSUO=. OBTAIN MEDICAL ATTPNTION IMMEDIATELY. WASH CON IAmIN- TZO CLCITH-I NC 3;-F0RE RCUSE. O"Tt chemists helping chemists in research & industry Telephone (414) 273-3850 WAU ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~TWX(910) 262-3052 Aidrichern MI wu i aam u ha rh ainiru~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~U ~Telex: 26 843 Aldrich MI O UNUEdr LII LIe mINiLUE co. FAX: (414) 273-4979 P.O Box 355. Milwaukee, Wisconsin 5321 UiSA M A T E R I A L S A F E T Y 0 A T A S H E E T PAGE- CATALOG U 25814-8 NAME: HYDROCHLORIC ACID, 37t, A.C.S. REAGENT DISCARD CONTAMINATED SHOES. ------PHYSICAL DATA ------SPECIFIC GRAVITY: 1.200 VAPOR DENSITY: 1.3 VAPOR PRESSURE: 230.0 MM a 21 C ------FIRE AND EXPLOSION HAZARD DATA------FLASH POINT: NONE EXTINGUISHING MEDIA NONCOMBUSTIBLE. USE EXTINGUISHING MEDIA APPROPRIATE TO SURROUNDING FIRE CONDITIONS. SPECIAL FIRE FIGHTING PROCEDURES WEAR SELF-CONTAINED BREATHING APPARATUS AND PROTECTIVE CLOTHING TO PREVENT CONTACT WITH SKIN AND EYES. USE WATER SPRAY TO COOL FIRE-EXPOSED CONTAINERS. UNUSUAL FIRE AND EXPLOSION HAZARDS NOT APPLICABLE ------REACTIVITY DATA ------INCOMPATIBILITIES BASES AMINES ALKALI METALS COPPER, COPPER ALLOYS ALUMINUM CORRODES STEEL DO NOT ALLOW WATER TO ENTER CONTAINER BECAUSE OF VIOLENT REACTION. HAZARDOUS COMBUSTION OR DECOMPOSITION PRODUCTS TOXIC FUMES OF: HYDROGEN CHLORIDE GAS ------SPILL OR LEAK PROCEDURES------STEPS TO BE TAKEN IF MATERIAL IS RELEASED OR SPILLED EVACUATE AREA. * ~~WEAR SELF-CONTAINEDI BREATHING APPARATUS, RUBBER BOOTS AND HEAVY RUBBER GLOVES. -- ~~COVER WITH DRY-LIME, SAND. OR SODA ASH. PLACE IN COVERED CONTAINERS USING NON-SPARKING TOOLS AND TRANSPORT OUTDOORS. VENTILATE AREA AND WASH SPILL SITE AFTER MATERIAL PICKUP IS COMPLETE. WASTE DISPOSAL METHOD FOR SMALL QUANTITIES: CAUTIOUSLY ADD TO A LARGE STIRRED EXCESS OF WATER. ADJUST THE PH TO NEUTRAL, SEPARATE ANY INSOLUBLE SOLIDS OR LIQUIDS AND PACKAGE THEM FOR HAZARDOUS-WASTE DISPOSAL. FLUSH THE a ~~AQUEOUS SOLUTION DOWN THE DRAIN WITH PLENTY OF WATER. THE HYDROLYSIS AND NEUTRALIZATION REACTIONS MAY GENERATE HEAT AND FUMES WHICH CAN BE CONTROLLED BY THE RATE OF ADDITION. OBSERVE ALL FEDERAL. STATE C LOCAL LAWS. PRECAUTIONS Tn BE TAKEN IN HANDLING AND STORAGE -- CHEMICAL SAFETY GOGGLES. SAFETY SHOWER AND EYE BATH. FACESHIELD (8-INCH MINIMUM). NIOSH/MSHA-APPROVEO RESPIRATOR IN NONVENTILLATED AREAS AND/OR FOR EXPOSURE ABOVE THE ACGIH TILV. MECHANICAL EXHAUST REQUIRED. URs~rER GLOVES. a-~ ~.-...... 7~chemists helping chemists in research & industry Telephone (414) 273-3850 W~~~~~~~~U - -~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~TWX, (910) 262-3052 Aidrichern MI P.O Box 3553Milwaukeet Wicnin =1UeS i UICA. M4 A T E R I A L S A F E T Y 0 A T A S H E E T PAGE: CATALOG 025 814-8 NAE YRCLORIC ACID. 37%. A.C.S. REAGENT 00 NOT PIPET BY MOUTH. AVOID BREATHING VAPOR. DO NOT GET IN EYES, ON SKIN. ON CLOTHING. AVOID PROLONGED OR REPEATED EXPOSURE. WJASH THOROUGHLY AFTER HANDLING. CORROSIVE. POISON. KEEP TIGHTLY CLOSED. STORE IN A COOL DRY PLACE. ------ADDITIONAL PRECAUTIONS AND COMMENTS------NOT APPLICABLE THE ABOVE INFORMATION IS BELIEVED TO BE CORRECT BUT DOES NOT PURPORT TO BE ALL INCLUSIVE AND SHALL BE USED ONLY AS A GUIDE. ALDRICH SHALL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGE RESULTING FROM HANDLING OR FROM CONTACT WITH THE ABOVE PRODUCT. SEE REVERSE SIDE OF INVOICE OR PACKING SLIP FOR ADDITIONAL TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF SALE. ...... ~~~~...... -. . .. ,.- 1''~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ IVIJ-¼i cnui-XL Z)IIrtiIT 4Eniumtisy SzmIi,, fto .. ostA.m2WLdI/Al rie ______~~~SECTION I PPODUC7 NAME WNA CZAMEER-8ANITz= II MANUFATURERHine Safety Applfances Company RUAO 590 MANUFATURER600 Penn Center Boulevard CsPirED a I. P. Dewosky ______Pittsburwb. "A 15235 Tng 14.Product Safei EMERGENCY PHONE NO. 1412-273-,5500 DATE i16/9/83 SECTION It - INGREflIENTS CAS NIM-GER WEIGET. .ACTIVE IN~GREDIENTS:- 54.7 SODIUM CAPBONATE 497-19-8 42.2 TRI SODIUM PEOSPflTE . 7601-S4-9 10.0 ALKYL (C14, 50%;-C12. 40%; ClE, 10%) - DZMEThXL BEDh', AW4ONZUM csJO=fES U39-08-z 2.5c IIMfT flGRWIflrrs: 45.3 SODIUM TRZP0LYPEOSnBTz 7758-29-4' SODIUM BICARBONATE. 144-55-8 WATER ~~~~~~~7732-18-5 ISOMERIC LINEAR AIOEOLS (Cll-Cis) POLYETBOXY ETBANOLS 68131-40-8* ETENOqL 64-17-S ISOBORNYL ACETATE 125-12-2 ______SECTION III- PHYSICAL DATA BC~tNG POINT [F.) NA SPECFIC GRAVITY(H210.I) 0.8 VAFOR PRESSURE (mm Mg.) N %VOLATlLE BY VOLUME NA VAPOR DENSITY (AIR..11 NA EVAPORATION RATE(e.1 NA £CLUBILWFIN WATER20%. PH 10. AOUEOUS SOLUTrION 9.-5 -10. 5 APPEARANCE FARN LN FWIEP~lR AND ODORFRGATBEDOWHTPWES ______SECTION IV - FIRE AND EXPLOSION DATA ~!N(Mff~d OIN UlCINO FLA SE0 2 40 F FLAMAMABLEUIMITSI L." NA Vol NA .flNGCISHING MEDIA WATE'R SPRAV (FOG). FOAM, DRY C=-ENICAL, CARBON1 DIOXIDE SPEC:AL PIPE flMGPrCCZDUSE BLANVKT FIRE WITHE ZCTIXVGUISHI'NG REDIUM UNUSUAL FIAE AND PRODUCT IS NONRvEACTIVE AN D XES NOT READILY SUPPORT 6> PLC'ION HAZARDS nw-tcrr. -srr CONflCT WITHX POWnEA MAY CAUSE BURNS...- nLUS AFFECTED AREA WTrm CIEAN WATER. EYE CONTACT WITS POWDER MAY CAUSE CORNgEAL BURNS.. AVOID RU3BEING MnS BECAUSE WATER INSOLU3BLE PARTICLES MAY SCRATCH CORNEA. IdMMEDIATEY FLUSH EYES WITS Czar -WATfl WE=n HOLDING rYMnS APART. CONTIN~UE ' FLUSHING FOR AT LEAST LS MINUTES OR UFTIL~ IPAIThTION SUBSIDES. CONSULT PEYSICIAN AS SOON AS POSSIBLE. INfHALTON OF A LARGE flOVGH QUANTITY To POSE A SInnICANT mTrAT HAZARD IS IMPROBABLE. fl4GESTION OF POWDER IS flPI-FfUL OR FATAL.. flOULD INGESTION OCCUR, DR=l MIIr, RAW EGG WHITE, OR GELATIN SOLUTIONt OR LARGE QUiSTITIES OF WATflR. AVOID ALCOHOL. CONSULT PEYrSICfl AS SOON AS POSSIBLE.' ______~SECTION VI .REAC'TIVfTY DATA S1ABItf7 UNSTABLE CONOITONS STABLE X AVOID NONE HAZARDOUS - MAY OCCUR CONDITIONS POLTMEMEaA1ION -W=.NOT. OCCUR ATONN HAZARDOUS DECOMPOSITON UDTPC PROCDUCTS INCOMPATIBILITY IZnNnn AGENTS (MA~RLASi AVIDI SOAMP -AND XNTIONIC SURFACTANTS flWACTTVAIT? 'GrEPM'C("n ______SECTION VII - SPILL OR LEAK PROCEDURES tTEPS TO St TAKEN CASE MATERIAL RELEASED OR SPILLED SWEE UP WA3EDPO.LLRflCVE TO SANITARY LANDrnAL AWAY FROM WATE SUPPLIES METNOD ____DESTROY EMPTY CONTAINERS SECTION Vill - SPECIAL PROTECTION INFORMATION 1110PIATORYNOT REQUflE PR OTEClIC N SPECIAL SKIN FROTECTION NOT REounnE WPEOAL PSOTEcnloN NOT REQUIRED ______SECTION IX - SPECIAL PRECAUTIONS SPECLAt HANDLING NTRQIE PRECAUTIONSNOREtID SPECIAL NOT REQUIRED. ST C AGCE 'EcAunoNs * MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET .~~No. 63 CORPORATE RESEARCH F £ DEVELOP MENT > TlISODrUM PiOSPHAZE SCHENECTADY. N. Y. 2230 flCAY 'T Phone: (5IB) 383-6085 DEAL. DWt P235-4085 DatRMATIerO97 SECTION 1. MATERIAL IDENTIFICATION LATERIAL. KAHL: TRSODIDI pNOSpnAT DODCAZTMAXE ESCRIPION f rystallizesdifron ptrocasNaP, ~. oadcan exist as several hydrate fansdeendig o proessng, and as the YMDESlGHATlONS., anhydrous salt. TSP. Trisodita Orthophosphate. Sodium Phosphate, Tribasic, Tartary Bedium Phosphate, CT Material D6K1, £5714 D538, CAS 007 601 569 ACT~:Avalabe fom efveral suppliers, including FmC Corporation, Monsanto Co.. Stauffer Chmcal Co. * and Olin Corp. SFECTION II. INGREDIENTS AND HAZARDS3 HAZARD DATA Trisodium Phosphate (as Na3POA.12H 2O) ~97 No TI.? established' *Under OSHA Inert dust limits It can be assumed that air- (Na3904.LH2o) borne particulate, not otherwise controlled, is limited Rat. Oral to a maxmu of 5 wkAs of raspirable dust; however, this WD5 0 7400 mg/kg level may not be adequate to prevent Irritation with this iaterndl * ~SECTION III. PHYSICAL DATA- Boiling point 2 11E20 at 100 C specific gravity (20/6 C) - 1.62 (decomposes) pH of 11 water solution at 23 C - ea 12 * - Malting point, deg C - 3073.3 (dec) Molecular neight 380.1 Solubility. 3/1OOg 3120? atO0C 1.5 at 15 C 28.3 Odu~t~or: White at or coinrless crystalline 70 C solid~~$01(a to apowder flake, granules. etc.). No odor. SECTION IV. FIRE AND EXPLOSION DATA LOWER UPPER - ash Point and~ tlehod IAutolirniion Tear. TFlasabilit, Liis nAir None I None None Extinguishing Media: Use that which is appropflate to the surrounding fire; this material is non-combustible. In a fire situation at high temperature phosphates can emit highly toxic phosphorus oxide funsts Firefighters- should use self-contained breathing apparatus. SECTION V. REACTIVITY DATA This material Is a stable alkaline solid at room temperature. It does not dous polymerization. undergo hazar- It Is Incompatible with acidic materials. GENERAL ELECTRIC ~ 9l0A-. No. ____3___ ECT ION VI . HEALTH H4AZARD INFORMATION ILY None established (See Sect 11) This alkaline msaterial vill cause Irritaion to the respiratory tract if inhaled asa dust or as a solution uist. Prolonged or repeated skin contact will Irritate the skin. lye contact will Irritate and can damage the eyes (alkaline attack). This material is low In toxicity by ingestion, but its alkaline mature will irritate, injure the digestive tract .(Trlsodiumi phosphate Is used as a food additive; but it must be reduced in al- kalinity before being taken into the body.) VIK$7 AID: Eve contact: Prowitly flush with plenty of water for 15 minutes, Get medical help. Skin contact: Wash well with soap and water; rinse well with water. If Irritation persists, get medical help. Inhalation: Remove to fresh air. Get medical help If Irritation persists. Ingestion: Give 1-2 glasses of water or milk to drink to dilute; then give fruit Juice or dilutad vinegar to drink. Do not Induce vomiting! Immdiately contac a physician. SECTION VII. SPILL, LEAK, AND DISPOSAL PROCEDURES For large spills, notify safety personnel. Clean-up personnel should use protection against contact or inhalation of dust or miat. Scoop up spill for recovery or disposal and place In a container with a lid. Flush residues to the seaser with plenty of water. DISPOSAL: Scrap material can be used for neutralizing acidic wastes. or It can be buried in an approved manner In an approved landfill. Small aounts can be flushed to the sewer If regulations permit. Follow Federal, State and local regulations for disposal. .CTION Vill. SPECIAL PROTECTION INFORMATION Provide general ventilation to the workplace; if dusting conditions occur, local exhaust ventilation will be needed and a 31051 approved dust respirator may be required. The use of rubber or plastic gloves and chemical safety glasses with side shields Ls recommended for handling this miaterial. An apron mwy also be desirable to prevent con- tact with clothing, especially where solutions are involved. Provide eyewash station near to the workplace where this material is used; a safety showe may also be needed where large smuonts of solution are prepared or used. SECTION IX. SPECIAL PRECAUTIONS AND COMMENTS Store this material In tightly sealed containers in a clean, dry, ventilated area. Pre- vent physical damage to containers. Avid contact with the body and Inhalation of dust. Note that anhydrous trisodium phosphate and lover hydnates are more alkaline on a weight basis than Na9O04 .12112 0. flkTA SOUACE(S.) CODE: 1.2,4-7.12.15 indusRiVALSHie - - ,.. -,aI- a'ai~n...r-.and Sa fei;- Ma. - -.... -... s.. c... 1'.w C.-.' Corporate Mdcl G NEIR A L 0 ELECT RI C industrial Gas DiVision Hydrogen ~~~~~~~~AirPiwducts ancd CheMICdlS. IIC.0 MaterialSafety ~~~~Alloniown, PA 18195 O1I- MaterialSafety ~~~Tel (215) 481.4911 TWX 510-651-3686, Teiecopy (215) 481-5900 Data Sheet CABLE ARPROD TELEX 847416 ~.: SPECIALTY GASES, INC. 1 i3 SO MEAD ST. SEATTLE, WA 98108 EANAG-ClP-NE800-523-9374 INPENNSYLVANIA 8G0-322-9092 TSAOE NAME AND SYNONYMS CHEMICAL NAME AND SYNONYMS issue DATE Issued: 13 April 19T7 Hydrogen, or Liquid Hydrogen (in cryo- genic liquid state) Hydrogen REVISIONS Rev: 1 March 1990 ______FoeMUI, CHIEMICAL.FAMILY H MW: 2.016 Flammable Gas CAS #1333-74-0 2 HEALTH HAZARD DATA EXPOSURE LIMITS Hydrogen is asimple asphyxiant and has no threshold limit value (TLV). Hydrogen is not listed as acarcinogen by NTP, IARC, or OSHA. SYMPTOMS IF INGILSIED. CONTACTED WIT. S(IN, OR VAPCIAINMALLO Hydrogen is nontoxic and classified as a simple asphyxiant. Symptoms of anoxia occur only when gas concentrations are within the flammable range and the mixture has not ignited. DO NOT ENTER AREAS WITHIN THE FLAMMABLE RANGE DUE TO THE IM- MEDIATE FIRE AND EXPLOSION HAZARD. Contact of skin with liquid hydrogen or cold gas vapors can cause cryogenic (extreme low temperature) burns and freeze tissues. 10XICOLOGICAA.PRofERTIES Hydrogen is nontoxic and classified as a simple asphyxiant, but is extremely flammable. The amount of hydrogen gas necessary to reduce oxygen concentrations below life support levels is well withIn the flammable range. Do not enter areas containing flammable mixtures due to the immediate fire and explosion hazard. RECOMMNENDEDFIRST ANOTREATMENT If cryogenic liquid or Cold boil-off gas contacts worker's skin or eyes, frozen tissues should be flooded or soaked with tepid water -2 (105.11SF; 41-46C). DO NOT USE HOT WATER. Cryogenic burns which result in blistering or deeper tissue freezing should be seen * ~~promptly by a physician. First degree burns (reddening only, as sunburn), or second degree burns (blistering) which are the result of fire exposure and are localized to a portion of an extremity or other small area of the body may be immersed in cool water for 10-20 minutes to relieve pain. Do NOT immerse the whole body in a cold bath. All thermal injuries except the most minor and localized burns should be referred promptly for medical care. Burned areas should be covered with the cleanest available material, such as a clean Sheet, prior to transport. Do NOT use burn ointments or greasy materials on burns which show more than localized reddening. Persons suffering from lack of oxygen should be moved to areas with normall atmosphere. Assisted respiration and supplemental oxy- gen should be given if the victim is not breathing. FIRE AND EXPLOSION HAZARD DATA FLASH POINT IMetadunedI AUTO IGNITION TEI FL.AMMAaLE LIMITS LEL LE. N/A (gas at normal temperatures) 932F (500C)EM In air @1 atm 4.0% 74.2% EXTING1iIIN. NEWA __EUEC1RiCAt CLASSIFICATION Dry chemical, carbon dioxide, or Halon GA"U Class I, Group B SPEO~ALFIRE FiGKTiG PROCEDURES Shut off source of hydrogen. When possible, allow fire to bum itself out. Spray water on adjoining equipment to keep it cool. UNUSUAL FM AND EXPLOSION NAZAROS - ~~~Hydrogen can bum with almost an Invisible flame of low thermal radiation. People have unknowingly walked into hydrogen flames. Easily ignited: minimum ignition energy is low (0.2MJ) and flammable range is wide. Flame propagates at rapid rate. Potential ex- plosioni hazard from reignition if fire is extinguished without shutting off hydrogen source. Hydrogen gas is bouryant and can accumulate in the upper sections of enclosed spaces. PHYSICAL DATA 9O0iG1.T1'F FREEZING POINT '-F) @ 1atmi -423.OF (-252.80 @ 1 atmn -434.SF (- 259.2C) VAPOR PESR (Psuaj SOLUBILITY IN WATER NIA a 68F (200). 1 atm 1.82% by volume VA#CN N~ut jtaT Al SPtC*IIC GRAvITY (AIR 4.Ii LIQUID DENST Amdc iti CPEFICGP.AVIY (HO- 1i a 68F (20C), 1 atm 0.005229 0 68F (20C), 1 atm 0.0696 0 boiling point, 1 atM 4.432 a boiling point. I atm 0.0710 * ~~Both liquid and gaseous hydrogen are colorless and odorless. CAir Products alnd ChemicalIs, Inc. 1984. 1988 Pninted in U.S.A. 310-406 (Rev. 3M9) REACTIVITY DATA - . .______sourcesof ignition, sparks. flames, hot objects Oxidizing materiais, Some Steers are susceptible tO hydrogen attack or embrittlement at high temperature and pressure _____ $AzA~ousOECWPOSITION PRODuCTS None HAZA800IJS MAY OCCUR ~~~~CONDITIONSTO ,V IO ,CflAERIZATQO _ _ WILLOccNOT R X N one _ _ _ _ SPILL OR LEAK PROCEDURES STE OBEIXN IN CASE MATERIAL IS REEE OA SPILLED DONO ENTR areas containing flammable mixtures of hydrogen in air. Avoid contact of skin with liquid hydrogen or cold boil-oil gas. Ventilate enclosed areas to prevent formation of flammable or oxygen-deficient atmospheres. See "VENTIAONbeo Elm inate all potential sources of ignition. Move a leaking compressed gas cylinder out of doors if leak is small . Consult Air Products for additional assistance. Do not attemp to disps of residual gaseous hydrogen in cylinders. Return cylinders to Air Products with positive residual pressure. cylinder vale tightly lsd and valve cap in place Do not dispose of liquid hydrogen - contact Air Products for assistance SPECIAL PROTECTION INFORMATION AESIPIRATOflV PROTECTIONI (S~OViyi, VENTILATION LOCA.ENLS S PCIL -~ Natural or mechanical where As necessary Mechanical ventilation must meet National Electric gas or vapor 13 present. JCode (NEC) requirements for Class I, Group B MECHNCA aI OTHER As necessary O0nly as: nesar PROTECTIVE GLOE (Uiquid Loose-fitting of impermeable materials, Such as leather. Lether work gloves are recommended when handling compressed gas cylinders. EYE PAOTECTION Safety glasses are recommended when handling compressed gas cyiinders. Use safety glasses or goggles when handling liquid OTHER PROTECTIVE EOuIAIPENT None SPECIAL PRECAUTIONS' SPECIALLL.ASELJN iNFORMAiO DOT Shipping Name: Hydrogen, or Hydrogen, Compressed; (Liquid) Hydrogen, refrigerated liquid. DOT Hazarnd Class: Flammable Gas. DOT Shipping Label: Flammable Gas. I.D. Number:UN 1049 (Hydrogen or Hydrogen, Compressed); UN 1966 (Liquid Hydrogen). SP*CLAJLi4ANON AEcOMMENIOATIONS Prevent contact of liquid hydrogen with exposed skin. Prevent entrapment of liquid in closed systems. Use only in well ventilated areas Comresedcotaias yliderhyrogn a exremly ighpresur an shuldbe handled with care. Use a pressure-reducing reguatoowewhn presurcnnecingto piingsysems.Secre yliderswhe inuse Neer use direct flame to heat a com- presedachekgs clindr. vave seo prven bac flw ino grageconaine. Aoid raging. rolling, or sliding cylinders, even pressed Gas Association Pamphlet P-i.prsegacyidsonutCm 61P1ECALSTORMGE MOO0WdENOAT1oliS Store liquid containers and cylinders in well-ventilated areas. Keep cylinders away from sources of heat. Storage should not be in Jieavy traffic areas to prevent accidental knocking over or damage from passing or falling objects. Valve caps should remain on cylin- ders not connected for use. Segregate full and empty cylinders. Storage areas should be free of combustible material. Avoid exposure Io areas where salt or other corrosive chemicals are present. Cylinder storage of hydrogen should be segregated from oxidizers such as oxygen, fluorine, etc. See Compressed Gas Association Pamphlet P-1 for additional storage recommendations. SPEOMJL P(ABAXNO RECOMUENOATIONS Gaseous hydrogen containers meet DOT specifications or American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) codes. Liquid hydrogen Is stored In vaciuum-insulated containers meeting DOT specifications or ASME codes. O1'HEA AECOO&*ENOATIONS OR PRECAUTIONS Liquid hydrogen in exosdpiping can actually cause air to condense, and liquefy. The nitrogen in this liquid can evaporate more rapidly, leaving an oxygen enriched liquid behind. Utilize oxygen-compatible insulating materials and minimize exposed piping surface areas. Use only metals anid materials compatible with extremiely low temperature-. Avoi use of carbon steel arnd other metals which become brittle at low temperatures. Compressed gms cylinders Should not be refilled except by qualified! producers of compressed gases Shipment of a compressed gas cylinder NWt withoult the written permission of the owner is a violation of Federal Law. IThe atrmosphiere in areas in which hydrogen gas may be vented and coliect shouild be tested with a portable or continuous flammable gas analyzer. 'Various Government agencies (i.e.. Department of Transportation, Occupational Safety and Health Administration, Food and Dru Administration and others) may have specific regulations concerning the transportation handling, storage or use of this productwhc W will not be reflected in this data sheet. The customer should review these regulations to ensure that S/he is in tuli coinpitance AIR' PRODUCTSZZ Specialty Gas Material Safety Data Sheet EMERGENCY PHONE (800) 523-9374 PRODUCT NAME IN PENNSYLVANIA (800) 322.9092 METHANE AIR PRODUCTS AND CHEMICALS, INC. TRADE NAME AND SYNONYMS Box 538 Methane ALLENTOWN, PA 18105 CHEMICAL NAME AND SYNONYMS (215) 481-8257 Methane, Methyl Hydride, Marsh Gas ISSUE DATE August 1977 FORMULA CHEMICAL FAMILY REVISION DATE February 1984 OH4 Hydrocarbon HEALTH HAZARD DATA TIME WEIGHTED AVERAGE EXPOSURE UIMIT Methane is a simple asphyxiant and has no TLV. SYMPTOMS OF EXPOSURE Ambient oxygen concentrations may be reduced to clearly hazardous levels without obvious symptoms. Symp- toms of lack of oxygen may include: increase in depth and frequency of breathing, air hunger, dizziness, head- ache, nausea, or loss of consciousness. Contact with the liquid may cause frostbite. Symptoms of frostbite are -kin color change to gray or white, cold feeling and numbness. TOXICOLOGICAL PROPERTIES Methane is inactive biologically and essentially nontoxic, It may cause asphyxiation by exclusion of oxygen. In very high concentrations, it may have a slight narcotic effect. There exists an immediate fire and explosion hazard when the concentration of methane inthe atmosphere exceeds the lower flammable limit (50/ by volume). Use a suitable flammable gas meter (explosimeter) calibrated for methane to measure concentrations of the gas in air. RECOMMENDED FIRST AID TREATMENT RESCUE PERSONNEL SHOULD NOT ENTER AREAS CONTAINING HIGH CONCENTRATIONS OF METHANE -WITHOUT PROPER PERSONNEL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT. Self-contained breathing apparatus may be re- quired. Extreme hazard of fire and explosion may result from static electrical discharge or other ignition sources. Do not enter areas withir the flammable range due to the immediate fire and explosion hazard. Inhalation: Move the affected person to an uncontaminated atmosphere. If breathing has stopped or is labored. give assisted respiration (e.g., mouth-to-mouth). Supplemental oxygen should be administered. Keep the victim warm and quiet. Seek medical assistance promptly. Skin Contact: In the event of freezing of the skin, frozen tissues should be flooded or soaked with tepid water (105 to 115 0F. 41 to 460C). DO NOT USE HOT WATER. If freezing is superficial and of minor extent as from a spattered droplet, medical assistance may not be required: however, all other cases should be promptly referred to a physician. (Continued on last page.) - ~~~~Information contained in this materiai safety data sheet is offered without charge for use by technically qualified personnei at their discretion and risk. All statements, technical information and recommendations contained herein are based on lests and data which we believe to be reliable, but the accuracy or completeness thereof is not guaranteed and no warranty of any kind is made with respect thereto This information is not intended as a license to operate under or a recommendation to practice or infringe any patent ~ ~~ofthis Company or others covering any process, composition of mailer or use 0 Since the Company shall have no control of the use of the product described herein, the Company assumes no liability for loss or damage incurred from the proper or improper use of such product. SPECIAL PROTECTION INFORMATION RESPIRATORY PROTECTION (Specify type) Positive pressure self-contained breathing apparatus should be available for emergency use. VENTILATION LOCAL EXHAUST SPECIAL See last page. See last page. MECHANICAL (Gen.) OTHER PROTECTIVE GLOVES Leather, as required, by the process EYE PROTECTION Safety goggles or glasses OTHER PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT Safety shoes, safety showers, eyebaths SPECIAL PRECAUTIONS* SPECIAL LABEUNG INFORMATION D.O.T. Red Label, Flammable Gas SPECIAL HANDUING RECOMMENDATIONS Protect containers and-equipment against physical damage. Avoid all sources of ignition. Use only in a well-ventilated area, preferably a hood with forced ventilation. Never drop cylinders or allow them to strike each other violently. Avoid dragging or sliding cylinders, even for short distances. They should be moved by a suitable hand truck. Keep the valve protection Cap in place until cylinder is secured and ready for use. Always insert a trap or check-valve in the line to prevent hazardous back-flow into the cylinder. Use a pressure-reducing regulator when connecting to lower pressure piping systems. '-or additional handling recommendations, consult Air Products Specialty Gas Catalog, Safety and Technical Infor- mation Section or Compressed Gas Association Pamphlet P-i. @ SPECIAL STORAGE RECOMMENDATIONS Store in a cool, well-ventilated area of noncombustible construction away from all sources of ignition. Isolate from oxygen, chlorine and oxidizing materials. Protect against physical damage. Protect cylinders from excessive temperature rise. No part of a cylinder should be subjected to a temperature above 1300F (540C). Store cylinders in an upright position and firmly secured. Seg- regate full and empty cylinders. For additional storage recommendations consult Air Products Specialty Gas Catalog, Safety and Technical Infor- mation Section or Compressed Gas Association Pamphlet P-i. SPECIAL PACKAGING RECOMMENDATIONS Methane is noncorrosive and most common structural materials may be used. Piping and accessories to be used with methane must be designed to withstand the anticipated pressures and temperatures. OTHER RECOMMENDATIONS OR PRECAUTIONS All precautions necessary for the safe handling of any flammable compressed gas must be observed when work- ng with methane. Do not expose to heat, flame, or spark. Ground all lines and equipment used with methane incomplete combustion of methane in a defective gas appliance is likely to produce carbon monoxide. 'Various Government agencies (i e.. Department of Transportation, Occupational Safety and Health Administration, Food and Drug Administration and others) may have specific regulations concerning the transportation, handling, storage or use of ihis product which wIl noi be reflected in this data Sheet The customer should review these regulations to ensure that he is in full compliance HAZARDOUS MIXTURES OF OTHER UIQUIDS, SOLIDS, OR GASES Forms explosive mixtures with oxidizers such as oxygen, chloride, or fluorine. Sunlight explodes a mixture of chlorine and methane (2 volumes of chlorine with one of methane). S K)~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~1 PHYSICAL DATA BOIUING POINT UIQUID DENSITY AT BOIUING POINT 0 - 258.6 P (- 161 .5CC) 26.5 lb/ft3 (4 24 .5 kg/rn 3 ) 0 VAPOR PRESSURE at 70 P (21 .1CC) GAS DENSITY AT 70'F, 1 artm Above the critical temperature 0.0417 lb/ft3 (.66 7 kg/rn 3) SOtuLUBIT IN WATER at 680F, 1 atm FREEZING POINT 3 3 0 3.3 CM/100 CM - 296.5 F (- 82.5CC) APPEARANCE AND ODOR Colorless, odorless, tasteless FIRE AND EXPLOSION HAZARD DATA FLASH POINT (Method used) AUTO IGNITION TEMPERATURE FLAMMABLE UIMITS % BY VOLUME GasI 999C'F(53700) LEL S5l UEL 150/ EXTINGUISHING MEDIA ELECTRICAL CLASSIFICATION Carbon dioxide or dry chemical 0 SPECIAL FIRE FIGHTING PROCEDURES Stop flow of gas. Use water to keep adjacent areas cool. Allow the fire to burn itself out. UNUSUAL FIRE AND EXPLOSION HAZARDS Air containing more than 14% methane burns without noise. Forms explosive mixtures with air or oxygen. REACTIVITY DATA Noncorrosive HAZARDOUS DECOMPOSITION PRODUCTS Ethylene, acetyene, hydrogen (only at very high temperatures) HAZARDOUS POLYMERIZATION CONDITIONS TO AVOID May Occur - W~~IlNot x rOcilcur II SPILL OR LEAK PROCEDURES STEPS TO BE TAKEN IN CASE MATERIAL IS RELEASED OR SPILLED Ventilate area to prevent flammable mixture from forming. Remove sources of ignition, heat, sparks, etc. Avoid entering area of flammable atmosphere. Carefully remove cylinders with slow leaks to a remote, outdoor location. - ~~Contact Air Products for assistance. WASTE DISPOSAL METHOD - 0~~lnot attempt to dispose of residual methane in cylinders. Return to Air Products for proper disposal with posi-4 .'ve pressure in Cylinder, cylinder valve tightly closed and valve caps in place. >1 ©~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~AirProducts and Chemicals, Inc 1986 Specialty Gas Department Air Products and Chemicals. lnc M4Ri' Box 538. Allentown, PA 18105 PRODUCT t.:: (215) 481-8257 RECOMMENDED FIRST AID TREATMENT (Continued) First degree burns (reddening only, as sunburn) or second degree burns (blistering) which are the result of fire exposure and are localized to a portion of an extremity or other small area of the body may be immersed in cool water for 10-20 minutes to relieve pain. Do NOT immerse the whole body in a cold bath. All thermal injuries except the most minor and localized burns should receive prompt medical care. Burned areas should be covered with the cleanest material available, such as a clean sheet, prior to transport. Do NOT use burn ointments or greasy mate- rials on burns which show more than localized reddening. VENTILATION (Continued) Natural or mechanical where gas is present. Methane must not exceed 5O/ of any air mixture. SPECIAL (Continued) Mechanical ventilation must be suitable for Class I Group D atmospheres. PrIried In U SA * M00ATERIAL'SAFETY DATA SHEETII! N.____ CORPORATE RESEARCH £ DEVELOPMENT > flhISODnm PSOSpWLE DDDECAsrD ATTE SCHENECTADY, N. Y. r235oI;s Phone: (518) 385-4085 DIAL COME 8235-40853 NOM5~ Dt oebr27 SECTION 1. KATERIAL IDENTIFICATION IThRIAL 1AZ;WeIT=SoD)uI 1NospihqgpDZChmAnyL ESCRfiPTON: Crystallizes from wtiftor Iia 904.I2220 and can exist as sveral hydrate torus, depending on processing, ad as the anhydrous saolt. DESIGNATIOI4S: TS?. Trisodlum Orthophosphate, Sodinm Phosphate. Tribasic, Tartary Sodita Phosphates CE Material D4KU, AM~D538, CASE 007 601 549 ACTUfl:Available from several suppliers. Including IHC Corporation, Monsanto Co., Stauffer Chemical Co., and Olin Corp. ______ SECTION 11. INGREDIENTS AND HAZARDS a MAZARD 0A7A Trisodiua Phosphate (as Wa394 .12M 20) Io-97 No TL.V establish.?* *Under OSHA inert dust limits It can be assised that air- (N2Pa904. 2O2) borne particulate. not otherwise controlled, is lte sat, Oral to a maximam of 5 mg/kg of respirable dust; howeverthis LD50 7400 mg/kg level may not be adequate to prevent Irritationwihts SEL WON III. PHYSICAL DATA lolling point -12 320 at 100 'C Specific gravity (20/6 C) - 1.62 (decomposes) pH of It wtaer solution at 25 C - ca 12 Melting point, dog C - 3fl3.3 (dec) Molecular weight 380.1 Solubility. S/lODg 320: at OC 1.5 at15 C 28.3 AflDUUMLL Odr :~ White or colorless crystalline at 70 C 157. solid (alsoiis.powder filae. granules, aet.). No odor. SECTION IV. FIRE AND EXPLOSION DATA 1LOWER UPPER Fash Point and Method Autol ition.Ten . Flammability L.1imtslin i None . I None INone Extinguishing Media: Use that which ia appropriate to the surrounding fire; this matorial Is Don-combustible. - - ~~In a fire situation at high temperature phosphates ean emit highly toxic phosphorus oxide fumes. Firefighters should use self-contained breathing apparatus. SECTION Vs REACTIVITY DATA 4 - T~~his material Is a stable alkaline solid at room temperaturn. It does not undergo hazar- douis polymerization. It is Incompatible with acidic materials, T ~~~~~~~~GENERALG ILECTRIC cM. c-¶mn js~ s'E~Wce-W". ND. 63 ;)NVi.*HEALTH HAZARD INFORMATION =LYDine established (See Sect 12) inis alkalit'e material will cause irruraion to the TdlPirstbry tract If inhaled as a dust or as a solution mist. ?rolonged or repeated skin contact will irritate the skin. Eye contact will Irritate end can damage the eyes (alkaline attack). This material Is low in toxicity by Ingestion, but Its alkaline nature will Irritate, injure the digestiv tract . (Trisoditr phosphate is used as a food additive; but It mast be reduced fr *1- ka~inity before being taken Into the body.) FIRST AID: Eve contact? Promptly flush with plenty of water for 15 minutes. Get medical help. Skin contact: Mash well with soap and water; rinse well with-water. U1 irritation persists, get medical help. Inhalation: Remove to fresh air. Get medical help If irritation persists. Ingestion: Cive 1-2 glasses of water or milk to drink to dilute; then give fruit juice or diluted vinegar to drink. Do not Induct vomiting' Imediately cont~ac a physician. SECTION VII. SPILL, LEAK, AND DISPOSAL PROCEDURES Tor large spills. notify safety personnel. Clean-up personnel should use protection against contact or Inhalation of dust or mist. Scoop up spill for recovery or disposal and place In a container with a lid. Flush residues 'to the isewer with plenty of water. DISPOSAL: Scrap material can be used for neutralizing acidic wastes, or It can be buried in an approved manner In an approved landfill. Small mounts can be flushed to the isewer If regulations permit. Follow Federal, State and local regulations for disposal. Vri.N WVI. SPECIAL PROTECTION INFORMATION Provide general ventilation to the workplace; If dusting conditions occur, local exhaust ventilation will be seeded and a 12051 approved dust respirator many be required. The use of rubber or plastic gloves and chemical safety glasses with side shields Is recommended for handling this material. An apron nmy also be aesirable to prevent con- tact with clothing, especially where solutions are involved. Provide eyewash station near to the workplace where this material is used; a safety shove may also be needed where large emounts of solution are prepared or ueed. SECTION IX. SPECIAL PRECAUTIONS AkND COMMENTS Store this material In tightly sealed containers In a clean, dry, ventilated area. Pre- vent physical damage to containers. Avoid contact with the body and Inhalation of dust. Note that eaihydrous trisodium phosphate and lover hydra.tes are more alkaline an a welizht basis than Na3O04.1T 2 02. APPROVALS:m .. 1n." "'A SOURCE(S) CODE: 1,2,4-7.12.15 Hygiene/A 0 ... sa. p...... ~v Crn cttCr .....]IndustrialCorporate Medical. .Staff - . .~~~~n-nn Ms. - Ir . a~~~~V MODUCTSI~~~~v Specialty Ga I~~ BYRNE SPECIALTY GASES Material Safet -+ a..~ Wasmn se"In (206) 764-4633D a a S e EMERGENCY PHONE MM00 5234274 PRODUCOTNAME IN PENNSYLVANIA (SOO)r32 el04 ISOBUTYLENE CAB #115-11.7 AIR PRODUCTS AND CHEMICALS, INC. WOAE NAME AND SYNONYMS BOX an Isobrutyne ALLENTOWN, PA 16105 CHEMICAL NAME AND SYNONYMS c215 48111425 lsobutyflene. Isobutenie, 2-Methylpropene ISSUE DATE FORMULA CHEMICAL FAMILY AND REVISIONS 1478. 06185 ('SO) C.4Ha[ Alkene HEALTH HAZARD DATA TIME WEIGHTED AVERAGE EXPOSURE UMIT See last page. SYMPTOMS OF EXPOSURE Inhalatiow: Moderate concentrations which exclude an adequate supply of oxygen to the lungs cause dizziness. drowsiness and eventual unconsciousness. It also has a very mild anesthetic effect which might cause lack of coordination or lessened mental alertness. Skin and Eye Contact: It is- mildly irritating to mucous membranes. Due to its rapid rate of evaporation, isobutylene can cause tissue freezing or frostbite on contact. TOXICOLOGICAL PROPERTIES Isobutylene has a very mild anesthetic effect, however, the major health hazard is the exclusion Of an adequate supply of oxygen to the lungs. Frostbite effects are a change in color of the skin to gray or white possibly followed by blistering. RECOMMENDED FIRST AID TAEATMENT PROMPT MEDICAL ATTENTION IS REQUIRED IN ALL CASES OF OVEREXPOSURE TO ISOBUTYLENE_ RES- CUE PERSONNEL SHOULD BE EOUIPPED WITH SELF-CONTAINED BREATHING APPARATUS AND MUST BE AWARE OF EXTREME FIRE AND EXPLOSION HAZARD. * ~~Inhalation: Move exposed personnel to an uncontaminated area. If not breathing, give artificial respiration, bly mouth-to-mouth. If breathing prefera- is diffitcult, give oxygen. Medical assistance should be sought immediately. Skin Contact or Frostbite: Aemove contaminated clothing and flush affected areas with lukewarm water. - ~~USE HOT WATER. A physician should DO NOT see the patient promptly If the cryogenic "bum" haib caused blistering the skin or deep tissue freezing. of Infloemait, COntaimned Wi thts malerial safety data sheet a offered waitoutf charge for use by techoclly quaifaied personnel diSCfehon and risk Anl slateeneos. Iechjical rto~rnstcon and becommencat~ons at their we believe Vicontie h*eren are based on lesis and dats whiflh Io be reliable, but th accuracy or comnp~eteness thertot is not 'tspedt terweto guaranteed and no warranty of any kind is mad. with ThIs anfotmat~on is not inten~ded as a license to operate under or a of irms Company recomnmendatcinr to practice of ~Iwvtie any patent or others covering any process. composnion of matter mt~use. Since the Company shall have no control of the use of the product descrted herein, the Company assumes no J ~~~~damage incutred from the proper Orrripoper usa, Of such product kability for less of * AZARDOUtSMIXTURES OF OTHER LIQUIDS, SuDS.ONOASES isobutylene is flammable over a wide range in at. PHYSICAL DATA SOIUING POINT LIUIWD DENSITY AT SOILING POISE? l9.6F (- 6.rC) 39.1 t/lt'l (626 kg/n") VAPOR PRESSURE ~ 70-F (21.MC 39 psia (269 kPa) GAS DENSITY AT?".¶ a O.148lt/ft'c(2.37 kg/m3) SOLUBIUITY IN WATER FREEZIHG POINT Insoluble______- 220.rvF (- 0uorC) APPEARANCE AND ODOR Colorless gas with an unpleasant odor similar to that which Is emitted when buring anthracite coal. FIRE AND EXPLOSION HAZARD DATA FLASH POINT (Method used) AUTO IGNITION TMEAUEFLAMMABLE UIMITS % See last page. By VOLUME 869-F (465C) an IA Et 9.6 EXTINGUISHING MEDIAELChCLLASPCTN Water, Carbon dioxide, dry chemical CAss 1CLGroupInoTseION e SPECIAL FIRE FIGHTING PROCEDURESClsI.Gunm Keep cYflpder(s) pcfe cool with water spray from a distance, If possible without possible risk, move cyrmder(s) away from fire area. If without risk, stop the flow of gas to a fire. Anow gas fire to bum itself out. (Continued on last page.) UNUSUAL FIRE AND EXPLOSION HAZARDS ISObutylene is denser than air and can travel considerable distances to an ignition source and flash back. Cylin- der(s) may explode or vent when exposed to fire. REACTIVIT DATA STABILITY CONDITIONS TO AVOID Unstable Stahl. X INCOMPATIBILITY (Materials tQ savoid Oxidizers HAZARDOUSDESPILLORSLEAKNPROCEDURE STPNonBeTAEINCSMAEILIREESDOSPLD thell800t emrec hn ubrlse een WSTEP DISOSBALKETHODSEMTRILI RLAEDO All Federal, Slate and Local regulations regarding heaft and poflution should be followed tact Air Products for specific in waste disposal. Con- recommendations. Do not dispose Of unused quantities. (Continued on last page.) AOrProducts and Che"nas. irncI1gas RESPIRATORY PROTECTION rpnclty type, Positive Pressure ak ineAmwth mask or Self-contained betngapparatus should be avaiable for emefrgency use. VENTILATION LOCAL EXHAUST SPECIAL Hood wirth forced ventilation -To prawer accumulation above the LEt. MECHANICAL pmn. OTHER fIn accordance with electrical codes PROTECTIVE GLOVES Plastic or rubber * EYE PROTECTION Safety gogges or glasses OThER PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT -Safety shoes, Safet Shower, eywsh "fountain." * ~~~~~~~SPECIAL PRECAUTIONS* SPECIAL LABEUING DOT Shipping INFORMATION Namt: Laqi~fued petroleum gas DOT Hazard Clast-Flammablega DOT Shppn Label: Flammable ga ID No.: UN 1075 SPECIAL. HANOUING RECOMMENDATIOnS Use only in well-ventilated areas. Valve Protection Caps Must remain inplace unless containeir salve outlet piped to use point. ISSecured with Do not drag, slide or roD cylinders. Use a suitable hand bruck for cylinder move- Tnent.Use a pressure reducing regulator when connecting emns. Do cylinder to lower pressure ( <250 psig) piping or sys- not heat cylinder by any means to Increase the discharge rate of product salve or from the cylinder. Use a check trap in the discharge line to prevent hazardous back flow into the cylinder. ror additional recommendations consult the Air Products Specialty Gas Catalog Safety and Technical Information Section or Compressed Gas Association Pamphlet P-i. WPECIAL STORAGE RECOMMENDATIONS * 'rotect cylinders from physical damage. Store in cool, dry, well-ventilated iway from area of non-combustible construction heavily Irafficked areas and emergency exits. Do not allow the temperature O exceed 130*F (54tC). Cylinders where cylinders are stored should be Stored upright and firmly secured to prevent falling or wer. Full and empty cylinders should bieing knocked be segregated. Use a "first in-first out" inventory system to prevent niders being stored for excessive periods of full cyl- time. Post "No Smoking or Open Flames" signs in the storage or use urea. There should be no sources of ignition in the storage or use area. 'or additional recommendations consult the Air Products Specialty Gas Catalog Safety and Technical Information ;ection or Compressed Gas Association Pamphlet P-i. ;PECIAc. PACKAGING RECOMMENDATIONS *Isobutylene is noncorrosive and may be used with any common structural material. 2THER RECOMMENDATIONS OR PRECAUTiONS Earth-ground and bond all lines and equipment associated with the isobutylene system. - $i~;Outd be non-sparking or explosion Electrical equipment proof. Compressed gas cylinders should not be refilled except by qualified )rOducers of compressed ga ses. Shipment of a compressed gas cylinder which has not been filled by the Owner )r with his (written) consent is a violation of Federal Law (4SCFR). 'Varfou Govt,,eo~t agencies (ic*.. Department of Transporna~ot.o Occupalcoai Safety Aarmrwsirai.on and othets) may and Health Adrinwins:a:.o. Foodf an Drug have specific reguathlons concernhn the transponat~on. handihng. storage wit not be reflectedl emOs data sheet. The customner oruse or tws product whac should review thesw regulation to ensure that he is m lu cmn~phu.r~e Ma syGMGaec cparlmm'd AIR I ;,i Products an Chemiesl. kw. PRODUCTS fr. Boxsm53. Aienlowu, PA 1181w5 02151 A814J3? TIME WEIGH4TED AVERAGE EXPOSURE UIMIT (Continued) isobutytene is defiried as a simrple asphyxiant Oxygen levels should be maintained at greater than 18 mnotar per- cent at normal atmiospheric pressure which is equivalent to a partial pressure of1135 mm Hg. (ACGIH 1984-85) FLASH POINT (Method Used) (Continuedf' - 105-F(- 7rC) Closed Cup SPECIAL FIRE FIGHTING PROCEDURES (Continued) Ventilate low areas where flammnable or explosive mixtures mnay form. WASTE DISPOSAL METHOD (Conitinued) Relumn the properly labeled shipping container to Air Products for disposal with valve(s) lightly cdosed, outlet seal(s) secured and valve protection cap in place. For emergency disposal assistance, call the "800" emergency phone number listed herein. P~,ntedan U.S A 320.54$